2. 《窟八偈经》义释的注释巴利
2. Guhaṭṭhakasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
7 在第二偈中:“有情”指执著。“在洞窟中”指在身体中。因为身体是贪等猛兽居住的地方,所以称为“洞窟”。“被众多所遮盖”:被许多已生起的贪等烦恼所遮盖。这一句说的是内在的束缚。“住立”:以贪等烦恼的方式而住立。“沉入迷醉处”:“迷醉处”指欲乐。因为在这里,天与人被迷惑,深深沉入其中;这一句说的是外在的束缚。“因为那种人远离了远离”:那种状态的人,对于三种远离——身远离、心远离、依远离——是远离的,不接近的。什么原因呢?“因为世间的欲确实难以断除”:意思是说,世间的欲不容易断除,所以说他远离了远离。巴利
7. Dutiye – sattoti laggo. Guhāyanti kāye. Kāyo hi rāgādīnaṃ vāḷānaṃ vasanokāsato ‘‘guhā’’ti vuccati. Bahunābhichannoti bahunā rāgādikilesajātena abhicchanno. Etena ajjhattabandhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tiṭṭhanti rāgādivasena tiṭṭhanto. Mohanasmiṃ pagāḷhoti mohanaṃ vuccati kāmaguṇo. Ettha hi devamanussā muyhanti tesu ajjhogāḷhā hutvā; etena bāhirabandhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Dūre vivekā hi tathāvidho soti so tathārūpo naro tividhāpi kāyavivekādivivekā dūre , anāsanne. Kiṃkāraṇā? Kāmā hi loke na hi suppahāyāti yasmā loke kāmā suppahāyā na honti, tasmāti vuttaṃ hoti.
所谓“有情”确实已经说过了,也就是以“有情、人、青年”这类方式已经说过了。接下来应当说“洞窟”,所以先讲“洞窟”。在“或为身”等说法中,这里的词语搭配是这样的:或为身,或为洞窟……乃至……或为罐。其中,“身”正如前面在讲念处时已经说过的“可厌之物的聚集处,所以叫身”等等。“洞窟”是因为它是贪等猛兽的栖息之处,所以叫洞窟;也有人说,是因为有覆藏的作用,所以叫洞窟,就像“远行、独行、无形体、住在洞窟中”等句子里那样。“肉身”是因为被贪等烦恼烧灼,所以叫肉身,就像“舍弃那人身”等句子里那样。“积聚身”是因为会让人放逸,所以叫积聚身,就像“这腐朽的积聚身必将碎裂,生命终归于死”等句子里那样。“船”是因为在轮回中往来航行,所以叫船,就像“比丘,舀出这船里的水吧,舀出后它会轻快地前进”等句子里那样。“车”是因为有行住坐卧四威仪的存在,所以叫车,就像“戒是车的装备,禅那为轴,精进为轮”等句子里那样。“旗”是因为高高竖起,所以叫旗,就像“旗是车的标志”等句子里那样。巴利
Sattoti hi kho vuttanti ‘‘satto, naro, mānavo’’ti evamādinā nayena kathitoyeva. Guhā tāva vattabbāti guhā tāva kathetabbā. Kāyoti vātiādīsu ayaṃ tāva padayojanā – kāyo iti vā guhā iti vā…pe… kumbho iti vāti. Tattha kāyoti ‘‘kucchitānaṃ āyoti kāyo’’tiādinā heṭṭhā satipaṭṭhānakathāyaṃ vuttoyeva. Rāgādivāḷānaṃ vasanokāsaṭṭhena guhā, ‘‘paṭicchādanaṭṭhenā’’tipi eke. ‘‘Dūraṅgamaṃ ekacaraṃ, asarīraṃ guhāsaya’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 37) viya. Rāgādīhi jhāpanaṭṭhena deho ‘‘te hitvā mānusaṃ deha’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.332 thokaṃ visadisaṃ) viya. Pamattakaraṇaṭṭhena sandeho ‘‘bhijjati pūtisandeho, maraṇantañhi jīvita’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 148) viya. Saṃsāre sañcaraṇaṭṭhena nāvā ‘‘siñca bhikkhu imaṃ nāvaṃ, sittā te lahumessatī’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 369) viya. Iriyāpathassa atthibhāvaṭṭhena ratho ‘‘ratho sīlaparikkhāro, jhānakkho cakkavīriyo’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.4) viya. Accuggataṭṭhena dhajo ‘‘dhajo rathassa paññāṇa’’ntiādīsu (jā. 2.22.1841) viya.
就像“比丘,蚁丘,这是对这座四大所成的身体的称呼”等经文里说的那样,这里是按“虫群的住处”这个意义说蚁丘。就像外面的蚁丘,因为四种原因被称为“蚁丘”:它会吐出东西,它是被吐出来的东西,它是吐出物堆积起来的,它是被吐出的黏液粘合起来的。因为它会吐出蛇、獴、老鼠、壁虎等各种小动物,所以叫蚁丘。因为它是白蚁吐出来的,所以叫蚁丘。因为白蚁吐出来之后,用嘴和喙把尘土粉末搬上去堆起来,堆到齐腰高,甚至有一人高,所以叫蚁丘。因为被白蚁吐出的唾液黏液粘合起来,就算天连续下七天七夜的雨也不会散开;到了热天,从上面抓一把土,用手一捏,黏液就会渗出来——像这样被吐出的黏液粘合起来,所以叫蚁丘。同样,这个身体也像“从眼睛流出眼垢”等等所说的那样,会排出各种不净的污秽,所以是蚁丘。佛陀、独觉佛、漏尽者们在活着时就因为彻底耗尽了对身体的贪爱而舍弃了身体,所以这个身体是圣者们吐掉的,因此也是蚁丘。这个身体由三百块骨头撑起来,用筋腱连接,涂上肉,裹着湿皮,再被肤色装点,以此来欺骗众生;这一切都是圣者们吐掉的,所以它是“吐出物堆积起来的”,也是蚁丘。就像“渴爱生出人,他的心到处跑”所说的那样,这个身体是渴爱生出来的,被圣者们已经吐掉的渴爱黏液粘合着,所以它是“被吐出的黏液粘合起来的”,也是蚁丘。又像蚁丘里面有各种小虫,就在那里出生,在那里大小便,生病了就躺在那里,死了就倒在那里。这样一来,那个蚁丘就成了它们的产房、厕所、病房和坟墓。同样,就算是刹帝利大户人家等等的身体,也不要想着“这是被守护、被装点、有大威德者的身体”,实际上,依皮肤而生的虫、依皮肉而生的虫、依肉而生的虫、依筋腱而生的虫、依骨而生的虫、依骨髓而生的虫,这样按种类算大约有八十千种虫群,就在这身体里面出生,在里面大小便,因为生病而痛苦地躺着,死了就一个个倒在那里。这样一来,这个身体也就成了那些虫群的产房、厕所、病房和坟墓,因此被称为“蚁丘”。巴利
Kimikulānaṃ āvāsabhāvena vammiko ‘‘vammikoti kho, bhikkhu, imassetaṃ cātumahābhūtikassa kāyassa adhivacana’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.251) viya. Yatheva hi bāhirako vammiko, vamati vantako vantussayo vantasinehasambaddhoti catūhi kāraṇehi ‘‘vammiko’’ti vuccati. So hi ahinakulaundūragharagoḷikādayo nānappakāre pāṇake vamatīti vammiko. Upacikāhi vantakoti vammiko. Upacikāhi vamitvā mukhatuṇḍakehi ukkhittapaṃsucuṇṇena kaṭippamāṇenapi porisappamāṇenapi ussitoti vammiko. Upacikāhi vantakheḷasinehena ābaddhatāya sattasattāhaṃ deve vassantepi na vippakirīyati, nidāghepi tato paṃsumuṭṭhiṃ gahetvā tasmiṃ muṭṭhinā pīḷiyamāne sineho nikkhamati, evaṃ vantasinehena sambaddhoti vammiko. Evamayaṃ kāyopi ‘‘akkhimhā aggigūthako’’tiādinā nayena nānappakāraṃ asucikalimalaṃ vamatīti vammiko. Buddhapaccekabuddhakhīṇāsavā imasmiṃ attabhāve nikantipariyādānena attabhāvaṃ chaḍḍetvā gatāti ariyehi vantakotipi vammiko. Yehi cāyaṃ tīhi aṭṭhisatehi ussito nahārusambaddho maṃsāvalepano allacammapariyonaddho chavirañjito satte vañceti, taṃ sabbaṃ ariyehi vantamevāti vantussayotipi vammiko. ‘‘Taṇhā janeti purisaṃ, cittamassa vidhāvatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.55-57) evaṃ taṇhāya janitattā ariyehi vanteneva taṇhāsinehena sambaddho ayanti vantasinehena sambaddhotipi vammiko. Yathā ca vammikassa anto nānappakārā pāṇakā tattheva jāyanti, uccārapassāvaṃ karonti, gilānā sayanti, matā nipatanti. Iti so tesaṃ sūtigharaṃ vaccakuṭi gilānasālā susānañca hoti. Evaṃ khattiyamahāsālādīnampi kāyo ‘‘ayaṃ gopitarakkhito maṇḍitapasādito mahānubhāvānaṃ kāyo’’ti acintetvā chavinissitā pāṇā cammanissitā pāṇā maṃsanissitā pāṇā nahārunissitā pāṇā aṭṭhinissitā pāṇā aṭṭhimiñjanissitā pāṇāti evaṃ kulagaṇanāya asītimattāni kimikulasahassāni antokāyasmiṃyeva jāyanti, uccārapassāvaṃ karonti, gelaññena āturitāni sayanti, matāmatā nipatanti. Iti ayampi tesaṃ pāṇānaṃ sūtigharaṃ vaccakuṭi gilānasālā susānañca hotīti ‘‘vammiko’’ti saṅkhaṃ gato.
城:以可爱与不可爱之境生起的意义,就像“萨迦耶城”等说法那样。巢:以病等的巢穴、栖息处的意义,就像“病之巢,易坏者”(《法句》148)等说法那样。小屋:以结生时的住处之义,就像“进入五门的小屋”(《长老偈》125)等说法那样。瘤:以腐烂之义,就像“诸比丘,这是病,诸比丘,这是瘤,诸比丘,这是箭,这是对此身的称呼”(《增支部》9.15)等说法那样。罐:以坏灭之义,就像“了知此身如罐”(《法句》40)等说法那样。这是对此身的称呼:这是对上述由四大所造、充满可厌之法的聚集处的称呼,意思是“为什么叫身”。在窟中:即在身体之中。有情:即粘着。遍粘:以显色贪等种种方式而种种粘着。著:以形态贪的方式而执著。就在那里,以“美、乐”的方式执取,所以是耽著。以执取自我的方式而黏着。被缚:以触贪的方式而不放舍地停留。墙壁之钉:即钉在墙上的橛。象牙:即同样像象牙那样弯曲的木棍。有情:即粘在墙壁之钉上的。遍粘:即粘在象牙上的。著:即挂在衣架上的。黏:即被衣绳缠住的。黏着:即粘在椅脚上的。被缚:即粘在床脚上的。应当按这样的方式配合理解。巴利
Manāpāmanāpapatanaṭṭhena nagaraṃ ‘‘sakkāyanagara’’ntiādīsu viya. Rogādīnaṃ nīḷabhāvena kulāvakabhāvena nīḷaṃ ‘‘roganīḷaṃ pabhaṅgura’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 148) viya. Paṭisandhiyā nivāsagehaṭṭhena kuṭi ‘‘pañcadvārāyaṃ kuṭikāyaṃ pasakkiyā’’tiādīsu (theragā. 125) viya. Pūtibhāvena gaṇḍo ‘‘rogoti bhikkhave, gaṇḍoti bhikkhave, salloti bhikkhave, kāyassetaṃ adhivacana’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 9.15) viya. Bhijjanaṭṭhena kumbho ‘‘kumbhūpamaṃ kāyamimaṃ viditvā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 40) viya. Kāyassetaṃ adhivacananti etaṃ vuttappakāraṃ catumahābhūtamayassa kucchitadhammānaṃ āyassa adhivacanaṃ, kathananti attho. Guhāyanti sarīrasmiṃ . Sattoti allīno. Visattoti vaṇṇarāgādivasena vividho allīno. Saṇṭhānarāgavasena āsatto. Tattheva ‘‘subhaṃ sukha’’nti gahaṇavasena laggo. Attaggahaṇavasena laggito. Palibuddhoti phassarāgavasena amuñcitvā ṭhito. Bhittikhileti bhittiyaṃ ākoṭitakhāṇuke. Nāgadanteti tatheva hatthidantasadise vaṅkadaṇḍake. Sattanti bhittikhile laggaṃ. Visattanti nāgadante laggaṃ. Āsattanti cīvaravaṃse laggaṃ. Lagganti cīvararajjuyā laggaṃ. Laggitanti pīṭhapāde laggaṃ. Palibuddhanti mañcapāde lagganti evamādinā nayena yojetabbaṃ.
“粘着”这个词,是特别指紧紧依附的状态。“遮盖”,是被上面说的那些烦恼盖住了。因为烦恼一次又一次地生起,一层又一层地盖上来,所以叫“遍遮”。“覆”,是被遮蔽。“蔽”,是被挡住。“蒙”,是铺散开来盖住。“封”,就像用容器扣住锅口那样,被严严实实地裹住。“覆藏”,是被掩蔽。“倒覆”,是像脸朝下倒扣着放。其中,“遮盖”就像被草叶等盖住一样;“遍遮”就像横在河上的拦水坝一样;“覆”就像堵住人们来往道路的障碍一样。巴利
Lagganādhivacananti visesena allīyanakathanaṃ. Channoti vuttappakārehi kilesehi chādito. Punappunaṃ uppattivasena uparūpari channoti ucchanno. Āvutoti āvarito. Nivutoti vārito. Ophutoti avattharitvā chādito. Pihitoti bhājanena ukkhalimukhaṃ viya paliguṇṭhito. Paṭicchannoti āvaṭo. Paṭikujjitoti adhomukhaṃ ṭhapito. Tattha tiṇapaṇṇādīhi chāditaṃ viya channo. Ucchanno nadiṃ āvaraṇasetu viya. Āvuto janasañcaraṇamaggāvaraṇaṃ viya.
被种种慢所系缚:以各种我慢和过慢,在各种各样的所缘上被绑住而停留。被邪见所执取:以六十二种邪见被执取,就是被触碰、被抓取。进入散乱:因为心不能稳定地停留在所缘上,所以达到了心的散乱状态。进入不确定:因为对三宝等的疑惑,无法达到确定。进入坚固状态:由于难以去除、未被断除的随眠烦恼,达到了坚固并持续停留。巴利
Vinibaddho mānavasenāti nānāvidhena mānātimānavasena nānāvidhe ārammaṇe baddho hutvā tiṭṭhati. Parāmaṭṭho diṭṭhivasenāti dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhīnaṃ vasena parāmaṭṭho āmasitvā gahito. Vikkhepagato uddhaccavasenāti ārammaṇe asantiṭṭhanavasena cittavikkhepaṃ patto upagato. Aniṭṭhaṅgato vicikicchāvasenāti ratanattayādīsu kaṅkhāsaṅkhātāya vicikicchāya vasena sanniṭṭhānaṃ appatto. Thāmagato anusayavasenāti dunnīharaṇaappahīnānusayavasena thirabhāvaṃ patto upagato hutvā tiṭṭhati.
以色为近依:以渴爱和邪见为依托,趋近色,把它当作所缘。识安住时安住:在那个所缘上,以色为所缘的识安住时,就是安住。以色为所缘、以色为依处:就是以色本身为所缘、为攀缘,又以色本身为依处。被喜浇灌:识被带着喜悦的渴爱之水浇灌。增长:达到增长的状态。繁茂:以速行心的方式,向上达到繁茂。广大:以彼所缘心的方式,达到广大。巴利
Rūpūpayanti taṇhādiṭṭhūpayavasena rūpaṃ upagantvā ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Viññāṇaṃ tiṭṭhamānaṃ tiṭṭhatīti tasmiṃ ārammaṇe rūpārammaṇaṃ viññāṇaṃ tiṭṭhantaṃ tiṭṭhati. Rūpārammaṇaṃrūpapatiṭṭhanti rūpameva ārammaṇaṃ ālambitvā rūpameva patiṭṭhaṃ katvā. Nandūpasecananti sappītikataṇhodakena āsittaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Vuddhinti vuddhibhāvaṃ. Virūḷhinti javanavasena uparito virūḷhibhāvaṃ. Vepullanti tadārammaṇavasena vepullaṃ.
“有贪”等,都是贪的名称。它因为染着而称为贪,因为欢喜而称为喜,因为渴求而称为渴爱。“识在那里安住、生长”:这是说,业已经快速生起,具备牵引结生的能力,所以识既安住又生长。“于何处”:指三界轮回中的处所。或者,前面那些词句里的“于何处”都是处所的意思。“那里有诸行的增长”:这是针对安住在果报轮回中的人,就未来能成为轮回之因的诸行而说的。“于何处有未来的再生”:在哪个地方,未来有后有的再生。应当知道:第一经是就粘着色等所缘而说的,第二经是就欢喜同一所缘而说的,第三经是就识安住的方式而说的,第四经是就四种食、善与不善识安住而说的。巴利
Atthirāgotiādīni lobhasseva nāmāni. So hi rañjanavasena rāgo, nandanavasena nandī, taṇhāyanavasena taṇhāti vuccati. Patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ virūḷhanti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāya patiṭṭhitañceva virūḷhañca. Yatthāti tebhūmakavaṭṭe bhummaṃ. Sabbattha vā purimapade etaṃ bhummaṃ. Atthi tattha saṅkhārānaṃ vuddhīti idaṃ imasmiṃ vipākavaṭṭe ṭhitassa āyatiṃ vaṭṭahetuke saṅkhāre sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yattha atthi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattīti yasmiṃ ṭhāne āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti atthi. Tattha purimasuttaṃ rūpādiārammaṇalagganavasena vuttaṃ, dutiyasuttaṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ abhinandanavasena vuttaṃ, tatiyaṃ viññāṇapatiṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ, catutthaṃ catubbidhaāhāravasena, kusalākusalaviññāṇapatiṭṭhānavasena vuttanti ñātabbaṃ.
大多数情况下,就是通常的意思。迷乱,就是陷入愚痴。严重迷乱,就是特别地迷乱。彻底迷乱,就是以一切方式迷乱。或者也可以说:因为色所缘而迷乱,因为声所缘而严重迷乱,因为触所缘而彻底迷乱。被无明弄瞎,就是在八种情形下由于无明的无知而被弄瞎。也可以读作“已去”,意思是进入了盲的状态。已潜入,就是已经进入。已沉入,就是向下进入。已深深沉入,就是更深入地、覆盖式地进入。已淹没,就是头朝下地沉下去。或者也可以说:因为眼触而潜入,因为耳触而深深沉入,因为言语接触而淹没。又或者,远离善知识的人是潜入,远离正法修习的人是深深沉入,远离法随法行的人是淹没。巴利
Yebhuyyenāti pāyena. Muyhantīti mohaṃ āpajjanti. Sammuyhantīti visesena muyhanti. Sampamuyhantīti sabbākārena muyhanti. Atha vā rūpārammaṇaṃ paṭicca muyhanti, saddārammaṇaṃ paṭicca sammuyhanti, mutārammaṇaṃ paṭicca sampamuyhanti. Avijjāya andhīkatāti aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu aññāṇāya avijjāya andhīkatā. ‘‘Gatā’’ti vā pāṭho, andhabhāvaṃ upagatāti attho. Pagāḷhoti paviṭṭho. Ogāḷhoti heṭṭhābhāgaṃ paviṭṭho. Ajjhogāḷhoti adhiogāhitvā avattharitvā visesena paviṭṭho nimuggoti adhomukhaṃ hutvā paviṭṭho. Atha vā dassanasaṃsaggena ogāḷho. Savanasaṃsaggena ajjhogāḷho. Vacanasaṃsaggena nimuggo. Sappurisasaṃsaggavirahito vā ogāḷho. Saddhammasevanavirahito vā ajjhogāḷho. Dhammānudhammapaṭipattivirahito vā nimuggo.
所谓“远离”,就是离开、脱离,或者分离的状态。“三种”是数量上的限定。“身远离”就是身体上的离开、避开、不接近。心远离等也是同样的道理。这里的“比丘”,是指在这样的教法之中,因为看见轮回中的可怕,所以称为比丘。“远离的”,意思是空旷、声音少、没有喧闹。正是针对这一点,《分别论》中说:“所谓‘远离’,即使住处很近,只要没有被在家众和出家众占满,那就是远离。”在那里睡卧和安坐,所以叫“坐卧具”,这是床、椅等的代称。因此他说——巴利
Vivekāti vivitti, viviccanaṃ vā viveko. Tayoti gaṇanaparicchedo. Kāyavivekoti kāyena vivitti, vinā apasakkanaṃ. Cittavivekādīsupi eseva nayo. Idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane. Saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhanato bhikkhu. Vivittanti suññaṃ, appasaddaṃ appanigghosanti attho. Etadeva hi sandhāya vibhaṅge ‘‘vivittanti santike cepi senāsanaṃ hoti, tañca anākiṇṇaṃ gahaṭṭhehi pabbajitehi, tena taṃ vivitta’’nti (vibha. 526) vuttaṃ. Seti ceva āsati ca etthāti senāsanaṃ, mañcapīṭhādīnametamadhivacanaṃ. Tenāha –
坐卧具:床是坐卧具,椅子也是……蒲团也是……枕头也是……精舍也是……半坡屋也是……殿堂也是……楼阁也是……茅舍也是……岩洞也是……山洞也是……树下也是……竹丛也是……凡是比丘们退居休息的地方,这一切都是坐卧具。巴利
‘‘Senāsananti mañcopi senāsanaṃ, pīṭhampi… bhisipi… bibbohanampi… vihāropi… aḍḍhayogopi… pāsādopi… aṭṭopi… māḷopi… leṇampi… guhāpi… rukkhamūlampi… veḷugumbopi… yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamanti, sabbametaṃ senāsana’’nti (vibha. 527).
另外,精舍、半坡屋、殿堂、楼阁、山洞,这叫做精舍类坐卧处。床、椅、褥、枕头,这叫做床椅类坐卧处。地毯、皮片、草席、叶席,这叫做敷具类坐卧处。或者比丘们休息的任何地方,这叫做处所类坐卧处。这样,坐卧处共有四种。这一切都已经被“坐卧处”这个词涵盖在内了。巴利
Api ca vihāro aḍḍhayogo pāsādo hammiyaṃ guhāti idaṃ vihārasenāsanaṃ nāma. Mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bibbohananti idaṃ mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ nāma. Cimilikā cammakhaṇḍo tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāroti idaṃ santhatasenāsanaṃ nāma. Yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamanti, idaṃ okāsasenāsanaṃ nāmāti evaṃ catubbidhaṃ senāsanaṃ hoti. Taṃ sabbampi senāsanaggahaṇena gahitameva.
在这里,为了说明什么样的住处适合那位像鸟一样、心向四方的比丘,经文接着说了“阿兰若、树下”等。其中,“阿兰若”,依照比丘尼戒的说明是:“走出城门外的门柱之后,那一切都叫阿兰若。”但“所谓阿兰若住处,最远不超过五百弓”,这才是适合这位比丘的。它的具体特征在《清净道论·头陀支解说》里已经讲过。“树下”,是指任何有清凉树荫、僻静无人的树下。“山”,就是岩石山。因为在那种地方,先在池塘边洗完澡、办完用水的事,坐在清凉的树荫下,当各方都在被炎热所逼、被凉风吹拂时,心就会专一。“峡涧”,ka是水,被水冲裂,即被水冲裂的山地,也就是所谓的河岸或河湾。因为在那种地方,有像银板一样的沙子,头顶上有像宝珠帐幕一样的树林,像宝珠堆一样的水流着。下到这样的峡涧,喝了水,使身体清凉,堆起沙子,铺开粪扫衣,坐下修沙门法时,心就会专一。“岩窟”,是两山之间,或者在一座山之中像隧道一样的大洞穴。冢间的特征在《清净道论》里已经讲过。巴利
Idha panassa sakuṇasadisassa cātuddisassa bhikkhuno anucchavikasenāsanaṃ dassento ‘‘araññaṃ rukkhamūla’’ntiādimāha. Tattha araññanti ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) idaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena āgataṃ. ‘‘Āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) idaṃ pana imassa bhikkhuno anurūpaṃ. Tassa lakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge dhutaṅganiddese (visuddhi. 1.31) vuttaṃ. Rukkhamūlanti yaṃkiñci santacchāyaṃ vivittaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ. Pabbatanti selaṃ. Tattha hi udakasoṇḍīsu udakakiccaṃ katvā sītāya rukkhacchāyāya nisinnassa nānādisāsu khāyamānāsu sītena vātena bījiyamānassa cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Kandaranti kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ, tena dāritaṃ, udakena bhinnaṃ pabbatapadesaṃ. Yaṃ ‘‘nadītumba’’ntipi ‘‘nadīkuñja’’ntipi vadanti. Tattha hi rajatapaṭṭasadisā vālukā hoti, matthake maṇivitānaṃ viya vanagahanaṃ, maṇikhandhasadisaṃ udakaṃ sandati. Evarūpaṃ kandaraṃ oruyha pānīyaṃ pivitvā gattāni sītāni katvā vālukaṃ ussāpetvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ paññapetvā nisinnassa samaṇadhammaṃ karoto cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Giriguhanti dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ antaraṃ, ekasmiṃyeva vā umaṅgasadisaṃ mahāvivaraṃ. Susānalakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.34) vuttaṃ.
林野:是指越过村界、人们不常去的地方,那里不耕种也不播种。因此说“林野,这是对远离人烟的坐卧处的代称”等等(《分别论》531)。露天:就是没有遮盖的地方。不过如果有意愿,也可以在那里搭个衣棚住下。草堆:就是稻草堆。人们从大草堆里抽出稻草,搭成像山洞石窟那样的住处,或者把稻草铺在灌木丛等上面,然后坐在下面修习沙门法。以上这些都是针对“以身远离而住”等说法而说的。他独自一人,决意经行,维持经行,说的就是这个意思。他行,就是从事威仪动作。他转,就是发起威仪动作的持续。他护,就是守护威仪动作。他持,就是维持。他住,就是让(威仪)持续下去。巴利
Vanapatthanti gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānaṃ yattha na kasanti na vapanti. Tenevāha ‘‘vanapatthanti dūrānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’ntiādi (vibha. 531). Abbhokāsanti acchannaṃ. Ākaṅkhamāno panettha cīvarakuṭiṃ katvā vasati. Palālapuñjanti palālarāsiṃ. Mahāpalālapuñjato hi palālaṃ nikkaḍḍhitvā pabbhāraleṇasadise ālaye karonti, gacchagumbādīnampi upari palālaṃ pakkhipitvā heṭṭhā nisinnā samaṇadhammaṃ karonti. Sabbametaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyena vivitto viharatī’’tiādi. Eko caṅkamaṃ adhiṭṭhāti pavattayatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Iriyatīti iriyāpathaṃ vattayati. Vattatīti iriyāpathavuttiṃ uppādeti. Pāletīti iriyāpathaṃ rakkhati. Yapetīti yapayati. Yāpetīti yāpayati.
证入初禅的人:就是具备善的禅那的人。心从诸盖中远离出来:在近行定的时候,心虽然也已经从诸盖中远离,但只有在安止定中,才真正称得上是彻底远离。为了说明这一点,所以说“证入初禅的人,心从诸盖中远离”。证入第二、第三、第四禅那的人,从寻、伺、喜、乐、苦而远离,道理也是一样的。从色想:指依善、异熟、唯作而有的十五种色界禅那的想。从有对想:指由眼与色等根境的接触而生起的、依善与不善异熟而说的双五识,也就是有对想。从种种想:就是在种种所缘中转起的四十四种欲界想。心从这些远离,成为空。巴利
Paṭhamaṃjhānaṃ samāpannassāti kusalajjhānasamaṅgissa. Nīvaraṇehi cittaṃ vivittanti upacārena nīvaraṇehi vivittampi samānaṃ antoappanāyaṃ suṭṭhu vivittaṃ nāma hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa nīvaraṇehi cittaṃ vivittaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Eseva nayo vitakkavicārapītisukhadukkhehi dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānāni samāpannānanti. Rūpasaññāyāti kusalavipākakiriyavasena pañcadasannaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ saññāya. Paṭighasaññāyāti cakkhurūpādisaṅghaṭṭanena uppannāya kusalākusalavipākavasena dvipañcaviññāṇasaṅkhātāya paṭighasaññāya ca. Nānattasaññāyāti nānārammaṇe pavattāya catucattālīsakāmāvacarasaññāya ca cittaṃ vivittaṃ hoti suññaṃ hoti.
证入空无边处的人:这里,“没有它的边际”所以叫“无边”;虚空是无边的,所以叫“虚空无边”;虚空无边本身就是“空无边”。“空无边”以安立处之义作为它的处所——对于与它相应的禅那及其相应法来说,就像诸天的天处一样,所以叫“空无边处”。这是对破除遍相之后、以虚空为所缘的禅那的称呼。证入那空无边处,就是证入善的或唯作的禅那。“从色想”:以想为首,指的是色界禅那以及以它为所缘的对象。因为色界禅那也被称为“色”,比如“有色者见色”等说法;它的所缘也被称为“在外见好色丑色”等。所以这里,“对色的想”就是色想,这样以想为首,是对色界禅那的称呼。“于色有想”就是色想,意思是把色当作名称。应当知道,这也是对以地遍等为区别的所缘的称呼。通过这种色想——按善、异熟、唯作来分有十五种,称为禅那的色想;按地遍等来分有八种,称为所缘的色想。巴利
Ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samāpannassāti ettha nāssa antoti anantaṃ, ākāsaṃ anantaṃ ākāsānantaṃ, ākāsānantameva ākāsānañcaṃ, taṃ ākāsānañcaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa devānaṃ devāyatanamivāti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ, kasiṇugghāṭimākāsārammaṇajhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samāpannassa kusalakiriyajhānaṃ samāpannassa. Rūpasaññāyāti saññāsīsena rūpāvacarajjhānato ceva tadārammaṇato ca. Rūpāvacarajjhānampi hi ‘‘rūpa’’nti vuccati ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.209), tassa ārammaṇampi ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passati suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’tiādīsupi (paṭi. ma. 1.209). Tasmā idha rūpe saññā rūpasaññāti evaṃ saññāsīsena rūpāvacarajjhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Rūpe saññā assāti rūpasaññaṃ, rūpamassa nāmanti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ pathavīkasiṇādibhedassa tadārammaṇassa cetaṃ adhivacananti veditabbaṃ. Etāya kusalavipākakiriyāvasena pañcadasavidhāya jhānasaṅkhātāya rūpasaññāya. Etāya ca pathavīkasiṇādivasena aṭṭhavidhāya ārammaṇasaṅkhātāya rūpasaññāya.
所谓“有对想”,就是由眼等根、色等境这些对象接触后生起的想,也就是对色想等的称呼。正如经中所说:“其中,什么是有对想?色想、声想、香想、味想、触想,这些就叫有对想。”(《分别论》603)这些就是善异熟五种和不善异熟五种,属于这个有对想。巴利
Paṭighasaññāyāti cakkhādīnaṃ vatthūnaṃ rūpādīnaṃ ārammaṇānañca paṭighātena samuppannā saññā paṭighasaññā, rūpasaññādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘tattha katamā paṭighasaññā? Rūpasaññā saddasaññā gandhasaññā rasasaññā phoṭṭhabbasaññā, imā vuccanti paṭighasaññāyo’’ti (vibha. 603). Tā kusalavipākā pañca akusalavipākā pañcāti etāya paṭighasaññāya.
“种种想”是指:在种种不同的所缘中生起的想,或者是指种种不同的想。正如《分别论》中所说:“其中,什么是种种想?未入定而具有意界或意识界者的想、了知、了知的状态,这些就叫作种种想。”(《分别论》604)《分别论》中就是这样分别解说的。这里指的就是这些想。未入定的人,那些属于意界和意识界的想,在色、声等种种不同、各有不同自性的所缘中生起。而且,这些想包括八种欲界善想、十二种不善想、十一种欲界善异熟想、两种不善异熟想、十一种欲界唯作想,这样总共四十四种想,都是种种不同的、各有不同自性的、彼此不相似的,所以称为“种种想”,就是由这种种想。巴利
Nānattasaññāyāti nānatte gocare pavattāya saññāya, nānattāya vā saññāya. Yathāha – ‘‘tattha katamā nānattasaññā? Asamāpannassa manodhātusamaṅgissa vā manoviññāṇadhātusamaṅgissa vā saññā sañjānanā sañjānitattaṃ, imā vuccanti nānattasaññāyo’’ti (vibha. 604) evaṃ vibhaṅge vibhajitvā vuttā. Tā idha adhippetā. Asamāpannassa manodhātumanoviññāṇadhātusaṅgahitā saññā rūpasaddādibhede nānatte nānāsabhāve gocare pavattanti. Yasmā cesā aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalasaññā, dvādasa akusalasaññā, ekādasa kāmāvacarakusalavipākasaññā, dve akusalavipākasaññā , ekādasa kāmāvacarakiriyasaññāti evaṃ catucattālīsampi saññā nānattā nānāsabhāvā aññamaññaṃ asadisā, tasmā ‘‘nānattasaññā’’ti vuttā, tāya nānattasaññāya.
心远离:对于已进入空无边处定的人,他的禅那心从被称为色想、有对想、种种想的那些想中远离、脱离、退开。识无边处:就是以这个识作为依止处,所以它是识的处所,因此叫识无边处;这是对以虚空中生起的识为所缘的禅那的称呼。对于已进入那禅那的人,他的心从上述那种空无边处想中远离。巴利
Cittaṃ vivittaṃ hotīti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samāpannassa rūpasaññāpaṭighasaññānānattasaññāsaṅkhātāhi saññāhi jhānacittaṃ vivittaṃ hoti vinā hoti apasakkanaṃ hoti. Viññāṇañcāyatananti etadeva viññāṇaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassāti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ, ākāse pavattaviññāṇārammaṇassa jhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa vuttappakārāya ākāsānañcāyatanasaññāya cittaṃ vivittaṃ hoti.
“无所有处”在这里是指:他没有任何所有,所以叫“无所有”;意思是说,连最微小的坏灭分都没有剩下。无所有的状态就叫“无所有性”,这是对“空无边处识的灭去”的称呼。这种无所有性以“依处”的意义成为他的处所,所以叫“无所有处”;这是对以“在虚空中生起的识的灭去”为所缘的禅那的称呼。证入无所有处的人,他的心从识无边处想中脱离出来。巴利
Ākiñcaññāyatananti ettha pana nāssa kiñcananti akiñcanaṃ, antamaso bhaṅgamattampi assa avasiṭṭhaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Akiñcanassa bhāvo ākiñcaññaṃ, ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇāpagamassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ ākiñcaññaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassāti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ, ākāse pavattitaviññāṇāpagamārammaṇajhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpannassa tāya viññāṇañcāyatanasaññāya cittaṃ vivittaṃ.
关于“非想非非想处”:在这里,为了说明由于有某种想,那个状态才被称为“非想非非想处”,以及那种想是依照修行者的方式而存在的,先在《分别论》中举出“非想非非想者”,然后说:“他作意无所有处为寂静,修习残余行所摄的等至,因此称为非想非非想者。”其中,“作意为寂静”的意思是:他这样作意——“这个等至确实是寂静的,因为它以无所有为所缘而安住”,也就是以所缘寂静的缘故,把它作意为“寂静”。当安住于非想非非想处时,由于那无所有处想,他的禅那心就成为空的。巴利
Nevasaññānāsaññāyatananti ettha pana yāya saññāya bhāvato taṃ ‘‘nevasaññānāsaññāyatana’’nti vuccati, yathāpaṭipannassa sā saññā hoti, taṃ tāva dassetuṃ vibhaṅge (vibha. 620) ‘‘nevasaññīnāsaññī’’ti uddharitvā taññeva ‘‘ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ santato manasi karoti, saṅkhārāvasesasamāpattiṃ bhāveti, tena vuccati nevasaññīnāsaññī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha santato manasi karotīti ‘‘santovatāyaṃ samāpatti, yatra hi nāma natthibhāvampi ārammaṇaṃ karitvā vasatī’’ti evaṃ santārammaṇatāya naṃ ‘‘santā’’ti manasi karoti. Taṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ appetvā nisinnassa tāya ākiñcaññāyatanasaññāya jhānacittaṃ suññaṃ hoti.
“入流者”就是指已经证得入流果的人。“有身见”就是指以二十种事为对象的有身见。“疑”就是指在八处生起的疑惑。“戒禁取”就是指执取“靠戒得清净,靠苦行誓愿得清净”而生起的邪见。“见随眠”就是指因为还没有断除,所以在心相续中潜藏为随眠的见随眠;疑随眠也是这样。“与彼一聚者”就是指与那些有身见等烦恼同处一聚的烦恼。它们烧灼、逼恼心,所以叫烦恼;因为那些有身见等烦恼,心就变得远离、空无。这里说的“一聚”有两种:断除上的同一聚,以及俱生上的同一聚。能导向恶趣的烦恼,只要还没有被入流道断除,就会和见、疑一起存在于同一个人身上,这就是断除上的同一聚。在十种烦恼里,这里只提到了见和疑;在随眠里,提到了见随眠和疑随眠。其余能导向恶趣的贪、嗔、痴、慢、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧这八种烦恼,与见和疑构成断除上的同一聚,连同两种随眠一起,被入流道断除。或者,在以贪、嗔、痴等为首的一千五百种烦恼中,入流道断除见的时候,疑就和见一起被断除;连同见随眠和疑随眠,所有能导向恶趣的烦恼都以断除上的同一聚而被断除。至于俱生上的同一聚,则是指其余那些与见和疑在同一心中生起的烦恼。巴利
Sotāpannassāti sotāpattiphalaṃ pattassa. Sakkāyadiṭṭhiyāti vīsativatthukāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā. Vicikicchāyāti aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu kaṅkhāya. Sīlabbataparāmāsāti ‘‘sīlena suddhi, vatena suddhī’’ti parāmasitvā uppajjanakadiṭṭhi. Diṭṭhānusayāti appahīnaṭṭhena santāne anusayakā diṭṭhānusayā. Tathā vicikicchānusayā. Tadekaṭṭhehi cāti tehi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādīhi ekato ṭhitehi ca. Upatāpenti vibādhenti cāti kilesā, tehi sakkāyadiṭṭhiyādikilesehi cittaṃ vivittaṃ suññaṃ hoti. Ettha ‘‘tadekaṭṭha’’nti duvidhaṃ ekaṭṭhaṃ pahānekaṭṭhaṃ sahajekaṭṭhañca. Apāyagamanīyā hi kilesā yāva sotāpattimaggena na pahīyanti, tāva diṭṭhivicikicchāhi saha ekasmiṃ puggale ṭhitāti pahānekaṭṭhā. Dasasu hi kilesesu idha diṭṭhivicikicchā eva āgatā. Anusayesu diṭṭhānusayavicikicchānusayā āgatā. Sesā pana apāyagamanīyo lobho doso moho māno thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti aṭṭha kilesā diṭṭhivicikicchāhi saha pahānekaṭṭhā hutvā dvīhi anusayehi saddhiṃ sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti. Rāgadosamohapamukhesu vā diyaḍḍhesu kilesasahassesu sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhiyā pahīyamānāya diṭṭhiyā saha vicikicchā pahīnā, diṭṭhānusayavicikicchānusayehi saha apāyagamanīyā sabbakilesā pahānekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Sahajekaṭṭhā pana diṭṭhiyā saha vicikicchāya ca saha ekekasmiṃ citte ṭhitā avasesakilesā.
以须陀洹道,确实会断除五种心:四种与见相应的心,以及一种与疑相应的心。其中,当两种与见相应、无行的心被断除时,与它们俱生的贪、痴、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,就按俱生一聚的方式被断除;当两种与见相应、有行的心被断除时,与它们俱生的贪、痴、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,就按俱生一聚的方式被断除;当与疑相应的心被断除时,与它俱生的痴、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,就按俱生一聚的方式被断除。心由于这两类一聚的烦恼而脱离,也就是说,道心脱离,果心脱离、不系属、退离、成为空无。巴利
Sotāpattimaggena hi cattāri diṭṭhisahagatāni vicikicchāsahagatañcāti pañca cittāni pahīyanti. Tattha dvīsu diṭṭhisampayuttaasaṅkhārikacittesu pahīyamānesu tehi sahajāto lobho moho uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti, dvīsu diṭṭhisampayuttasasaṅkhārikacittesu pahīyamānesu tehi sahajāto lobho moho thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti, vicikicchāsahagatacitte pahīyamāne tena sahajāto moho uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Tehi duvidhekaṭṭhehi kilesehi cittaṃ vivittaṃ hotīti maggacittaṃ viviccati, phalacittaṃ vivittaṃ viyuttaṃ apasakkitaṃ suññaṃ hotīti attho.
一来者的粗欲贪结,是指那种已经变得粗重、成为身门违犯之因的结,也就是被称为淫欲贪的结。因为它把众生系缚在欲界里,所以叫“结”。嗔结,就是嗔恨结。因为它对所缘起对抗、违逆,所以叫“嗔”。这些结以强有力的状态潜藏在心相续中,所以叫随眠。细俱行,是指已经变得微细的欲贪结和嗔结,也就是因为尚未断除而潜藏在心相续中的微细欲贪随眠和嗔随眠。与彼一聚者,是说心与上述两类一聚烦恼远离、空无。巴利
Sakadāgāmissa oḷārikā kāmarāgasaññojanāti oḷārikabhūtā kāyadvāre vītikkamassa paccayabhāvena thūlabhūtā methunarāgasaṅkhātā saññojanā. So hi kāmabhave saññojetīti ‘‘saññojana’’nti vuccati. Paṭighasaññojanāti byāpādasaññojanā. So hi ārammaṇe paṭihaññatīti ‘‘paṭigha’’nti vuccati. Te eva thāmagataṭṭhena santāne anusentīti anusayā. Aṇusahagatāti sukhumabhūtā kāmarāgasaññojanā paṭighasaññojanā aṇusahagatā kāmarāgānusayā paṭighānusayāti appahīnaṭṭhena santāne anusayanavasena sukhumabhūtā kāmarāgapaṭighānusayā. Tadekaṭṭhehi cāti vuttatthehi duvidhekaṭṭhehi kilesehi cittaṃ vivittaṃ suññaṃ hoti.
被称为“阿拉汉”,是因为他毁灭了烦恼之敌,所以得到了“阿拉汉”这个名字。色贪,是指对色有的欲贪。无色贪,是指对无色有的欲贪。慢,是指唯由阿拉汉道所断的慢。同样,掉举、无明、慢随眠等,也都是唯由阿拉汉道所断。在这些当中,慢以高举为特征,掉举以不寂静为特征,无明以盲目为特征。依色贪和无色贪而生起的,是有贪随眠。与它们同在一处,是指与那些烦恼共同存在。于外一切相,是指依内心相续中的不善蕴而被称为“外”的、舍弃内在而向外生起的一切行相。道心从这一切相中远离、不存在、退开;果心是远离的、脱离的、退开的。巴利
Arahatoti kilesārīnaṃ hatattā ‘‘arahā’’ti laddhanāmassa. Rūparāgāti rūpabhave chandarāgā . Arūparāgāti arūpabhave chandarāgā. Mānāti arahattamaggavajjhā mānā eva. Tathā uddhaccaavijjāmānānusayādayo arahattamaggavajjhā. Etesu uṇṇatilakkhaṇo māno. Avūpasamalakkhaṇaṃ uddhaccaṃ. Andhabhāvalakkhaṇā avijjā. Rūparāgaarūparāgavasena pavattā bhavarāgānusayā. Tadekaṭṭhehi cāti tehi ekato ṭhitehi ca kilesehi. Bahiddhā ca sabbanimittehīti ajjhattacittasantāne akusalakkhandhe upādāya ‘‘bahiddhā’’ti saṅkhaṃ gatehi ajjhattaṃ muñcitvā bahiddhā pavattehi sabbasaṅkhāranimittehi maggacittaṃ viviccati vinā hoti apasakkati, phalacittaṃ vivittaṃ viyuttaṃ apasakkitaṃ hoti.
在这里,应当知道随眠的断除有两种方式:按烦恼的顺序,和按道的顺序。
按烦恼的顺序来说:欲贪随眠和嗔恚随眠,通过第三道而不再存在;慢随眠通过第四道;见随眠和疑随眠通过第一道;有贪随眠和无明随眠,也只是通过第四道。
按道的顺序来说:见随眠和疑随眠通过第一道而不再存在;欲贪随眠和嗔恚随眠通过第二道而变得薄弱,通过第三道而完全不再存在;慢随眠、有贪随眠和无明随眠通过第四道而不再存在。
心远离,是指广大心和出世间心从烦恼中空掉、不存在的状态,意思就是空无、虚无。巴利
Tattha kilesapaṭipāṭiyā maggapaṭipāṭiyā cāti dvidhā anusayānaṃ abhāvo veditabbo. Kilesapaṭipāṭiyā hi kāmarāgānusayapaṭighānusayānaṃ tatiyamaggena abhāvo hoti, mānānusayassa catutthamaggena, diṭṭhānusayavicikicchānusayānaṃ paṭhamamaggena, bhavarāgānusayāvijjānusayānaṃ catutthamaggeneva. Maggapaṭipāṭiyā pana paṭhamamaggena diṭṭhānusayavicikicchānusayānaṃ abhāvo hoti, dutiyamaggena kāmarāgānusayapaṭighānusayānaṃ tanubhāvo, tatiyamaggena sabbaso abhāvo, catutthamaggena mānānusayabhavarāgānusayāvijjānusayānaṃ abhāvo hoti. Cittavivekoti mahaggatalokuttaracittānaṃ kilesehi suññabhāvo, tucchabhāvoti attho.
依远离是指:被称为烦恼、蕴和行的这些依的空无状态。为了先说明依,经文说依,就是烦恼等。贪等法生起时,会灼烧、逼迫那个人,所以叫烦恼。色等五蕴是执取的所缘。由执取所生的福行、非福行、不动行,也是依。不死:没有那被称为死的坏灭,所以叫不死;又因为它是烦恼之毒的对治,像药一样,所以也叫不死。渴爱在轮回的胎、趣、再生、识住、有情居之中不断缝合、编织,所以被称为编织(vāna);那里没有它,所以叫涅槃。远离身是指远离群体、独自而住之身。乐出离是指乐于出离,即从欲等出离而乐于初禅等,并倾向于彼。得最上清净是指达到最上清净之果而住立者。有人说:以无随烦恼故心清净,以解脱烦恼故得最上清净;以镇伏断故心清净,以正断断故得最上清净。这样解说。无依是指远离依。入无行是指舍弃行的所缘,以涅槃为所缘而趣入无行。这里入无行之心的中,涅槃即说为无行。巴利
Upadhivivekoti kilesakkhandhaabhisaṅkhārasaṅkhātānaṃ upadhīnaṃ suññabhāvo. Upadhiṃ tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘upadhi vuccanti kilesā cā’’tiādimāha. Rāgādayo yassa uppajjanti, taṃ upatāpenti vibādhentīti kilesā ca. Upādānagocarā rūpādayo pañcakkhandhā ca. Upādānasambhūtā puññāpuññaāneñjābhisaṅkhārā ca. Amatanti natthi etassa maraṇasaṅkhātaṃ matanti amataṃ, kilesavisapaṭipakkhattā agadantipi amataṃ. Saṃsārayonigatiupapattiviññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsesu saṃsibbati vinatīti taṇhā ‘‘vāna’’nti vuccati, taṃ tattha natthīti nibbānaṃ. Vivekaṭṭhakāyānanti gaṇasaṅgaṇikāya apagatasarīrānaṃ. Nekkhammābhiratānanti nekkhamme kāmādito nikkhante paṭhamajjhānādike abhiratānaṃ tanninnānaṃ. Paramavodānappattānanti uttamaparisuddhabhāvaphalaṃ pāpuṇitvā ṭhitānaṃ. ‘‘Upakkilesābhāvena parisuddhacittānaṃ, kilesehi muttabhāvena paramavodānappattānaṃ. Vikkhambhanappahānena parisuddhacittānaṃ, samucchedappahānena paramavodānappattāna’’nti evameke vaṇṇayanti. Nirūpadhīnanti vigatūpadhīnaṃ. Visaṅkhāragatānanti saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ cajitvā vigatasaṅkhāraṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇavasena upagatānaṃ. Visaṅkhāragataṃ cittanti etthapi hi nibbānameva ‘‘visaṅkhāra’’nti vuttaṃ.
“远离”是指各种不同的远。“极远离”是指非常远。“不近”是指不在旁边。“不在近侧”是指不在同一侧。“非极近”是指不是特别靠近。“远离之义”是指极远,也就是已经离开的意思。“那样者”是指跟它相似的。“那样住者”是指以那种方式安住的。“那样类者”是指属于那一类的。“那样份者”是指属于那一部分的。或者有人这样解释:“因为执著于身体这个洞穴,所以是那样者;因为被烦恼覆盖,所以是那样住者;因为沉溺于愚痴,所以是那样类者;因为凭借三种远离而处于遥远,所以是那样份者。”巴利
Vidūreti vividhe dūre. Suvidūreti suṭṭhu vidūre. Na santiketi na samīpe. Na sāmantāti na ekapasse. Anāsanneti anaccantasamīpe. Vivekaṭṭheti atidūre, vigateti attho. Tādisoti taṃsadiso. Tassaṇṭhitoti tena ākārena ṭhito. Tappakāroti tena pakārena ṭhito. Tappaṭibhāgoti taṃkoṭṭhāsiko. Atha vā ‘‘attabhāvaguhāya laggabhāvena tādiso. Kilesehi channabhāvena tassaṇṭhito. Mohanasmiṃ pagāḷhabhāvena tappakāro. Tīhi vivekehi dūrabhāvena tappaṭibhāgoti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
很难断除:不是能轻松断掉的。很难舍弃:不是能轻松舍掉的。很难彻底舍弃:不是能用一切方式舍掉的。很难摧伏:不是能以无醉、无迷醉的方式使之摧伏的。很难解开:不是能解开、脱开的。很难越过:不是能越过去、跨过去的。很难渡越:不是能特别渡过去的。很难跨越:是要以艰难才能越过的。很难退转:是很难使其退回的。或者,有人这样解释:从本性上说,很难彻底舍弃;像公牛的肋皮一样,很难摧伏;像龙索一样,很难解开;像热季的旷野沙漠一样,很难越过、很难渡越;像被老虎围住的森林一样,很难跨越;像海中的波浪一样,很难退转。巴利
Duppahāyāti sukhena pahātabbā na honti. Duccajjāti sukhena jahituṃ na sakkā. Duppariccajjāti sabbākārena jahituṃ na sakkā. Dunnimmadayāti nimmadaṃ amadaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā. Dubbiniveṭhayāti viniveṭhanaṃ mocanaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā. Duttarāti uttaritvā atikkantuṃ na sakkā. Duppatarāti visesetvā tarituṃ na sakkā. Dussamatikkamāti dukkhena atikkamitabbā. Dubbinivattāti nivattetuṃ dukkhā. Atha vā ‘‘pakativasena duppariccajjā. Goṇapatāsaṃ viya dunnimmadayā. Nāgapāsaṃ viya dubbiniveṭhayā. Gimhasamaye marukantāraṃ viya duttarā duppatarā. Byagghapariggahitā aṭavī viya dussamatikkamā. Samuddavīci viya dubbinivattāti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
8 8. 这样,先用第一首偈颂“因为那样的人确实远离”来论证之后,为了进一步揭示这类众生的法性,又说了“以欲为因”等偈颂。其中,“以欲为因”是以渴爱为因。“被有乐所缚”是被乐受等当中的有乐所束缚。“他们难解脱”,是指那些成为有乐之基础的事物难解脱;或者,被束缚在那里的、以欲为因的众生难以解脱。“并非由他者得脱”,是说其他人也无法使他们解脱。这也是说明原因的说法。那些众生为什么难解脱?因为他们不是能由他人使其解脱的。如果有情能够解脱,就应该靠自己的力量解脱,这是这句话的意思。“后前亦期望”,是期望未来或过去的欲。“他们希求这些欲或他们欲”,是以强烈的渴爱,希求现在的这些欲,或者过去、未来两种欲。应当知道,这两句与“他们难解脱,并非由他者得脱”是相关联的。否则,期望和希求的他们做了什么,或者成了什么,就无法明确了。巴利
8. Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya ‘‘dūre vivekā hi tathāvidho’’ti sādhetvā puna tathāvidhānaṃ sattānaṃ dhammataṃ āvi karonto ‘‘icchānidānā’’tiādigāthamāha. Tattha icchānidānāti taṇhāhetukā. Bhavasātabaddhāti sukhavedanādimhi bhavasātena baddhā. Te duppamuñcāti te bhavasātavatthubhūtā dhammā. Te vā tattha baddhā icchānidānā sattā duppamocayā. Na hi aññamokkhāti aññe ca mocetuṃ na sakkonti. Kāraṇavacanaṃ vā etaṃ. Te sattā duppamuñcā. Kasmā? Yasmā aññena mocetabbā na honti. Yadi sattā muñceyyuṃ, sakena thāmena muñceyyunti ayamassa attho. Pacchā pure vāpi apekkhamānāti anāgate atīte vā kāme apekkhamānā. Ime va kāme purime va jappanti ime vā paccuppanne kāme purime vā duvidhepi atītānāgate balavataṇhāya patthayamānā. Imesañca dvinnaṃ padānaṃ ‘‘te duppamuñcā na hi aññamokkhā’’ti imināva saha sambandho veditabbo. Itarathā apekkhamānā jappaṃ kiṃ karonti, kiṃ vā katāti na paññāyeyyuṃ.
被有乐所束缚:在有当中的乐,就是有乐;被那种有乐、也就是被乐的滋味所束缚而停留。为了把它分开来说明,就说了“一种有乐——乐受”等等。年轻的状态就是青春。没有病的状态就是健康。命根持续运转的状态就是生命。得到:就是获得四种生活所需。名声:就是随从。称赞:就是名誉。乐:就是身体和心理的快乐。可意的色:就是能让心欢喜增长的色。其余各项也是同样的道理。巴利
Bhavasātabaddhāti bhave sātaṃ bhavasātaṃ, tena bhavasātena sukhassādena baddhā hutvā ṭhitā. Taṃ bhājetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ekaṃ bhavasātaṃ – sukhā vedanā’’tiādimāha. Yobbanabhāvo yobbaññaṃ. Arogabhāvo ārogyaṃ. Jīvitindriyassa pavattabhāvo jīvitaṃ. Lābhoti catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ lābho. Yasoti parivāro. Pasaṃsāti kitti. Sukhanti kāyikacetasikaṃ sukhaṃ. Manāpikā rūpāti manavaḍḍhanakā rūpā. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
“眼具足”就是眼的圆满。当有人生起这样的乐味——“我的眼是圆满的,就像摩尼宫殿里打开的狮子窗格一样显现”——就是针对这种乐味,才说“眼具足”。耳具足等也是同样的道理。“以乐受而乐缚……乃至……种种缚”:就是以种种方式被系缚。“遍缚”:就是特别地从一开始就被系缚。“染著”:就是与所缘紧密贴合。“黏著”:就像糖蜜罐黏在象牙钉上一样黏住了。这里没有说到的,应当按照“执著、黏著……”等处所说的方式来理解。巴利
Cakkhusampadāti cakkhussa sampadā. ‘‘Mayhaṃ cakkhu sampannaṃ maṇivimāne ugghāṭitasīhapañjaraṃ viya khāyatī’’ti uppannaṃ sukhassādaṃ sandhāya ‘‘cakkhusampadā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sotasampadādīsupi eseva nayo. Sukhāya vedanāya sātabaddhā…pe… vibaddhāti vividhākārena baddhā. Ābaddhāti visesena ādito baddhā. Laggāti ārammaṇena saddhiṃ appitā. Laggitāti nāgadante phāṇitavārako viya laggitā. Yamettha ca avuttaṃ, taṃ satto visattotiādimhi vuttanayena gahetabbaṃ.
确实不是靠别人来解脱。或者说,那些成为生存中享乐依托的法,很难摆脱,要从它们当中解脱出来很困难。或者说,众生很难从这生存的享乐依托中脱离,众生确实很难从这生存的享乐依托中得到解脱。巴利
Na hi aññamokkhāti na parehi mokkhā. Te vā bhavasātavatthū duppamuñcāti bhave sukhassādavatthubhūtā dhammā te muñcituṃ dukkhā. Sattā vā etto dummocayāti sattā eva vā etasmā bhavasātavatthuto mocetuṃ dukkhā.
很难拔出,就是说要拔出来很困难。极难拔出,就是说就像掉进了四周都是断崖的地狱坑里,想把人往上拉出来一样,非常困难。难令起,就是说要让他站起来很困难。极难令起,就是说就像要把极微细的有身安立在大地上一样,想把他扶起来,极其困难。巴利
Duruddharāti uddharituṃ dukkhā. Dussamuddharāti samantato chinnataṭe narakāvāṭe patito viya uddhaṃ katvā uddharituṃ dukkhā. Dubbuṭṭhāpayāti uṭṭhāpetuṃ dukkhā. Dussamuṭṭhāpayāti sukhumaattabhāvaṃ pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāpanaṃ viya ussāpetuṃ ativiya dukkhā.
他们自己陷在泥沼里,从头到脚都沉在深泥中,动弹不得。想把人从泥沼里拉出来,是指对另一个同样陷在泥沼里的人,抓住他的手或头,把他拉出来,让他站在干地上,这是做不到的。所谓“准陀啊,他确实……”这里的“他”是指所描述的那一类人。把“谁”这个提示词接过来,意思就是:准陀啊,那个自己陷在泥沼里的人,他确实能拉出另一个陷在泥沼里的人吗?剩下的句子也应该这样理解它们的关联。“陷在泥沼里”是指沉在深泥中。准陀啊,就像有人从头到脚沉在深泥里,却想抓住另一个同样沉没的人的手或头,把他拉出来,这根本不可能;因为没有任何理由能让他把那个人拉出来,让他站在干地上。“未调伏、未受训、未寂灭”:这里,“未调伏”是因为没有调伏的修习;“未受训”是因为没有受过戒律的训练;“未寂灭”是因为烦恼还没有熄灭。像这样的人,能调伏别人、让别人修习调伏,能训练别人、让别人修学三学,能让自己的烦恼寂灭、把自己的烦恼熄灭。巴利
Te attanā palipapalipannāti gambhīrakaddame yāva sīsato nimuggā na sakkonti. Paraṃ palipapalipannaṃ uddharitunti aparaṃ tatheva nimuggaṃ hatthe vā sīse vā gahetvā uddharitvā thale patiṭṭhāpetuṃ na sakkonti. So vata cundāti soti vattabbākārapuggalaniddeso. Tassa ‘‘yo’’ti imaṃ uddesavacanaṃ āharitvā yo attanā palipapalipanno, so vata , cunda, paraṃ palipapalipannaṃ uddharissatīti. Evaṃ sesapadesu sambandho veditabbo. Palipapalipannoti gambhīrakaddame nimuggo vuccati. Yathā, cunda, koci puriso yāva sīsato gambhīrakaddame nimuggo, parampi tatheva nimuggaṃ hatthe vā sīse vā gahetvā uddharissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Na hi taṃ kāraṇamatthi, yena so taṃ uddharitvā thale patiṭṭhāpeyyāti. Adanto avinīto aparinibbutoti ettha pana anibbisevanatāya adanto. Asikkhitavinayatāya avinīto. Anibbutakilesatāya aparinibbutoti veditabbo. So tādiso paraṃ damessati nibbisevanaṃ karissati, vinessati tisso sikkhā sikkhāpessati. Parinibbāpessati tassa kilese nibbāpessati.
没有任何其他人能让他解脱。凭自己的力气,就是凭自己的智慧之力。凭力量,就是凭智慧的力量。凭精进,就是凭与智慧相应的心所精进。凭人的勇猛,就是凭不断迈向更高境地的大精进。巴利
Natthaññokocīti añño koci puggalo mocetuṃ samattho natthi. Sakena thāmenāti attano ñāṇathāmena. Balenāti ñāṇabalena. Vīriyenāti ñāṇasampayuttacetasikavīriyena. Purisaparakkamenāti paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanena mahantavīriyena.
“我不能忍受”:意思是我不能、做不到,或者说我不会去努力。“为了解脱”:为了让他解脱。“疑惑”:带着疑惑的状态。“陶他咖”:这是呼唤用语。“你应度越”:你应该度越。巴利
Nāhaṃ sahissāmīti ahaṃ na sahissāmi na sakkomi, na vāyamissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. Pamocanāyāti pamocetuṃ. Kathaṃkathinti sakaṅkhaṃ. Dhotakāti ālapanaṃ. Taresīti tareyyāsi.
恶确由自己造作,自己由此染污;
自己未作恶,由自己得清净。
清净与不清净,只发生在每个人自己身上,没有人能让别人变得清净。巴利
‘‘Attanā hi kataṃ pāpaṃ, attanā saṃkilissati; Attanā akataṃ pāpaṃ, attanāva visujjhati; Suddhī asuddhi paccattaṃ, nāñño aññaṃ visodhaye’’ti. (dha. pa. 165; kathā. 743) –
这里的意思是:一个人自己造了不善业,当他在四种恶趣中受苦时,就是自己把自己染污了。反过来,一个人自己没有造恶,那么无论他投生到善趣还是恶趣,都是自己让自己清净。被称为善业的清净,以及被称为不善业的不清净,都各自在造业的有情自己身上成熟。一个人不能让另一个人清净,既不能使他人清净,也不能使他人染污。这就是这段话要说的意思。巴利
Etthāyamattho – yena attanā akusalaṃ kammaṃ kataṃ hoti, so catūsu apāyesu dukkhaṃ anubhavanto attanāva saṃkilissati. Yena pana attanā akataṃ pāpaṃ, so sugatiñceva agatiñca gacchanto attanāva visujjhati. Kusalakammasaṅkhātā suddhi akusalakammasaṅkhātā ca asuddhi paccattaṃ kārakasattānaṃ attaniyeva vipaccati. Añño puggalo aññaṃ puggalaṃ na visodhaye neva visodheti, na kilesetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
涅槃确实存在:不死的大涅槃确实存在。导向涅槃之道:从前分的观智开始,一直到圣道。我是劝导者:我摄取、安立、使住立。如此受我劝导、如此受我教诫:就是被我这样劝导、这样教诫。在这里,针对已经发生的事而说,叫做劝导;针对还没发生的事,比如用“你将来也会有恶名”这种方式来指示未来,叫做教诫。当面说也叫劝导,派使者从背后传话也叫教诫。说一次也叫劝导,反复说也叫教诫。或者,劝导本身就包含教诫。某些人:就是一部分人,意思是有些人。成就究竟涅槃:已经超越了被称为尽灭的边际,所以叫究竟;这个究竟又是所有诸行不再生起之处,所以叫终尽,因此叫究竟终尽,意思是绝对、永恒的尽头。他们成就、圆满这个究竟涅槃。不成就:就是不圆满、不获得。在这里我做什么:在这些事情当中,我做什么,意思是我该做什么。示道者:就是指示修行之道的人,他开示、讲解。若自行道,应得解脱:如果我们自己依道修行,就能获得解脱。巴利
Tiṭṭhateva nibbānanti amatamahānibbānaṃ tiṭṭhatiyeva. Nibbānagāmimaggoti pubbabhāgavipassanāto paṭṭhāya ariyamaggo. Tiṭṭhāmahaṃ samādapetāti ahaṃ gaṇhāpetā patiṭṭhāpetā tiṭṭhāmi. Evaṃovadiyamānā evaṃ anusāsiyamānāti mayā evaṃ ovadiyamānā evaṃ anusāsiyamānā. Ettha uppanne vatthusmiṃ vadanto ovadati nāma, anuppanne vatthusmiṃ anusāsanto ‘‘ayasopi te bhavissatī’’tiādivasena anāgataṃ dassento anusāsati nāma. Sammukhā vadantopi ovadati nāma, parammukhā dūtasāsanaṃ vā pesento anusāsati nāma. Sakiṃ vadantopi ovadati nāma, punappunaṃ vadanto anusāsati nāma. Ovadanto eva vā anusāsati nāma. Appekacceti api ekacce, eketi attho. Accantaniṭṭhaṃ nibbānaṃ ārādhentīti khayavayasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ atītanti accantaṃ, accantañca taṃ sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ appavattiṭṭhānattā niṭṭhañcāti accantaniṭṭhaṃ, ekantaniṭṭhaṃ, satataniṭṭhanti attho. Taṃ accantanibbānaṃ ārādhenti sampādenti. Nārādhentīti na sampādenti, na paṭilabhantīti attho. Ettha kyāhanti etesu kiṃ ahaṃ, kiṃ karomīti attho. Maggakkhāyīti paṭipadāmaggakkhāyī . Ācikkhati katheti. Attanā paṭipajjamānā muñceyyunti paṭipajjantā mayaṃ muñceyyuṃ.
依靠过去,就是缘于过去。怎样生起回顾呢?就是以什么方式去看、去观察。曾是这样形色,就是按长、短、粗、细等来显示过去曾是这样的种类、这样的形色。在那里随入欢喜,就是对那个色所缘,把渴爱正确地引向它、导向它。受等也是如此。巴利
Atītaṃ upādāyāti atītaṃ paṭicca. Kathaṃ pure apekkhaṃ karotīti kena pakārena ikkhaṃ olokanaṃ karoti. Evaṃrūpo ahosinti dīgharassaaṇukathūlādivasena evaṃjātiko evarūpo abhaviṃ. Tattha nandiṃ samannānetīti tasmiṃ rūpārammaṇe taṇhaṃ sammā ānayati upaneti. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.
“这是我的眼”等说法,是从事物和所缘的角度显示渴爱的生起,所以这样说。“如此是色”,意思就是“这样是色”。其中,“被欲贪所系缚”:在那些眼与色当中,有被称为微弱的欲和被称为强力的贪,被这欲贪所系缚、所黏著。“识”:指速行心。因为识被欲贪所系缚,所以说“识被欲贪所系缚故”:也就是那个速行识被欲贪束缚的状态。“他欢喜彼”:通过渴爱的力量,对那个所缘生起欢喜。巴利
‘‘Iti me cakkhū’’tiādayo vatthuārammaṇavasena taṇhuppattiṃ dassento āha. Iti rūpātīti evaṃ rūpā iti. Tattha chandarāgapaṭibaddhanti tesu cakkhurūpesu dubbalasaṅkhāto chando ca balavasaṅkhāto rāgo ca, tena chandarāgena paṭibaddhaṃ allīnaṃ. Viññāṇanti javanacittaṃ. Chandarāgapaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassāti tassa javanaviññāṇassa chandarāgena baddhabhāvā. Tadabhinandatīti taṃ ārammaṇaṃ taṇhāvasena abhinandati.
“凡是他曾有的那些”:就是属于他的那些。“在过去”:指往昔。“一起”:共同。“欢笑、言谈、嬉戏”:包括露齿而笑之类的欢笑,开口说话之类的言谈,以及身体玩耍之类的嬉戏。“他享受那”:他品味那、体验那乐味、耽著于那。“他渴求那”:他贪求那、期盼那。“生起喜悦”:得到满足。巴利
Yānissatānīti yāni assa tāni. Pubbeti atīte. Saddhinti ekato. Hasitalapitakīḷitānīti dantavidaṃsādihasitāni ca, vacībhedaṃ katvā lapitāni ca, kāyakhiḍḍādikīḷitāni ca. Tadassādetīti taṃ assādayati assādaṃ vindati sādiyati. Taṃ nikāmetīti taṃ nikāmayati paccāsīsati. Vittiṃ āpajjatīti tuṭṭhiṃ pāpuṇāti.
“愿我存在”:就是希望我能有。“为了得到还没得到的”:为了达到尚未达到的。“心倾向”:就是把心安放上去。“以心的倾向为条件”:就是以心安放的因由。巴利
Siyanti bhaveyyaṃ. Appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāyāti appattassa pāpuṇanatthāya. Cittaṃ paṇidahatīti cittaṃ ṭhapeti. Cetaso paṇidhānapaccayāti cittassa ṭhapanakāraṇā.
以戒,就是五戒等戒;或以誓愿,就是受持头陀支;或以苦行,就是精进努力;或以梵行,就是远离淫欲;或为天人,就是有大神力的天界之王;或为某位天人,就是那些天人中的任意一位。巴利
Sīlena vāti pañcasīlādisīlena vā. Vatena vāti dhutaṅgasamādānena vā. Tapena vāti vīriyasamādānena vā. Brahmacariyena vāti methunaviratiyā vā. Devo vāti mahānubhāvo devarājā vā. Devaññataro vāti tesaṃ aññataro vā.
说“Jappantā”(喃喃说)是指按功德来说。“Pajappantā”(种种说)是指以多种方式来说。“Abhijappantā”(极说)是指以殊胜的方式来说,或者是因为加上了前缀而使语意增强。巴利
Jappantāti guṇavasena kathentā. Pajappantāti pakārena kathentā. Abhijappantāti visesena kathentā, upasaggavasena vā vaḍḍhitaṃ.
9 就这样,先用第一首偈颂证明了“这样的人确实远离于寂静”,再用第二首偈颂点明这类人的本性,现在为了说明他们造作恶业的情形,而说出“诸欲贪染”这首偈颂。巴利
9. Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya ‘‘dūre vivekā hi tathāvidho’’ti sādhetvā dutiyagāthāya ca tathāvidhānaṃ dhammataṃ āvi katvā idāni tesaṃ pāpakaraṇaṃ āvi karonto ‘‘kāmesu giddhā’’ti gāthamāha.
它的意思是:那些众生被对欲乐的享受渴爱所贪染,因为热衷于追求等行为而执迷,因为陷入迷惑而昏昧,因为缺乏领悟与悭吝,以及不接受佛陀等圣者教言的缘故而不可称赞,安住于身邪行等不正行中,临终时被死亡的痛苦所逼迫,悲叹说:从今世死后,我们会变成什么?巴利
Tassattho – te sattā kāmesu paribhogataṇhāya giddhā, pariyesanādimanuyuttattā pasutā, sammohamāpannattā pamūḷhā, avagamanatāya macchariyatāya buddhādīnaṃ vacanaṃ anādiyatāya ca avadāniyā, kāyavisamādimhi visame niviṭṭhā, antakāle maraṇadukkhūpanītā, ‘‘kiṃsu bhavissāma ito cutāse’’ti paridevayantīti.
被欲贪所贪著,叫做“贪著”。因为思惟上的贪爱而有所期待、被系住,叫做“执取”。被欲爱所迷醉、失去自主,叫做“迷醉”。被欲乐所彻底覆盖、沉溺其中,叫做“沉溺”。因欲爱的黏腻而贴附不舍,叫做“粘着”。因欲的热恼而与之合为一体,叫做“附着”。因欲想而被缠住、转不出来,叫做“系缚”。另有一种解释:在见和所见上贪著;在频繁见面中执取;在交往行为中迷醉;在信赖行为中沉溺;在润泽交流中粘着;在成双配对的状态中附着;对前后都不肯放下,因此被系缚。有些人就是这样解说的。巴利
Giddhāti kāmarāgena giddhā. Gadhitāti saṅkapparāgena paccāsīsamānā hutvā gadhitā. Mucchitāti kāmataṇhāya mucchāparetā. Ajjhosannāti kāmanandiyā adhiosannā ajjhotthaṭā. Laggāti kāmasinehena allīnā. Laggitāti kāmapariḷāhena ekībhūtā. Palibuddhāti kāmasaññāya āvaṭṭitā. Atha vā ‘‘diṭṭhidassane giddhā. Abhiṇhadassane gadhitā. Saṃsaggakiriyasmiṃ mucchitā. Vissāsakiriyasmiṃ ajjhosannā. Sinehavaḷañjasmiṃ laggā. Dvayaṃdvayasamāpattimhi laggitā. Aparāparaṃ amuñcamānā hutvā palibuddhā’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
他们期待,就是盼望。他们寻觅,就是到处找。他们遍求,就是用各种方式想要、渴求。或者另一种说法:对于已经看到的所缘,他们寻求“有净或不净、有或没有”;对于净或不净的所缘,他们当面确认之后,为了让它变得可爱可享,就去寻找。他们以心的状态去寻求,以努力去寻觅,以造作去遍求。他们依赖这两种欲,一头扎进去四处游走,所以叫“依彼而行”。他们大量地、绝大多数时候都在增长、推动那些欲,所以叫“多彼”。他们把那些欲看得很重、很当回事地活着,所以叫“重彼”。他们倾向于那些欲、朝那边低下去而住,所以叫“趋彼”。他们一心朝向那些欲而住,所以叫“向彼”。他们挂在那上面、依附在那上面,只朝那个方向倾过去而住,所以叫“面彼”。他们被那些欲整个盖住,陷入迷醉、被迷醉拖着走还照样说话,所以叫“尚彼”。他们把那些欲当作主宰、当作头等大事来活,所以叫“尊彼”。或者另一种解释:因为所缘是可乐的,所以叫“依彼而行”;因为所缘是可爱的,所以叫“多彼”;因为所缘是悦意的,所以叫“重彼”;因为所缘是可喜的,所以叫“趋彼”;因为所缘和欲乐相关联,所以叫“向彼”;因为所缘是能染污人的,所以叫“面彼”;因为所缘是能令人迷醉的,所以叫“尚彼”;因为所缘是能系缚人的,所以叫“尊彼”。有些注释者就是这样解说的。巴利
Esantīti paccāsīsanti. Gavesantīti maggayanti. Pariyesantīti sabbākārena icchanti patthenti. Atha vā diṭṭhārammaṇe subhāsubhaṃ atthi, natthīti esanti. Subhāsubhārammaṇe paccakkhaṃ katvā vaḷañjanatthāya piyaṃ karontā gavesanti. Cittavasena esanti. Payogavasena gavesanti. Karaṇavasena pariyesanti. Te duvidhe kāme paṭicca otaritvā carantīti taccaritā. Te ca kāme bahulaṃ yebhuyyena vaḍḍhenti pavattayantīti tabbahulā. Te ca kāme garuṃ katvā rahantīti taggarukā. Tesu kāmesu ninnā namitā hutvā vasantīti tanninnā. Tesu kāmesu sanninnā hutvā vasantīti tappoṇā. Tesu kāmesu avalambitā hutvā tesuyeva namitā vasantīti tappabbhārā. Tesu kāmesu avattharitvā mucchāparetappasaṅgā hutvā vadantīti tadadhimuttā. Te ca kāme adhipatiṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā vasantīti tadadhipateyyā. Atha vā ‘‘ārammaṇassa iṭṭhabhāvena taccaritā. Ārammaṇassa kantabhāvena tabbahulā. Ārammaṇassa manāpabhāvena taggarukā. Ārammaṇassa piyabhāvena tanninnā. Ārammaṇassa kāmupasaṃhitabhāvena tappoṇā. Ārammaṇassa rajanīyabhāvena tappabbhārā. Ārammaṇassa mucchanīyabhāvena tadadhimuttā. Ārammaṇassa bandhanīyabhāvena tadadhipateyyā’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
在“在色上遍求”等说法里,“遍求”是指为了得到还没得到的东西而寻求。“获得”是指已经拿到手里。“受用”是指实际使用。应当知道,这些是就不同的阶段来说的。“争吵、起诤论”就是制造争吵的人。专注于这件事的人,就是“专于诤论的人”。“造业者”等词也是同样的道理。“在行境中游行”,是指在妓女等行境中游走,或者在念处等行境中游走。专注于这些行境的人,就是“专于行境的人”。以对所缘的审察而拥有禅那的人,就是“有禅那的人”。专注于禅那的人,就是“专于禅那的人”。巴利
Rūpepariyesantītiādīsu pariyesantīti aladdhassa lābhāya esanavasena. Paṭilabhantīti hatthagatavasena. Paribhuñjantīti vaḷañjanavasena vuttanti ñātabbaṃ. Kalahaṃ vivādaṃ karotīti kalahakārako. Tasmiṃ niyuttoti kalahapasuto. Kammakārakādīsupi eseva nayo. Gocare carantoti vesiyādigocare, satipaṭṭhānādigocare vā caramāno. Tesu niyutto gocarapasuto. Ārammaṇūpanijjhānavasena jhānaṃ assa atthīti jhāyī. Tasmiṃ niyutto jhānapasuto.
“往”是指走向恶趣。“悭吝者”是指隐藏自己财富的人。“言”是指说话。“语句”是指言辞之道。“教导”是指开示与教诫。“教诫”是指训诫。“不纳受”就是不领受、不尊重。或写作“不听从”,意思一样。为了从具体事例上显示悭吝,所以说了“五种悭吝:住处悭吝”等等。其中,对住处生起悭吝,就是住处悭吝;其余各项也依此理解。巴利
Avagacchantīti apāyaṃ gacchanti. Maccharinoti sakasampattiṃ niguhantā. Vacananti kathanaṃ. Byapathanti vākyapathaṃ. Desananti vissajjanaovādaṃ. Anusiṭṭhinti anusāsaniṃ. Nādiyantīti na gaṇhanti na garuṃ karonti. ‘‘Na paṭissantī’’ti vā pāṭho, soyeva attho. Vatthuto macchariyadassanatthaṃ ‘‘pañca macchariyāni āvāsamacchariya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āvāse macchariyaṃ āvāsamacchariyaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
所谓“住处”,是指整个寺院、僧坊、单独一间房,或者夜间休息的地方等等。住在这些地方的人,能住得安乐,也能得到生活资具。如果有一位比丘,不希望一位具足威仪、言行端正的比丘来到这里,即使对方已经来了,他心里也想“希望他快点走”,这就叫住处悭吝。不过,如果是为了不让那些制造争吵等麻烦的人住在这里,那就不算住处悭吝。巴利
Āvāso nāma sakalārāmopi pariveṇampi ekovarakopi rattiṭṭhānādīnipi. Tesu vasantā sukhaṃ vasanti, paccaye labhanti. Eko bhikkhu vattasampannasseva pesalassa bhikkhuno tattha āgamanaṃ na icchati, āgatopi ‘‘khippaṃ gacchatū’’ti cintesi, idaṃ āvāsamacchariyaṃ nāma. Bhaṇḍanakārakādīnaṃ pana tattha vāsaṃ anicchato āvāsamacchariyaṃ nāma na hoti.
所谓“家”,既包括护持者的家,也包括亲戚的家。在这里,如果一个人不希望别人接近自己的家,那就是家悭。但如果是不希望恶人接近,那就不算悭,因为恶人是为了破坏那些人的净信而行事。只有不希望有能力守护净信的比丘接近自己的家,这才叫家悭。巴利
Kulanti upaṭṭhākakulampi ñātikulampi. Tattha aññassa upasaṅkamanaṃ anicchato kulamacchariyaṃ hoti. Pāpapuggalassa pana upasaṅkamanaṃ anicchatopi macchariyaṃ nāma na hoti. So hi tesaṃ pasādabhedāya paṭipajjati. Pasādaṃ rakkhituṃ samatthasseva pana bhikkhuno tattha upasaṅkamanaṃ anicchato macchariyaṃ nāma hoti.
“利得”就是指四种资具的利得。当其他具戒者得到利得时,心里想着“愿他得不到”,这就是利得悭。但如果有人把信众布施的东西糟蹋掉,以不享用、错误享用等方式把它毁坏,甚至东西都快腐烂了也不肯给别人,见到这种情况,心里想:“如果这个人得不到这东西,别的具戒者就能得到并享用了。”这种想法就不算悭。巴利
Lābhoti catupaccayalābhova. Taṃ aññasmiṃ sīlavanteyeva labhante ‘‘mā labhatū’’ti cintentassa lābhamacchariyaṃ hoti. Yo pana saddhādeyyaṃ vinipāteti, aparibhogadupparibhogādivasena vināseti, pūtibhāvaṃ gacchantampi aññassa na deti, taṃ disvā ‘‘sace imaṃ esa na labheyya, añño sīlavā labheyya, paribhogaṃ gaccheyyā’’ti cintentassa macchariyaṃ nāma natthi.
“称赞”分为对身体容貌的称赞和对功德的称赞。其中,对容貌悭吝的人,听到别人说“那人长得端正庄严”,就不愿意跟着谈论。对功德悭吝的人,则不愿意称赞别人的戒行、头陀支、修行方式和行为举止。巴利
Vaṇṇo nāma sarīravaṇṇopi guṇavaṇṇopi. Tattha sarīravaṇṇe maccharī ‘‘paro pāsādiko rūpavā’’ti vutte taṃ na kathetukāmo hoti. Guṇavaṇṇamaccharī parassa sīlena dhutaṅgena paṭipadāya ācārena vaṇṇaṃ na kathetukāmo hoti.
“法”指教理法和证悟法。其中,圣弟子对证悟法不会悭吝,他们希望包括天神在内的世间一切众生,都能证悟自己所证悟的法。他们希望别人也知道那证悟法,唯独对教理法才会生起悭吝,这才叫法悭吝。具有法悭吝的人,自己知道某个秘密的经典或法义门径,就不想让别人知道。但如果有人观察了对方的根器之后,出于对法的护持而不传授;或者观察了法的深浅之后,出于对人的护持而不传授,这样的人就不叫法悭吝者。在这里,有一种人态度轻浮,时而作沙门,时而作婆罗门,时而又作尼乾陀。如果一位比丘心想:“此人会把我们传承下来的教理,那些精深微妙的法义,弄得支离破碎、混乱不堪。”因此不传授,这就是观察人之后、为护持法而不传。如果他想:“此法极为微细深妙,倘若此人学会之后,又转向别处解说,以此显露自己,最终会导致法的坏失。”因此不传授,这就是观察法之后、为护持人而不传。然而,如果他想:“此人若学会此法,将来便有力量破坏我们的传统。”因此不传授,此人就是真正的法悭吝者。巴利
Dhammoti pariyattidhammo ca paṭivedhadhammo ca. Tattha ariyasāvakā paṭivedhadhammaṃ na maccharāyanti, attanā paṭividdhadhamme sadevakassa lokassa paṭivedhaṃ icchanti. Taṃ pana paṭivedhaṃ ‘‘pare jānantū’’ti icchanti, tantidhammeyeva pana dhammamacchariyaṃ nāma hoti. Tena samannāgato puggalo yaṃ guḷhaṃ ganthaṃ vā kathāmaggaṃ vā jānāti, taṃ aññe na jānāpetukāmo hoti. Yo pana puggalaṃ upaparikkhitvā dhammānuggahena dhammaṃ vā upaparikkhitvā puggalānuggahena na deti, ayaṃ dhammamaccharī nāma na hoti. Tattha ekacco puggalo lolo hoti, kālena samaṇo hoti , kālena brāhmaṇo, kālena nigaṇṭho. Yo hi bhikkhu ‘‘ayaṃ puggalo paveṇiāgataṃ tantiṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ dhammantaraṃ bhinditvā āluḷessatī’’ti na deti, ayaṃ puggalaṃ upaparikkhitvā dhammānuggahena na deti nāma. Yo pana ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo saṇho sukhumo, sacāyaṃ puggalo gaṇhissati, aññaṃ byākaritvā attānaṃ āvi katvā nassissatī’’ti na deti, ayaṃ dhammaṃ upaparikkhitvā puggalānuggahena na deti nāma. Yo pana ‘‘sacāyaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ gaṇhissati, amhākaṃ samayaṃ bhindituṃ samattho bhavissatī’’ti na deti, ayaṃ dhammamaccharī nāma hoti.
在这五种悭吝里,先说住处悭吝:他会投生为亚卡或饿鬼,用头顶着那个住处的垃圾到处游荡。家悭吝:看到别人在那个家里做布施、恭敬等事,心里想“这个家坏了,本来是我的”,想着想着,血从嘴里涌出来,肚子也泻,肠子一段段碎裂排出来。利得悭吝:对属于僧团或群体的利得心生悭吝,把它当成个人所有那样享用,将来就会投生为亚卡、饿鬼或大蟒蛇。容貌和功德的悭吝,以及教理法的悭吝:只称赞自己的功德,对别人的功德却说“他算什么色”,处处说对方的过失,一点法也不教给任何人,结果自己容貌丑陋,又聋又哑。巴利
Imesu pañcasu macchariyesu āvāsamacchariyena tāva yakkho vā peto vā hutvā tasseva āvāsassa saṅkāraṃ sīsena ukkhipitvā vicarati. Kulamacchariyena tasmiṃ kule aññesaṃ dānamānanādīni karonte disvā ‘‘bhinnaṃ vatidaṃ kulaṃ mamā’’ti cintayato lohitampi mukhato uggacchati, kucchivirecanampi hoti, antānipi khaṇḍākhaṇḍāni hutvā nikkhamanti. Lābhamacchariyena saṅghassa vā gaṇassa vā santake lābhe maccharāyitvā puggalikaparibhogaṃ viya paribhuñjitvā yakkho vā peto vā mahāajagaro vā hutvā nibbattati. Sarīravaṇṇaguṇavaṇṇamaccharena pana pariyattidhammamacchariyena ca attanova vaṇṇaṃ vaṇṇeti, paresaṃ vaṇṇe ‘‘kiṃ vaṇṇo eso’’ti taṃ taṃ dosaṃ vadanto pariyattidhammañca kassaci kiñci adento dubbaṇṇo ceva eḷamūgo ca hoti.
另外,因为对住处悭吝,会在铁屋地狱里被烧煮;因为对家族悭吝,会得到很少的利养;因为对利得悭吝,会投生到粪地狱;因为对容貌悭吝,无论投生到哪里,都不会有好容貌;因为对法悭吝,会投生到火炭地狱。巴利
Api ca āvāsamacchariyena lohagehe paccati, kulamacchariyena appalābho hoti, lābhamacchariyena gūthaniraye nibbattati, vaṇṇamacchariyena bhave bhave nibbattassa vaṇṇo nāma na hoti, dhammamacchariyena kukkuḷaniraye nibbattatīti.
因为吝啬而隐藏、不肯分享,这就是悭吝。悭吝表现出来的样子,就是悭吝的行相。被悭吝所控制、具有悭吝者的状态,就是悭吝性。“愿这些只属于我,不要给别人”,像这样不愿意把自己的一切所得分享给任何人,就是极悭;极悭的状态就是极悭性,这是轻微悭吝的名称。不尊重他人的人称为吝啬者,他的状态就是吝啬,这是顽固悭吝的名称。具有这种顽固悭吝的人,甚至会阻止别人布施给其他人。经典中也确实这样说过:巴利
Maccharāyanavasena macchariyaṃ. Maccharāyanākāro maccharāyanā. Maccharena ayitassa maccherasamaṅgino bhāvo maccharāyitattaṃ. ‘‘Mayhameva hontu, mā aññassā’’ti sabbāpi attano sampattiyo byāpetuṃ na icchatīti viviccho, vivicchassa bhāvo vevicchaṃ, mudumacchariyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Kadariyo vuccati anādaro, tassa bhāvo kadariyaṃ, thaddhamacchariyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tena hi samannāgato puggalo parampi paresaṃ dadamānaṃ nivāreti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
吝啬又心怀恶意,持邪见且毫无敬意;
他阻止正在布施者,也阻挡给乞食者食物。巴利
‘‘Kadariyo pāpasaṅkappo, micchādiṭṭhianādaro; Dadamānaṃ nivāreti, yācamānāna bhojana’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.132);
看见乞讨的人时,因为心里感到苦涩,心就蜷缩、收紧,所以叫“尖吝者”;这种状态就叫“尖吝性”。另一种说法是:“尖吝性”指的是用尖匙取食。比如从满满一锅饭里舀饭时,如果用一把到处都收束起来的尖头匙去取,就没法盛满;同样,悭吝的人心就是这样收缩的。心一收缩,身体也跟着收缩、蜷曲、退缩,不能舒展。因此,悭吝就叫作“尖吝性”。巴利
Yācake disvā kaṭukabhāvena cittaṃ añcati saṅkocetīti kaṭukañcuko, tassa bhāvo kaṭukañcukatā. Aparo nayo – kaṭukañcukatā vuccati kaṭacchuggāho. Samatittikapuṇṇāya hi ukkhaliyā bhattaṃ gaṇhanto sabbatobhāgena saṅkuṭitena aggakaṭacchunā gaṇhāti pūretvā gahetuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ maccharipuggalassa cittaṃ saṅkucati, tasmiṃ saṅkucite kāyopi tatheva saṅkucati paṭikuṭati paṭinivaṭṭati na sampasārīyatīti maccheraṃ ‘‘kaṭukañcukatā’’ti vuttaṃ.
心被执取的状态,是指心被遮蔽、抓住,以至于在通过布施等方式帮助他人时无法舒展。然而,吝啬的人不愿把自己的财物给别人,却想得到别人的财物。因此应当知道:以“这奇妙之物只应属于我,不该属于别人”这样的心态运作,它具有隐藏自己所得和贪取他人所得这两个特征。巴利
Aggahitattaṃ cittassāti paresaṃ upakārakaraṇe dānādinā ākārena yathā na sampasārīyati, evaṃ āvaritvā gahitabhāvo cittassa. Yasmā pana maccharipuggalo attano santakaṃ paresaṃ adātukāmo hoti, parasantakaṃ gaṇhitukāmo. Tasmā ‘‘idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayhameva hotu, mā aññassā’’ti pavattivasenassa attasampattinigūhanalakkhaṇatā parasampattiggahaṇalakkhaṇatā ca veditabbā.
“蕴悭吝”也是一种悭吝:对自己由五蕴构成的再生存在,认为他人不能共享,生起“这个奇妙的东西只该归我,不该归别人”的想法,这种悭吝就叫“蕴悭吝”。对“界悭吝”和“处悭吝”也是同样的道理。“执取”是以执取和决断的方式把持。“无了知性”是指连一切知佛所说的法都不了解的状态。不布施乞者的人,就是对乞者所说的话不知道。“放逸之人”就是失去正念的人。“言说”是简要的说法。“广说”是详细展开的说法。“开示”是借譬喻显示义理的说法。“教诲”是反复让人铭记的说法。或者也可以这样理解:显示而说,叫“言说”;让人掌握而说,叫“广说”;让人满意而说,叫“开示”;让人看清而说,叫“教诲”。又或者说:为了灭除轻微的苦而说,叫“言说”;为了灭除炽烈的苦而说,叫“广说”;为了灭除恶趣的苦而说,叫“开示”;为了灭除轮回存在的苦而说,叫“教诲”。另外有人说:与通达苦谛遍知相应的说法,是“言说”;与通达集谛断除相应的说法,是“广说”;与通达灭谛作证相应的说法,是“开示”;与通达道谛修习相应的说法,是“教诲”。有些人就是这样解释的。巴利
Khandhamacchariyampi macchariyanti attano pañcakkhandhasaṅkhātaṃ upapattibhavaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ ‘‘acchariyaṃ mayhameva hotu, mā aññassā’’ti pavattaṃ macchariyaṃ khandhamacchariyaṃ nāma. Dhātuāyatanamacchariyesupi eseva nayo. Gāhoti gāhanicchayavasena gahaṇaṃ. Avadaññutāyāti sabbaññubuddhānampi kathitaṃ ajānanabhāvena. Yācakānaṃ adadamāno hi tehi kathitaṃ na jānāti nāma. Janā pamattāti sativippavāsā janā. Vacananti saṅkhepavacanaṃ. Byappathanti vitthāravacanaṃ. Desananti upamaṃ dassetvā atthasandassanavacanaṃ. Anusiṭṭhinti punappunaṃ saṃlakkhāpanavacanaṃ. Atha vā dassetvā kathanaṃ vacanaṃ nāma. Gaṇhāpetvā kathanaṃ byappathaṃ nāma. Tosetvā kathanaṃ desanaṃ nāma. Padassetvā kathanaṃ anusiṭṭhi nāma. Atha vā paritāpadukkhaṃ nāsetvā kathanaṃ vacanaṃ nāma. Pariḷāhadukkhaṃ nāsetvā kathanaṃ byappathaṃ nāma. Apāyadukkhaṃ nāsetvā kathanaṃ desanaṃ nāma. Bhavadukkhaṃ nāsetvā kathanaṃ anusiṭṭhi nāma. Atha vā dukkhasaccapariññāpaṭivedhayuttaṃ vacanaṃ. Samudayasaccapahānapaṭivedhayuttaṃ byappathaṃ. Nirodhasaccasacchikiriyapaṭivedhayuttaṃ desanaṃ. Maggasaccabhāvanāpaṭivedhayuttaṃ anusiṭṭhīti evamādinā nayena eke vaṇṇayanti.
不听闻就是不听。不倾耳就是不为听闻而竖起耳孔。不为明了而立心就是不为认知而把心安立起来。不聆听就是不听教诫。不奉行就是虽然听了却不照话去做。违逆而行就是反过来做。面转向他方就是即使有所行动也不正面回应,这就是它的意思。巴利
Nasussusantīti na suṇanti. Na sotaṃ odahantīti savanatthaṃ kaṇṇasotaṃ na ṭhapenti. Na aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapentīti jānanatthaṃ cittaṃ na patiṭṭhapenti. Anassavāti ovādaṃ asuṇamānā. Avacanakarāti suṇamānāpi vacanaṃ na karontīti avacanakarā. Paṭilomavuttinoti paṭāṇī hutvā pavattanakā . Aññeneva mukhaṃ karontīti karontāpi mukhaṃ na dentīti attho.
所谓“不平”,是因为它与身善行等公认的“平”相对立,所以叫不平;即处在那种不平之中。“安住”是指进入之后难以脱出。“于身业”是指从身体生起的,或由身体造作的业,就是身业。对于语业等,道理也一样。巴利
Visameti kāyasucaritādisammatassa samassa paṭipakkhattā visamaṃ, tasmiṃ visame. Niviṭṭhāti paviṭṭhā dunnīharā. Kāyakammeti kāyato pavatte, kāyena vā pavatte kāyakamme. Vacīkammādīsupi eseva nayo.
在这里,身业、语业、意业是按恶行来分类的;而杀生等十种不善业道,则是按十不善业道来分类的,应当这样理解。以上是共通词句的注释。至于不共通的词句,“杀生”就是杀害有情,也就是杀死有情、毁灭有情。这里说的“有情”,从世俗言说来说是指众生,从究竟意义来说是指命根。对于那个有命根的有情,生起“这是有情”的想,以切断命根为目的,通过身门或语门中的任意一门所生起的杀害思,就是杀生。对于没有德行的小有情,比如畜生等,杀小的有情罪过轻,杀形体大的罪过重。为什么?因为加行重大;即使加行相同,也因对象形体大而有差别。对于有德行的众生,比如人类等,所杀对象德行少则罪过轻,德行大则罪过重。如果形体大小和德行高低都相当,那么因烦恼和加行的轻柔,罪过就轻;因烦恼和加行的猛烈,罪过就重。应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha kāyakammavacīkammamanokammāni duccaritavasena vibhattāni, pāṇātipātādayo dasaakusalakammapathavasena vibhattāti ñātabbaṃ. Ayaṃ tāvettha sādhāraṇapadavaṇṇanā, asādhāraṇesu pana pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto, pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpitā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārapavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto. So guṇavirahitesu tiracchānagatādīsu pāṇesu khuddake pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāsarīre mahāsāvajjo. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya, payogasamattepi vatthumahantatāya. Guṇavantesu manussādīsu appaguṇe pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo. Sarīraguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjoti veditabbo.
杀生有五个构成条件:有情、知道是有情、有杀心、采取行动、因此导致死亡。具体方式有六种:亲手杀、指使他人杀、投掷武器杀、设置陷阱等固定装置杀、用咒术杀、用神通杀。如果在这里详细展开这个义理,就会太繁琐,所以我们不展开讲。其他类似的情况,有需要的人可以去查阅《一切善见》律藏注释来了解。巴利
Tassa pañca sambhārā honti – pāṇo pāṇasaññitā vadhakacittaṃ upakkamo tena maraṇanti. Chappayogā – sāhatthiko āṇattiko nissaggiyo thāvaro vijjāmayo iddhimayoti. Imasmiṃ panatthe vitthāriyamāne atipapañco hoti, tasmā naṃ na vitthārayissāma. Aññañca evarūpaṃ , atthikehi pana samantapāsādikaṃ vinayaṭṭhakathaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.172) oloketvā gahetabbaṃ.
把别人没给的东西拿走,就叫不与取,也叫偷盗、盗窃。这里说的“没给”,是指别人所拥有、并且能随意支配的东西——他就算随意处置,也不会因此受罚或受谴责。对于这样的他人所有物,心里清楚这是别人的东西,却生起偷盗的念头,并为此采取行动,这就是不与取。对于物主品德低劣的他人所有物,罪过就轻;对于物主品德高尚的他人所有物,罪过就重。为什么?因为物品本身贵重。如果物品价值相同,那么物主品德越高,罪过越重;物主品德越低,罪过越轻。巴利
Adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ, parassa haraṇaṃ theyyaṃ corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha adinnanti parapariggahitaṃ, yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti, tasmiṃ pana parapariggahite parapariggahitasaññino tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ. Taṃ hīne parasantake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ, paṇīte mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Vatthupaṇītatāya, vatthusamatte sati guṇādhikānaṃ santake vatthusmiṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ. Taṃ taṃ guṇādhikaṃ upādāya tato tato hīnaguṇassa santake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ.
这个有五种构成条件:属于他人所摄持、明知是他人所摄持、有盗心、采取行动、以及通过那行动拿走。六种实施方式就是亲手取等那些。而这些方式,则随着具体情况,通过五种取走形式来运作:偷取、强夺、暗中取、设计取、诈取。这里只是简略说明,详细解释则在《一切善见》中说过。巴利
Tassa pañca sambhārā honti – parapariggahitaṃ parapariggahitasaññitā theyyacittaṃ upakkamo tena haraṇanti. Chappayogā sāhatthikādayova. Te ca kho yathānurūpaṃ theyyāvahāro pasayhāvahāro paṭicchannāvahāro parikappāvahāro kusāvahāroti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ avahārānaṃ vasena pavattanti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ vutto.
在这里,“欲邪行”中的“欲”,指的是男女淫欲的行为。“邪行”,指的是完全受谴责的卑劣行为。从特征上说,以从事非正法(即邪淫)的意图,通过身体行为表现出来、侵犯不可行对象的思,就是欲邪行。巴利
Kāmesumicchācāroti ettha pana kāmesūti methunasamācāresu. Micchācāroti ekantanindito lāmakācāro. Lakkhaṇato pana asaddhammasevanādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā kāmesumicchācāro.
在这里,“不可行处”是指:对男子来说,先有二十种女子,即母护、父护、父母护、兄护、姐护、亲族护、宗族护、法护、有护、有罚护,这十种是母护等;以及买得、依欲而住、依财而住、依衣而住、水钵妻、除棉垫妻、婢女妻、佣工妻、旗掠妻、片刻妻,这十种是买得等。对女子来说,则是对于那十二种女子,即(对男子而言的)有护、有罚护这两种,加上买得等十种,其余男子(即丈夫以外的男子)是不可行处。这就是“不可行处”。巴利
Tattha agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma purisānaṃ tāva māturakkhitā piturakkhitā mātāpiturakkhitā bhāturakkhitā bhaginirakkhitā ñātirakkhitā gottarakkhitā dhammarakkhitā sārakkhā saparidaṇḍāti māturakkhitādayo dasa, dhanakkītā chandavāsinī bhogavāsinī paṭavāsinī odapattakinī obhatacumbaṭakā dāsī ca bhariyā kammakārī ca bhariyā dhajāhaṭā muhuttikāti etā dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati itthiyo. Itthīsu pana dvīnnaṃ sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānaṃ dasannañca dhanakkītādīnanti dvādasannaṃ itthīnaṃ aññe purisā, idaṃ agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma.
这种邪行,如果发生在没有戒等功德、不该去的地方,罪过就轻;如果发生在具有戒等功德的人身上,罪过就重。它有四个条件:不该去的对象、对那对象生起交合的心、交合的加行、以道入道并忍受。它的加行只有一种,就是亲手去做。巴利
So panesa micchācāro sīlādiguṇarahite agamanīyaṭṭhāne appasāvajjo, sīlādiguṇasampanne mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā – agamanīyavatthu tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ sevanapayogo maggena maggapaṭipattiadhivāsananti. Eko payogo sāhatthiko eva.
“妄”是指以欺骗为目的、破坏他人利益的语言行为或身体行为。怀着欺骗的意图,能引发欺骗他人的身业和语业的思,就是妄语。另一种解释是:“妄”指不真实、虚假的事情;“语”指把这件事说成真实、如实。从特征上讲,对于不真实的事情,想要让别人把它当作真实来认知,能引发这种认知的思,就是妄语。他所破坏的利益小,罪过就小;利益大,罪过就大。此外,在家人因为舍不得把自己的东西给别人而说“没有”之类的话,罪过较小;作为证人,为了破坏他人利益而说,罪过重大。出家人得到一点点油或酥油后,以开玩笑的心态说“今天村里的油像河水一样流”这类夸大话,罪过较小;但若以没看见说看见了等方式来说,罪过重大。巴利
Musāti visaṃvādanapurekkhārassa atthabhañjanako vacīpayogo kāyapayogo vā. Visaṃvādanādhippāyena panassa paravisaṃvādakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. Aparo nayo – musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu. Vādoti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. So yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appatāya appasāvajjo, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Api ca gahaṭṭhānaṃ attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya ‘‘natthī’’tiādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, sakkhinā hutvā atthabhañjanatthaṃ vutto mahāsāvajjo. Pabbajitānaṃ appakampi telaṃ vā sappiṃ vā labhitvā hasādhippāyena ‘‘ajja gāme telaṃ nadī maññe sandatī’’ti pūraṇakathānayena pavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃyeva pana diṭṭhantiādinā nayena vadantānaṃ mahāsāvajjo.
他有四个条件:不真实的事、想欺骗的心、由此而起的努力、对方知道那件事。加行只有一种,就是亲手去做。这种加行应当理解为:用身体、或身体所系之物、或言语,去做欺骗他人的行为。如果通过这个行为,对方知道了那件事,那么在生起这个行为的思的那一刹那,就已经被妄语业所束缚了。巴利
Tassa cattāro sambhārā honti – atathaṃ vatthu visaṃvādanacittaṃ tajjo vāyāmo parassa tadatthavijānananti. Eko payogo sāhatthikova. So ca kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā vācāya vā paravisaṃvādakakiriyākaraṇe daṭṭhabbo. Tāya ce kiriyāya paro tamatthaṃ jānāti, ayaṃ kiriyasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanākkhaṇeyeva musāvādakammunā bajjhati.
所谓离间语等:如果一个人用某种话,让听者心里对自己生起喜爱,而对别人变得疏远,这种话就是离间语。如果一个人用某种话,让自己和别人都觉得刺耳,这种话本身也粗恶,既不悦耳,也不入心,这就是粗恶语。如果一个人用杂乱无意义的话胡说一通,那就是杂秽语。作为它们根本的思,也同样得到离间语等的名称,这里指的就是那个思。巴利
Pisuṇavācātiādīsu yāya vācāya yassa taṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tassa hadaye attano piyabhāvaṃ parassa ca suññabhāvaṃ karoti, sā pisuṇavācā. Yāya pana attānampi parampi pharusaṃ karoti, yā vācā sayampi pharusā neva kaṇṇasukhā na hadayaṅgamā, ayaṃ pharusavācā. Yena samphaṃ palapati niratthakaṃ, so samphappalāpo. Tesaṃ mūlabhūtāpi cetanā pisuṇavācādināmameva labhati, sā eva idha adhippetāti.
在这里,以被染污的心,为了离间他人,或者为了自己的利益,而由身业和语业所引发的思,就是离间语。如果它所离间的那个人品德少,罪过就小;如果品德大,罪过就大。巴利
Tattha saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa paresaṃ vā bhedāya attano piyakamyatāya vā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pisuṇavācā. Sā yassa bhedaṃ karoti , tassa appaguṇāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā.
它有四种条件:有要被离间的对方,以“这样他们就会各分东西、彼此分离”这种离间意图为先导;或者以“这样我就会成为受人喜爱、被人信任的人”这种想讨人喜欢的意图为先导;相应的努力;以及他理解那个目的。巴利
Tassā cattāro sambhārā honti – bhinditabbo paro ‘‘iti ime nānā bhavissanti vinā bhavissantī’’ti bhedapurekkhāratā vā, ‘‘iti ahaṃ piyo bhavissāmi vissāsiko’’ti viyakamyatā vā, tajjo vāyāmo, tassa tadatthavijānananti.
对他人的要害进行切割、由身业和语业所引发的、完全粗恶的思,就是粗恶语。即使行为上是在切割要害,但如果内心柔软,也不构成粗恶语。比如父母有时会对孩子这样说:“愿盗贼把你们剁成碎块!”可哪怕一片莲叶落在孩子身上,他们都不愿意。戒师和依止师有时也会对弟子这样说:“这些无惭无愧的人到处游荡什么?把他们赶走!”但他们心里却希望弟子们在教法和证悟上有所成就。正如内心柔软时不算粗恶语,语言柔软时也未必就不是粗恶语。因为一个想让人被杀的人说“让他舒舒服服地躺着吧”,这话并非不是粗恶语——由于心的粗恶,它恰恰就是粗恶语,这话正是针对那个人说的。由于对方功德小,罪过就小;由于对方功德大,罪过就大。它有三个条件:有应被骂的对方、忿怒的心、以及辱骂。巴利
Parassa mammacchedakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā ekantapharusacetanā pharusavācā. Mammacchedakopi payogo cittasaṇhatāya pharusavācā na hoti. Mātāpitaro hi kadāci puttake evampi vadanti ‘‘corā vo khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ karontū’’ti, uppalapattampi ca nesaṃ upari patantaṃ na icchanti. Ācariyupajjhāyā ca kadāci nissitake evaṃ vadanti ‘‘kiṃ ime ahirikā anottappino caranti, niddhamatha ne’’ti. Atha ca nesaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiṃ icchanti. Yathā ca cittasaṇhatāya pharusavācā na hoti, evaṃ vacanasaṇhatāya apharusavācāpi na hoti. Na hi mārāpetukāmassa ‘‘imaṃ sukhaṃ sayāpethā’’ti vacanaṃ apharusavācā hoti, cittapharusatāya panesā pharusavācāva, sā yaṃ sandhāya pavattitā. Tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā tayo sambhārā – akkositabbo paro kupitacittaṃ akkosananti.
能表达无意义之语、能生起身行和语行的不善思,就是杂秽语。由于习行轻微,罪过就小;由于习行重大,罪过就大。它有两个构成条件:以谈论《摩诃婆罗多》大战、抢走悉多等毫无意义的故事作为先导,以及说这类话。巴利
Anatthaviññāpikā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā akusalacetanā samphappalāpo. So āsevanamandatāya appasāvajjo, āsevanamahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Tassa dve sambhārā honti – bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇādiniratthakakathāpurekkhāratā tathārūpīkathākathanañcāti.
“贪求”就是贪欲,意思是心朝向别人的财物,顺着那个倾向持续运转。它的特征是像这样想:“啊,要是这东西成了我的该多好!”也就是贪图别人的财物。它和偷盗一样,罪过有轻有重。它需要具备两个条件:别人的财物,以及把它当成自己的。因为即使对别人的财物起了贪心,只要还没有把它认作“但愿这成为我的”,业道就还不算被破坏。巴利
Abhijjhāyatīti abhijjhā, parabhaṇḍābhimukhī hutvā tanninnatāya pavattatīti attho. Sā ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamāssā’’ti evaṃ parabhaṇḍābhijjhāyanalakkhaṇā. Adinnādānaṃ viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca. Tassā dve sambhārā honti – parabhaṇḍaṃ attano pariṇāmanañcāti. Parabhaṇḍavatthuke hi lobhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatidaṃ mamāssā’’ti attano na pariṇāmeti.
伤害他人的利益和安乐,就叫嗔恨,它的特征是以内心嗔恼来毁灭对方。跟粗恶语一样,它的罪过也有轻有重。它要具备两个条件:其他众生,以及想要毁灭他的念头。因为即使对某个众生起了愤怒,只要还没有想“但愿他断绝、消失”,业道就还不算被违犯。巴利
Hitasukhaṃ byāpādayatīti byāpādo, so paravināsāya manopadosalakkhaṇo. Pharusavācā viya appasāvajjo mahāsāvajjo ca. Tassa dve sambhārā honti – parasatto ca tassa ca vināsacintāti. Parasattavatthuke hi kodhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatāyaṃ ucchijjeyya vinasseyyā’’ti tassa vināsaṃ na cintesi.
因为不能如实把握真相,所以错误地看待事物,这就叫邪见。它的特征是以“没有布施的果报”等等方式颠倒地看事情。跟绮语一样,它有时过失轻,有时过失重。巴利
Yathābhuccagahaṇābhāvena micchā passatīti micchādiṭṭhi. Sā ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā nayena viparītadassanalakkhaṇā. Samphappalāpo viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca.
他们会疑惑:我将来是有想的、无想的,还是非想非非想的?这是依色等而起的疑惑。他们又用“我将来还会存在吗”这类方式,对自己的我生起疑惑。其中,“我将来还会存在吗?我将来不会存在吗?”是依靠常见和断见,对未来之我的存在与不存在生起疑惑。“我将来会变成什么?”是依靠种姓、性别和投生处而生疑:“我将来会成为刹帝利吗?会成为婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家者、出家者、天、人当中的哪一种?”“我将来会是什么样子?”是依靠形态样式而生疑:“我将来会是长的、短的、白的、黑的、有量的、无量的等等当中的哪一种?”不过有些人说:“这是依靠自在天创造等说法,疑惑‘我将来会因什么原因而存在’,也就是从原因方面生疑。”“曾是什么,将来又会变成什么?”是依靠出生等而生疑:“过去是刹帝利,将来会变成婆罗门吗?……过去是天,将来会变成人吗?”他们就这样对自己的相续流转生起疑惑。不过在这一切地方,“长时”都只是时间的另一种说法。巴利
Saññī, asaññī, nevasaññīnāsaññī bhavissāmāti rūpādivasena kaṅkhanti. Bhavissāma nu kho mayantiādinā attānaṃ kaṅkhanti. Tattha bhavissāma nu kho. Na nu kho bhavissāmāti tassa sassatākārañca ucchedākārañca nissāya anāgate attānaṃ vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañca kaṅkhanti. Kiṃ nu kho bhavissāmāti jātiliṅgupapattiyo nissāya ‘‘khattiyā nu kho bhavissāma, brāhmaṇavessasuddagahaṭṭhapabbajitadevamanussānaṃ aññatarā’’ti kaṅkhanti. Kathaṃ nu kho bhavissāmāti saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīghā nu kho bhavissāma, rassaodātakaṇhapamāṇikaappamāṇikādīnaṃ aññatarā’’ti kaṅkhanti. Keci pana ‘‘issaranimmānādīni nissāya ‘kena nu kho kāraṇena bhavissāmā’ti hetuto kaṅkhantī’’ti vadanti. Kiṃ hutvā kiṃ bhavissāma nu kho mayanti jātiādīni nissāya ‘‘khattiyā hutvā nu kho brāhmaṇā bhavissāma…pe… devā hutvā manussā’’ti attano paramparaṃ kaṅkhanti. Sabbattheva pana addhānanti kālādhivacanametaṃ.
10 正因为如此,所以确实应当修学……贤者们这样说。在这里,“应当修学”是指应当把三种修学放在心上。“就在此”是指在同一个教法之中。其中,应当修学的东西就是修学。“三”是数量上的限定。增上戒学:“增上戒”是指超胜、殊胜的戒;它既是增上戒,又从应当修学的意义上称为修学,所以叫增上戒学。增上心学和增上慧学也按同样的方式理解。巴利
10. Yasmā etadeva tasmā hi sikkhetha…pe… āhu dhīrāti. Tattha sikkhethāti tisso sikkhā āvajjeyya. Idhevāti imasmiṃyeva sāsane. Tattha sikkhitabbāti sikkhā. Tissoti gaṇanaparicchedo. Adhisīlasikkhāti adhikaṃ uttamaṃ sīlanti adhisīlaṃ, adhisīlañca taṃ sikkhitabbaṭṭhena sikkhā cāti adhisīlasikkhā. Esa nayo adhicittaadhipaññāsikkhāsu.
那么在这里,什么是戒?什么是增上戒?什么是心?什么是增上心?什么是慧?什么是增上慧?回答是:五戒和十戒就只是戒而已。因为这种戒,无论佛陀有没有出现在世间,都照样在世间流行。佛陀出现时,佛陀和声闻弟子们会劝导大众受持这种戒;佛陀没有出现时,独觉佛、宣扬业力的人、如法的沙门婆罗门、转轮王、大王和大菩萨们会劝导大众受持,有智慧的沙门婆罗门也会自己受持。他们圆满这些善法之后,就享受天界和人间的福报。巴利
Katamaṃ panettha sīlaṃ, katamaṃ adhisīlaṃ, katamaṃ cittaṃ, katamaṃ adhicittaṃ, katamā paññā, katamā adhipaññāti? Vuccate – pañcaṅgadasaṅgasīlaṃ tāva sīlameva . Tañhi buddhe uppannepi anuppannepi loke pavattati . Uppanne buddhe tasmiṃ sīle buddhāpi sāvakāpi mahājanaṃ samādapenti, anuppanne buddhe paccekabuddhā ca kammavādino ca dhammikā samaṇabrāhmaṇā ca cakkavattī ca mahārājāno mahābodhisattā ca samādapenti, sāmampi paṇḍitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā samādiyanti. Te taṃ kusalaṃ dhammaṃ paripūretvā devesu ca manussesu ca sampattiṃ anubhonti.
波罗提木叉防护戒被称为“增上戒”。因为它在一切世间戒中,就像太阳在一切光明中、须弥山在一切山中那样,既更为殊胜,也最为上等;而且它只在佛陀出世时才出现,离开佛陀出世就不会有。因为除了佛陀以外,其他任何众生都不可能把这条制戒的教法提出来并建立起来。只有佛陀们才能彻底截断身门和语门的一切恶行之流,然后针对每一种违犯,制定相应的戒律防护。再者,与波罗提木叉防护戒相比,只有和道果相应的戒才是增上戒。巴利
Pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ pana ‘‘adhisīla’’nti vuccati. Tañhi sūriyo viya pajjotānaṃ sineru viya pabbatānaṃ sabbalokiyasīlānaṃ adhikañceva uttamañca, buddhuppādeyeva ca pavattati, na vinā buddhuppādā. Na hi taṃ paññattiṃ uddharitvā añño satto ṭhapetuṃ sakkoti. Buddhāyeva pana sabbaso kāyavacīdvāraajjhācārasotaṃ chinditvā tassa tassa vītikkamassa anucchavikaṃ taṃ sīlasaṃvaraṃ paññapenti. Pātimokkhasaṃvaratopi ca maggaphalasampayuttameva sīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ.
不过,应当知道:把八种欲界善心和八种世间等至心合在一起,它们就只是心而已。无论佛陀出世还是不出世,这种心都会生起;至于劝导和受持的方式,则应按照前面讲“戒”时所说的方法来理解。巴利
Kāmāvacarāni pana aṭṭha kusalacittāni lokiyaaṭṭhasamāpatticittāni ca ekajjhaṃ katvā cittamevāti veditabbāni. Buddhuppādānuppāde cassa pavatti, samādapanaṃ samādānañca sīle vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
作为观禅基础(足处)的八等至心,则被称为“增上心”。因为它就像增上戒在诸戒之中那样,在一切世间心当中也是更殊胜、更上等的;而且它只在佛陀出世时才有,离不开佛陀的出世。比这更殊胜的,就只有道心和果心才算得上是增上心。巴利
Vipassanāpādakaṃ aṭṭhasamāpatticittaṃ pana ‘‘adhicitta’’nti vuccati. Tañhi adhisīlaṃ viya sīlānaṃ, sabbalokiyacittānaṃ adhikañceva uttamañca, buddhuppādeyeva ca hoti, na vinā buddhuppādā. Tatopi ca maggaphalacittameva adhicittaṃ.
“有布施,有供养”等这样展开说的业自属智,就是慧。因为即使佛陀没有出现在世间,这种慧也在世间流传。佛陀出现时,佛陀和声闻弟子们都劝导大众修这种慧;佛陀没有出现时,独觉佛、说业论者、行法的沙门婆罗门、转轮王、大王和大菩萨们也都劝导大众,有智慧的众生自己也会去修。就像安古罗在一万年里广行大布施,维拉摩、须大拏以及其他许多有智慧的人也都行过大布施。他们圆满了这些善法之后,就享受天界和人间的福报。巴利
‘‘Atthi dinnaṃ atthi yiṭṭha’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ (ma. ni. 2.94) pana kammassakatāñāṇaṃ paññā. Sā hi buddhe uppannepi anuppannepi loke pavattati. Uppanne buddhe tassā paññāya buddhāpi sāvakāpi mahājanaṃ samādapenti, anuppanne buddhe paccekabuddhā ca kammavādino ca dhammikā samaṇabrāhmaṇā ca cakkavattī ca mahārājāno mahābodhisattā ca samādapenti, sāmampi paṇḍitā sattā samādiyanti. Tathā hi aṅkuro dasavassasahassāni mahādānaṃ adāsi. Velāmo vessantaro aññe ca bahū paṇḍitamanussā mahādānāni adaṃsu. Te taṃ kusalaṃ dhammaṃ paripūretvā devesu ca manussesu ca sampattiṃ anubhaviṃsu.
不过,那种以三相的行相来区分的观智,则被称为“增上慧”。因为它就像增上戒、增上心相对于戒与心那样,在一切世间慧中更为超胜、最为殊胜,而且没有佛陀出世,它就不会在世间生起。比它更殊胜的,只有道果慧才算是增上慧。巴利
Tilakkhaṇākāraparicchedakaṃ pana vipassanāñāṇaṃ ‘‘adhipaññā’’ti vuccati. Sā hi adhisīlaadhicittāni viya sīlacittānaṃ, sabbalokiyapaññānaṃ adhikā ceva uttamā ca, na ca vinā buddhuppādā loke pavattati. Tatopi ca maggaphalapaññāva adhipaññā.
现在要逐一说明,于是说:“什么是增上戒学?在此,比丘具戒,安住于巴帝摩卡防护的约束中……”等等。“在此”这句话,是为了指出那位已成就前行阶段、圆满一切戒行的个人,并表明此教法是他的所依,同时否定其他教法也有同样的状态。正如这样说:“诸比丘,只有在此处有沙门……其他外道的众会中,除了这些沙门之外,都是空无所有的。”(《中部》1.139-140)“比丘”,是标示那位戒行圆满的个人。“安住于巴帝摩卡防护的约束中”,是标示他安立在巴帝摩卡防护上。“安住”,是标示他具备与那相应的生活方式。“具足行处与行境”,是标示那些能资助巴帝摩卡防护的法。“对微细的过失也见到怖畏”,是标示他于巴帝摩卡有不退失的性质。“受持”,是标示他对诸学处毫无遗漏地领受。“学”,是标示他具备学。“于诸学处”,是标示所应当学的法。巴利
Idāni ekekaṃ dassento ‘‘katamā adhisīlasikkhā – idha bhikkhu sīlavā hoti, pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatī’’tiādimāha. Idhāti vacanaṃ pubbabhāgakaraṇīyasampadāya sampannassa sabbapakārasīlaparipūrakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpanaṃ, aññasāsanassa ca tathābhāvapaṭisedhanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139-140). Bhikkhūti tassa sīlassa paripūrakassa puggalassa paridīpanaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti idamassa pātimokkhasaṃvare patiṭṭhitabhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Viharatīti idamassa tadanurūpavihārasamaṅgībhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Ācāragocarasampannoti idamassa pātimokkhasaṃvarassa upakārakadhammaparidīpanaṃ. Aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvīti idamassa pātimokkhato acavanadhammatāparidīpanaṃ. Samādāyāti idamassa sikkhāpadānaṃ anavasesato ādānaparidīpanaṃ. Sikkhatīti idamassa sikkhāya samaṅgībhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Sikkhāpadesūti idamassa sikkhitabbadhammaparidīpanaṃ.
在这里,“比丘”是指因为看见轮回中的危险,所以叫比丘。他有戒,所以叫具戒者。这里说的“戒”,是从“持戒”这个意义来讲的。那么,什么叫持戒呢?就是等持,意思是由于身业等善妙戒行而不散乱;或者说是支持,意思是作为诸善法安立的依止。精通语言定义的论师们在这里认可的就是这两种含义。不过,另一些人解释说:“戒是以近习义、行持义、持戒义、头义、清凉义、吉祥义而称为戒。”巴利
Tattha bhikkhūti saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhatīti bhikkhu. Sīlamassa atthīti sīlavāti ettha sīlanti sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Kimidaṃ sīlanaṃ nāma? Samādhānaṃ vā, kāyakammādīnaṃ susīlyavasena avippakiṇṇatāti attho. Upadhāraṇaṃ vā, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ patiṭṭhāvasena ādhārabhāvoti attho. Etadeva hi ettha atthadvayaṃ saddalakkhaṇavidū anujānanti. Aññe pana ‘‘adhisevanaṭṭhena ācāraṭṭhena sīlanaṭṭhena siraṭṭhena sītalaṭṭhena sivaṭṭhena sīla’’nti vaṇṇayanti.
戒的特相是戒行,即使它被分成许多种类。
就像色虽然被分成许多种,但“可见性”仍然是色的特相。巴利
Sīlanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ tassa, bhinnassāpi anekadhā; Sanidassanattaṃ rūpassa, yathā bhinnassanekadhā.
就像青色、黄色等种类的不同,使色处分成许多种,但它的相仍然是“可见性”,因为无论分成青色等多少种类,可见的性质都不会被超越。同样,戒虽然因为思等因素的不同而分成许多种,但前面所说的——以身体行为等的摄持,以及作为诸善法立足处的——“戒行”,就是它的相,因为即使因为思等因素而分成许多种,摄持与立足的状态也不会被超越。这样,在说明它的相时——巴利
Yathā hi nīlapītādibhedenanekadhā bhinnassāpi rūpāyatanassa sanidassanattaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ nīlādibhedena bhinnassāpi sanidassanabhāvānatikkamanato. Tathā sīlassa cetanādibhedena anekadhā bhinnassāpi yadetaṃ kāyakammādīnaṃ samādhānavasena, kusalānañca dhammānaṃ patiṭṭhāvasena vuttaṃ sīlanaṃ, tadeva lakkhaṇaṃ cetanādibhedena bhinnassāpi samādhānapatiṭṭhābhāvānatikkamanato. Evaṃ lakkhaṇassa panassa –
摧毁恶戒的状态,以及无过失的功德,如此。
从作用成就的意义来说,这就叫作味。巴利
Dussīlyaviddhaṃsanatā, anavajjaguṇo tathā; Kiccasampattiatthena, raso nāma pavuccati.
因此应当知道,这个名为戒的东西,从作用这一义理来说,它的味是摧破破戒;从成就这一义理来说,它的味是无过失。巴利
Tasmā idaṃ sīlaṃ nāma kiccaṭṭhena rasena dussīlyaviddhaṃsanarasaṃ, sampattiatthena rasena anavajjarasanti veditabbaṃ.
它以清净为表现,这一点被智者们在它那里认识到;
惭与愧被称赞为(戒的)近因。巴利
Soceyyapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, tayidaṃ tassa viññubhi; Ottappañca hirī ceva, padaṭṭhānanti vaṇṇitaṃ.
这个戒的现起状态被描述为“身清净、语清净、意清净”,它以清净的方式呈现出来,达到可以被认知把握的程度。而惭与愧,则被智者们称赞为戒的近因,意思是直接促成戒生起的条件。因为只要有惭与愧,戒就会生起并且持续存在;没有惭与愧,戒既不会生起,也不会持续存在。具备这种戒的人,就是具戒者。这里所说的戒,应当理解为:对于远离杀生等恶行的人,或者对于圆满践行义务仪轨的人,指的是思等诸法。这在《无碍解道》中已经说过:“什么是戒?思是戒,心所法是戒,防护是戒,不犯是戒。”巴利
Tañhidaṃ sīlaṃ ‘‘kāyasoceyyaṃ vacīsoceyyaṃ manosoceyya’’nti evaṃ vuttasoceyyapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, soceyyabhāvena paccupaṭṭhāti gahaṇabhāvaṃ gacchati. Hirottappañca pana tassa viññūhi padaṭṭhānanti vaṇṇitaṃ, āsannakāraṇanti attho. Hirottappe hi sati sīlaṃ uppajjati ceva tiṭṭhati ca, asati neva uppajjati ceva na tiṭṭhati cāti evaṃvidhena sīlena sīlavā hoti. Etaṃ sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīhi vā viramantassa, vattapaṭipattiṃ vā pūrentassa cetanādayo dhammā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ ‘‘kiṃ sīlanti? Cetanā sīlaṃ, cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ, saṃvaro sīlaṃ, avītikkamo sīla’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.39).
在这里,思就是戒:指的是远离杀生等行为的人,或者正在圆满履行义务与实践的人的思。心所戒:指的是远离杀生等行为的人的离心所。另外,思就是戒:指的是舍弃杀生等行为的人的七种业道思。心所戒:指的是按照“舍弃贪欲,以离贪之心而住”等方式,在《相应部·大品》中所说的无贪、无瞋、正见等法。防护就是戒:这里应当知道有五种防护——别解脱防护、念防护、智防护、忍耐防护、精进防护。它们之间的差别将在后面说明。不犯就是戒:受持戒律者在身、语上不发生违犯。在此,防护戒与不犯戒才是正说/非方便的戒;应当知道,思戒与心所戒是引申/方便的戒。巴利
Tattha cetanā sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīhi vā viramantassa vattapaṭipattiṃ vā pūrentassa cetanā. Cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīhi viramantassa virati. Api ca cetanā sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīni pajahantassa sattakammapathacetanā. Cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ nāma ‘‘abhijjhaṃ pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.217) nayena saṃyuttamahāvagge vuttā anabhijjhābyāpādasammādiṭṭhidhammā. Saṃvaro sīlanti ettha pañcavidhena saṃvaro veditabbo – pātimokkhasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaro. Tassa nānākaraṇaṃ upari āvi bhavissati. Avītikkamo sīlanti samādinnasīlassa kāyikavācasiko avītikkamo. Ettha ca saṃvarasīlaṃ, avītikkamasīlanti idameva nippariyāyato sīlaṃ. Cetanāsīlaṃ, cetasikaṃ sīlanti pariyāyato sīlanti veditabbaṃ.
巴帝摩卡就是学处之戒。因为凡是守护它、保护它的人,它就能让人从地狱等苦中解脱、释放出来,所以称为巴帝摩卡。以巴帝摩卡防护而防护,就是具足巴帝摩卡防护戒。行仪与行处具足,就是在行仪和行处上都具足。于微细,就是在极微小的事情上。于过恶,就是在不善法上。见怖畏,就是见到怖畏。正受持后,就是正确地受持之后。于学处学,就是逐条受持那些学处而学。此外,正受持后于学处学还有一层意思:凡是学处中、所学范围内应当学的,无论是身的行为还是心的行为,这一切都全部受持而学。巴利
Pātimokkhanti sikkhāpadasīlaṃ. Tañhi yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehi, tasmā ‘‘pātimokkha’’nti vuttaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlena samannāgato. Ācāragocarasampannoti ācārena ceva gocarena ca sampanno. Aṇumattesūti appamattakesu. Vajjesūti akusaladhammesu. Bhayadassāvīti bhayadassī. Samādāyāti sammā ādiyitvā. Sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādiyitvā sikkhati. Api ca samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti yaṃkiñci sikkhāpadesu sikkhākoṭṭhāsesu sikkhitabbaṃ kāyikaṃ vā cetasikaṃ vā, taṃ sabbaṃ samādāya sikkhati.
小戒蕴,是指僧残等之外剩下的那部分戒蕴。大戒蕴,是指波罗夷等之外剩下的那部分戒蕴。然而,因为比丘依靠巴帝摩卡戒而安立在教法中,所以称它为“立足处”。或者说,比丘在这里安立,善法也在这里安立,所以叫“立足处”。这个意思应当依据诸经来理解,比如:“有智慧的人依靠戒而安立”(《相应部》1.23, 192),“大王,戒是一切善法的立足相”(《弥兰陀王问经》2.1.9),“大王,安立于戒的人……一切善法都不会退失”(《弥兰陀王问经》2.1.9)等经文。巴利
Khuddako sīlakkhandhoti saṅghādisesādisāvaseso sīlakkhandho. Mahantoti pārājikādiniravaseso. Yasmā pana pātimokkhasīlena bhikkhu sāsane patiṭṭhāti nāma , tasmā taṃ ‘‘patiṭṭhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Patiṭṭhahati vā ettha bhikkhu, kusalā dhammā eva vā ettha patiṭṭhahantīti patiṭṭhā. Ayamattho ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192) ca, ‘‘patiṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, mahārāja, sīlaṃ sabbesaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammāna’’nti (mi. pa. 2.1.9) ca , ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhito kho, mahārāja…pe… sabbe kusalā dhammā na parihāyantī’’ti (mi. pa. 2.1.9) ca ādisuttavasena veditabbo.
这个戒之所以被称为“初”,是因为它最先生起。这一点经里也说过:“所以,优低耶,你应当首先在善法上清净。什么是善法的初?就是极清净的戒和正直的见。”(《相应部》5.382)
就像想建城的建筑师,先清理建城的地方,然后才按街道、四衢、十字路口等划分来建城。同样,瑜伽行者从一开始就清净戒,然后才亲证止、观、道、果、涅槃。
又像染匠先用三种碱水洗净衣服,然后在干净的衣服上随心所欲地染色;又像巧画师想作画,先处理墙面,然后才现起图像。同样,瑜伽行者从一开始就清净戒,然后才亲证止、观等法。因此,戒被称为“初”。巴利
Tadetaṃ pubbuppattiatthena ādi. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘tasmātiha tvaṃ uttiya ādimeva visodhehi kusalesu dhammesu. Ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ, sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ diṭṭhi ca ujukā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.382). Yathā hi nagaravaḍḍhakī nagaraṃ māpetukāmo paṭhamaṃ nagaraṭṭhānaṃ sodheti, tato aparabhāge vīthicatukkasiṅghāṭakādiparicchedena vibhajitvāva nagaraṃ māpeti. Evameva yogāvacaro ādito sīlaṃ visodheti, tato aparabhāge samādhivipassanāmaggaphalanibbānāni sacchikaroti. Yathā vā pana rajako paṭhamaṃ tīhi khārehi vatthaṃ dhovitvā parisuddhe vatthe yadicchakaṃ raṅgajātaṃ upaneti, yathā vā pana cheko cittakāro rūpaṃ likhitukāmo āditova bhittiparikammaṃ karoti, tato aparabhāge rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Evameva yogāvacaro āditova sīlaṃ visodhetvā aparabhāge samathavipassanādayo dhamme sacchikaroti. Tasmā sīlaṃ ‘‘ādī’’ti vuttaṃ.
这个戒因为和“行”相似,所以就叫“行”。因为“行”这个词在这里指的就是“足”。就像一个人如果脚被砍断了,就不会生起往某个方向走的动机,只有双脚完好的人才会生起;同样,如果一个人的戒被破坏了、有残缺、不圆满,那么他为了走向涅槃而由智慧产生的行进就无法完成;如果一个人的戒没有被破坏、没有残缺、圆满具足,那么他为了走向涅槃而由智慧产生的行进就能完成。因此,戒被称为“行”。巴利
Tadetaṃ caraṇasarikkhatāya caraṇaṃ. Caraṇāti hi pādā vuccanti. Yathā hi chinnacaraṇassa purisassa disaṃ gamanābhisaṅkhāro na jāyati, paripuṇṇapādasseva jāyati, evameva yassa sīlaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti khaṇḍaṃ aparipuṇṇaṃ, tassa nibbānagamanāya ñāṇagamanaṃ na sampajjati. Yassa pana taṃ abhinnaṃ hoti akhaṇḍaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, tassa nibbānagamanāya ñāṇagamanaṃ sampajjati. Tasmā sīlaṃ ‘‘caraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
这个戒,从“调伏”的角度说,就是调伏;从“防护”的角度说,就是防护。通过这两个方面,既说了戒的调伏,也说了戒的防护。这里的词义是:所谓调伏,就是调伏违犯时的躁动,或者调伏这个人,不让他因为违犯而躁动,所以叫调伏。所谓防护,就是关闭、堵住违犯进入的门,所以叫防护。巴利
Tadetaṃ saṃyamanavasena saṃyamo. Saṃvaraṇavasena saṃvaroti ubhayenāpi sīlasaṃyamo ceva sīlasaṃvaro ca kathito. Vacanattho panettha saṃyameti vītikkamavipphandanaṃ , puggalaṃ vā saṃyameti vītikkamavasena tassa vipphandituṃ na detīti saṃyamo. Vītikkamassa pavesanadvāraṃ saṃvarati pidahatīti saṃvaro.
所谓解脱,是最上的,或如口者。就像众生的四种食从口进入后,遍布身体各个肢节;同样,瑜伽行者的四地善法从戒之口进入后,能成就利益。因此称为“解脱”。在首要之中是善妙的,所以叫“首要”,意思是前行、最胜、最上。对于善法的证得,应当理解为:为了获得四地善法,它称为首要,是前行、最胜、最上的。巴利
Mokkhanti uttamaṃ mukhabhūtaṃ vā. Yathā hi sattānaṃ catubbidho āhāro mukhena pavisitvā aṅgamaṅgāni pharati, evaṃ yoginopi catubhūmakakusalaṃ sīlamukhena pavisitvā atthasiddhiṃ sampādeti. Tena ‘‘mokkha’’nti. Pamukhe sādhūti pāmokkhaṃ, pubbaṅgamaṃ seṭṭhaṃ padhānanti attho. Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyāti catubhūmakakusalānaṃ paṭilābhatthāya pāmokkhaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ seṭṭhaṃ padhānanti veditabbaṃ.
“唯独远离诸欲”,意思是从诸欲中远离、离开、退开。这里这个“eva”(唯独)应当理解为决定的意思。因为它是决定的意思,所以在进入初禅而安住的时候,即使诸欲并不存在,也能表明诸欲是初禅的对立面,并且只有舍弃诸欲才能证得初禅。怎么表明呢?当说“唯独远离诸欲”这样作出决定时,就显示出:这个禅那必定以诸欲为对立面,只要诸欲还在,这个禅那就不会生起,就像黑暗还在时光明就不会出现一样;只有舍弃诸欲才能证得这个禅那,就像只有舍弃此岸才能到达彼岸一样。因此说这是在作出决定。巴利
Viviccevakāmehīti kāmehi vivicca vinā hutvā apakkamitvā. Yo panāyamettha evakāro, so niyamatthoti veditabbo. Yasmā ca niyamattho, tasmā tasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharaṇasamaye avijjamānānampi kāmānaṃ tassa paṭhamajjhānassa paṭipakkhabhāvaṃ kāmapariccāgeneva cassa adhigamaṃ dīpeti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Vivicceva kāmehī’’ti evañhi niyame kariyamāne idaṃ paññāyati, nūnimassa jhānassa kāmā paṭipakkhabhūtā, yesu sati idaṃ na pavattati andhakāre sati padīpobhāso viya, tesaṃ pariccāgeneva cassa adhigamo hoti orimatīrapariccāgena pārimatīrasseva. Tasmā niyamaṃ karotīti.
在这里,也许有人会问:为什么这个“唯”字只出现在前一句,而没有出现在后一句?难道可以不远离不善法,就进入并安住于禅那吗?其实不应该这样看。因为初禅是从诸欲出离的,所以这个“唯”字只在前一句出现。初禅超越了欲界,又是欲贪的对治,所以它正是诸欲的出离。正如经中所说:“这就是诸欲的出离,也就是出离。”在后一句中,也应该像“就在这里,有沙门;这里,有第二沙门”那样,把“唯”字带进来说。因为事实上,如果不远离那些被称为盖的不善法,就不可能进入并安住于禅那。所以应当在这两个分句中都看到这个“唯”字:唯有远离诸欲,唯有远离不善法。在这两个分句中,虽然用“远离”这个共通的说法,可以涵盖“那分远离”等以及“身远离”等一切远离,但在前阶段,应当理解为身远离、心远离和镇伏远离。在出世间道的那一刻,则是身远离、心远离、正断远离和出离远离。巴利
Tattha siyā ‘‘kasmā panesa pubbapadeyeva vutto na uttarapade, kiṃ akusalehi dhammehi aviviccāpi jhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyyā’’ti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃnissaraṇato hi pubbapade eva esa vutto. Kāmadhātusamatikkamanato hi kāmarāgapaṭipakkhato ca idaṃ jhānaṃ kāmānameva nissaraṇaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ nekkhamma’’nti (itivu. 72). Uttarapadepi pana yathā ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139) ettha evakāro ānetvā vuccati, evaṃ vattabbo. Na hi sakkā ito aññehipi nīvaraṇasaṅkhātehi akusalehi dhammehi avivicca jhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ. Tasmā vivicceva kāmehi vivicceva akusalehi dhammehīti evaṃ padadvayepi esa daṭṭhabbo. Padadvayepi ca kiñcāpi viviccāti iminā sādhāraṇavacanena tadaṅgavivekādayo kāyavivekādayo ca sabbepi vivekā saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, tathāpi pubbabhāge kāyavivekacittavivekavikkhambhanavivekā daṭṭhabbā. Lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe kāyavivekacittavivekasamucchedavivekanissaraṇavivekā.
用“诸欲”这个词,应当知道:这里以“哪些是事欲?即可爱的色……”这种方式所说的事欲,以及在同一部《分别论》中以“欲求是欲,贪是欲,欲贪是欲,思惟是欲,贪是欲,思惟贪是欲”这种方式所说的烦恼欲,全都包含在内。这样理解的话,“唯独远离诸欲”这个说法,就也能解释为“也唯独远离事欲”。由此就说明了身远离。巴利
Kāmehīti iminā pana padena ye ca idha ‘‘katame vatthukāmā manāpikā rūpā’’tiādinā nayena vatthukāmā vuttā, ye ca idheva vibhaṅge ‘‘chando kāmo rāgo kāmo chandarāgo kāmo saṅkappo kāmo rāgo kāmo saṅkapparāgo kāmo’’ti evaṃ kilesakāmā vuttā, te sabbepi saṅgahitā icceva daṭṭhabbā. Evañhi sati vivicceva kāmehīti vatthukāmehipi viviccevāti attho yujjati. Tena kāyaviveko vutto hoti.
“远离不善法”这句话的意思是:远离烦恼欲,或者远离一切不善法,这样理解是通的。由此说明的是心远离。在这里,前一句说的是远离事欲,因此阐明了舍离欲乐;后一句说的是远离烦恼欲,因此阐明了摄取、受持出离之乐。正是这样,通过宣说远离事欲和烦恼欲这两者本身,前一句表明舍弃染污的所依,后一句表明舍弃染污本身;前一句表明舍弃贪的根源,后一句表明舍弃痴的根源;前一句阐明加行的清净,后一句阐明意乐的培育。应当知道,这就是对“诸欲”一词所涉及的诸欲中,就事欲这一方面所作的解释。巴利
Vivicca akusalehi dhammehīti kilesakāmehi sabbākusalehi vā viviccāti attho yujjati. Tena cittaviveko vutto hoti. Purimena cettha vatthukāmehi vivekavacanato eva kāmasukhapariccāgo, dutiyena kilesakāmehi vivekavacanato nekkhammasukhapariggaho vibhāvito hoti . Evaṃ vatthukāmakilesakāmavivekavacanatoyeva ca etesaṃ paṭhamena saṃkilesavatthuppahānaṃ, dutiyena saṃkilesappahānaṃ. Paṭhamena lolabhāvassa hetupariccāgo, dutiyena bālabhāvassa. Paṭhamena ca payogasuddhi, dutiyena āsayaposanaṃ vibhāvitaṃ hotīti ñātabbaṃ . Esa tāva nayo ‘‘kāmehī’’ti ettha vuttakāmesu vatthukāmapakkhe .
在烦恼欲这一边,所谓“欲”和“贪”等等多种分类,指的就是欲贪,统称为“欲”。它虽然也属于不善法,但在《分别论》中,以“其中什么是欲贪?就是欲……”这样的方式,从它是禅那的对立面这个角度,被单独提出来说。或者说,因为它是烦恼欲,所以在前面“诸欲”这个词里说到;因为它属于不善法,所以在后面“不善法”这个词里说到。又因为它种类很多,所以不说单数的“欲”,而说复数的“诸欲”。虽然还有其他法也可以归为不善法,但《分别论》为了显示它们与上层禅支相违而对治的关系,只举出诸盖:“其中哪些是不善法?就是欲贪……”等等。因为诸盖是禅支的相违者、对立者,而禅支正是它们的对治者、破坏者、摧毁者。正如《藏论》所说:“定对治欲贪,喜对治嗔恚,寻对治昏沉睡眠,乐对治掉举恶作,伺对治疑。”巴利
Kilesakāmapakkhe pana chandoti ca rāgoti ca evamādīhi anekabhedo kāmacchandova ‘‘kāmo’’ti adhippeto. So ca akusalapariyāpannopi samāno ‘‘tattha katamo kāmacchando, kāmo’’tiādinā nayena vibhaṅge jhānapaṭipakkhato visuṃ vutto. Kilesakāmattā vā purimapade vutto, akusalapariyāpannattā dutiyapade. Anekabhedato cassa kāmatoti avatvā kāmehīti vuttaṃ. Aññesampi ca dhammānaṃ akusalabhāve vijjamāne ‘‘tattha katame akusalā dhammā, kāmacchando’’tiādinā nayena vibhaṅge (vibha. 564) uparijhānaṅgānaṃ paccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanato nīvaraṇāneva vuttāni. Nīvaraṇāni hi jhānaṅgapaccanīkāni tesaṃ jhānaṅgāneva paṭipakkhāni, viddhaṃsakāni vighātakānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi ‘‘samādhi kāmacchandassa paṭipakkho, pīti byāpādassa, vitakko thinamiddhassa, sukhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccassa, vicāro vicikicchāyā’’ti peṭake vuttaṃ.
在这里,“唯独远离诸欲”这句话,说明的是以镇伏的方式远离爱欲;“远离不善法”这句话,说明的是以镇伏的方式远离五种盖。如果从“未提及的也一并收摄”的角度来说,第一句是针对爱欲,第二句是针对其余诸盖。同样,第一句针对三种不善根中,以五种欲乐为对象的贪;第二句针对以嗔恚事等为对象的嗔和痴。或者,在瀑流等法当中,第一句针对欲流、欲轭、欲漏、欲取、贪求、身系、欲贪结;第二句针对其余的瀑流、轭、漏、取、身系、结。第一句针对渴爱以及和它相应的心所,第二句针对无明以及和它相应的心所。此外还应当知道,第一句说明的是以镇伏的方式远离八种与贪相应的不善心,第二句说明的是以镇伏的方式远离其余四种不善心。巴利
Evamettha vivicceva kāmehīti iminā kāmacchandassa vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hoti, vivicca akusalehi dhammehīti iminā pañcannampi nīvaraṇānaṃ. Aggahitaggahaṇena pana paṭhamena kāmacchandassa, dutiyena sesanīvaraṇānaṃ. Tathā paṭhamena tīsu akusalamūlesu pañcakāmaguṇabhedavisayassa lobhassa, dutiyena āghātavatthubhedādivisayānaṃ dosamohānaṃ. Oghādīsu vā dhammesu paṭhamena kāmoghakāmayogakāmāsavakāmupādānaabhijjhākāyaganthakāmarāgasaṃyojanānaṃ, dutiyena avasesaoghayogāsavaupādānaganthasaṃyojanānaṃ. Paṭhamena ca taṇhāya taṃsampayuttakānañca, dutiyena avijjāya taṃsampayuttakānañca. Api ca paṭhamena lobhasampayuttaaṭṭhacittuppādānaṃ, dutiyena sesānaṃ catunnaṃ akusalacittuppādānaṃ vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hotīti veditabbo.
到这里,已经说明了初禅的舍断支;现在为了说明相应支,所以说了“有寻有伺”等话。其中,寻的特相是让心投向所缘,伺的特相是随顺审察所缘。虽然这两者在某些情况下并不分离,但寻因为粗重、因为在前引导,就像敲钟的第一击,是心对所缘的最初投向;伺因为微细、因为其本性是随顺审察,就像钟的余响,是后续的相续跟随。在这里,寻是激荡的,在最初生起时表现为心的颤动,就像一只想飞上天空的鸟拍动双翅,又像一只心随香气而奔向莲花的蜜蜂迎面扑去。伺则是平静的运作,心并不过分激荡,就像已经飞上天空的鸟展开双翅滑翔,又像已经到达莲花上方的蜜蜂在莲花上方盘旋。巴利
Ettāvatā ca paṭhamassa jhānassa pahānaṅgaṃ dassetvā idāni sampayogaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ārammaṇe cittassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇo vitakko, ārammaṇānumajjanalakkhaṇo vicāro. Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci aviyoge oḷārikaṭṭhena pubbaṅgamaṭṭhena ca ghaṇḍābhighāto viya cetaso paṭhamābhinipāto vitakko, sukhumaṭṭhena anumajjanasabhāvena ca ghaṇḍānuravo viya anupabandho vicāro. Vipphāravā cettha vitakko paṭhamuppattikāle paripphandanabhūto cittassa, ākāse uppatitukāmassa pakkhino pakkhavikkhepo viya, padumābhimukhapāto viya ca gandhānubandhacetaso bhamarassa. Santavutti vicāro nātiparipphandanabhāvo cittassa, ākāse uppatitassa pakkhino pakkhappasāraṇaṃ viya, paribbhamanaṃ viya ca padumābhimukhapatitassa bhamarassa padumassa uparibhāge.
不过,《二集注》里说:“就像大鸟在空中飞行时,用两只翅膀兜住风,再把翅膀收拢起来滑行——同样,以让心投向所缘的方式生起的,是寻;就像为了兜住风而扇动翅膀飞行——同样,以持续细察的方式生起的,是伺。”这种说法只在无间相续生起时才说得通。而它们的区别,在初禅和第二禅里就变得很明显。再者,好比有人一只手紧紧抓住沾了污垢的铜器,另一只手用蘸了粉和油的刷帚苗去擦,紧抓的那只手就像寻,擦拭的那只手就像伺。同样,陶匠用棍子敲打让轮子转起来做陶器时,向下压住的那只手就像寻,来回移动的那只手就像伺。同样,画圆时,固定在中心的针就像投向所缘的寻,在外围转动的针就像持续细察的伺。这样一来,这个禅那和这样的寻、这样的伺一起生起,就像树和花、果一样,所以这个禅那被称为“有寻有伺”。巴利
Dukanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ākāse gacchato mahāsakuṇassa ubhohi pakkhehi vātaṃ gahetvā pakkhe sannisīdāpetvā gamanaṃ viya ārammaṇe cetaso abhiniropanabhāvena pavatto vitakko, vātaggahaṇatthaṃ pakkhe phandāpayamānassa gamanaṃ viya anumajjanabhāvena pavatto vicāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ anuppabandhena pavattiyaṃ yujjati. So pana nesaṃ viseso paṭhamadutiyajjhānesu pākaṭo hoti. Api ca malaggahitaṃ kaṃsabhājanaṃ ekena hatthena daḷhaṃ gahetvā itarena hatthena cuṇṇatelavālaṇḍupakena parimajjantassa daḷhaggahaṇahattho viya vitakko. Parimajjanahattho viya vicāro. Tathā kumbhakārassa daṇḍappahārena cakkaṃ bhamayitvā bhājanaṃ karontassa uppīḷanahattho viya vitakko. Ito cito ca sañcaraṇahattho viya vicāro. Tathā maṇḍalaṃ karontassa majjhe sannirumbhitvā ṭhitakaṇṭako viya abhiniropano vitakko. Bahi paribbhamanakaṇṭako viya anumajjamāno vicāro. Iti iminā ca vitakkena iminā ca vicārena saha vattati rukkho viya pupphena ca phalena cāti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti vuccati.
“远离所生”在这里是指:远离就是离去,意思是五盖的离开。或者说,远离就是已经远离的状态,意思是已经远离五盖、与禅那相应的那一堆法。因此,从远离生起,或者在那远离中生起,就叫“远离所生”。“喜乐”在这里是指:能让人生起满足感,所以叫喜,它的特相是欢喜。不过这个喜有五种:小喜、刹那喜、涌起喜、激动喜、遍满喜。巴利
Vivekajanti ettha vivitti viveko, nīvaraṇavigamoti attho. Vivittoti vā viveko, nīvaraṇavivitto jhānasampayuttadhammarāsīti attho. Tasmā vivekā, tasmiṃ vā viveke jātanti vivekajaṃ. Pītisukhanti ettha piṇayatīti pīti, sā sampiyāyanalakkhaṇā. Sā panesā khuddikāpīti , khaṇikāpīti, okkantikāpīti, ubbegāpīti, pharaṇāpītīti pañcavidhā hoti.
其中,小喜只能让身体毛发竖起来。刹那喜在每个刹那生起,像闪电一样。涌起喜就像海岸边的波浪,一次又一次地冲击身体,然后破碎。激动喜力量很强,能把身体向上提起,甚至达到腾跃空中的程度。巴利
Tattha khuddikāpīti sarīre lomahaṃsamattameva kātuṃ sakkoti. Khaṇikāpīti khaṇe khaṇe vijjuppādasadisā hoti. Okkantikāpīti samuddatīraṃ vīci viya, kāyaṃ okkamitvā okkamitvā bhijjati. Ubbegāpīti balavatī hoti, kāyaṃ uddhaggaṃ katvā ākāse laṅghāpanappamāṇapattā.
遍满喜的力量非常强。它一生起,整个身体就像被吹胀的皮囊一样鼓胀充满,又像大水灌进山洞一样,全身都被浸透。
这五种喜在孕育、成熟的过程中,能圆满两种轻安:身轻安和心轻安。轻安在孕育、成熟的过程中,能圆满两种乐:身乐和心乐。乐在孕育、成熟的过程中,能圆满三种定:刹那定、近行定和安止定。
在这些喜当中,那种成为安止定基础、不断增长、与定相应而生的遍满喜,才是这里所说的喜。巴利
Pharaṇāpīti atibalavatī hoti. Tāya hi uppannāya sakalasarīraṃ dhamitvā pūritavatthi viya mahatā udakoghena pakkhandapabbatakucchi viya ca anuparipphuṭaṃ hoti. Sā panesā pañcavidhā pīti gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī paripākaṃ gacchantī duvidhaṃ passaddhiṃ paripūreti kāyapassaddhiñca cittapassaddhiñca, passaddhi gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī paripākaṃ gacchantī duvidhampi sukhaṃ paripūreti kāyikaṃ cetasikañca, sukhaṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhantaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ tividhaṃ samādhiṃ paripūreti khaṇikasamādhiṃ upacārasamādhiṃ appanāsamādhiñcāti. Tāsu yā appanāsamādhissa mūlaṃ hutvā vaḍḍhamānā samādhisampayogaṅgatā pharaṇāpīti, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā pītīti.
另一种是“乐”:它能让人感到愉悦,所以叫乐,意思是使生起它的人变得快乐。或者,乐就是安乐,因为它能很好地吞食、破坏身心的病痛,所以叫乐,这是悦受的名称。它以愉悦为特相。虽然在某些情况下喜和乐并不分离,但对获得可意对象所产生的满足是喜,对已获得之味的体验是乐。有喜的地方就有乐,有乐的地方却不一定有喜。喜属于行蕴,乐属于受蕴。就像在旷野中疲惫的人,看到或听到林边有水时那样,是喜;进入树荫、喝水、用水时那样,是乐。应当知道,这是根据各个时候哪种更明显来说的。这样,这个禅那有这种喜和这种乐,或者说,这种喜和这种乐存在于这个禅那之中,因此这个禅那被称为“喜乐”。巴利
Itaraṃ pana sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassa uppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Sukhanaṃ vā sukhaṃ, suṭṭhu vā khādati khaṇati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ, somanassavedanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Taṃ sātalakkhaṇaṃ. Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge iṭṭhārammaṇapaṭilābhatuṭṭhi pīti, paṭiladdharasānubhavanaṃ sukhaṃ. Yattha pīti, tattha sukhaṃ, yattha sukhaṃ, tattha na niyamato pīti. Saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitā pīti, vedanākkhandhasaṅgahitaṃ sukhaṃ. Kantārakhinnassa vanantodakadassanasavanesu viya pīti, vanacchāyappavesanaudakaparibhogesu viya sukhaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye pākaṭabhāvato cetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Iti ayañca pīti idañca sukhaṃ assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘pītisukha’’nti vuccati.
或者,喜和乐合在一起就是“喜乐”,就像“法与律”这类复合词一样。这个禅那有由远离而生的喜乐,或者说,由远离而生的喜乐存在于这个禅那之中,所以也可以叫“由远离而生的喜乐”。正如这个禅那是从远离而生的一样,这里的喜乐也同样是从远离而生,而且它为这个禅那所具有。因此,即使不采用省略式的复合词,直接用一个词说“由远离而生的喜乐”,也是说得通的。巴利
Atha vā pīti ca sukhañca pītisukhaṃ dhammavinayādayo viya. Vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti evampi vivekajaṃpītisukhaṃ. Yatheva hi jhānaṃ, evaṃ pītisukhampettha vivekajameva hoti, tañcassa atthi, tasmā alopasamāsaṃ katvā ekapadeneva ‘‘vivekajaṃpītisukha’’ntipi vattuṃ yujjati.
“第一”是指:按顺序数下来排在最先,所以叫第一;也可以说,这是最先生起的,所以叫第一。“禅那”有两种:所缘观禅和相观禅。其中,八种等至因为专注于地遍等所缘,所以被称为所缘观禅;而观、道、果则叫相观禅。这里面,观因为专注于无常等相,所以是相观禅;对于已由观完成任务者,因为由道而成就,所以道是相观禅;果则因为专注于灭谛的真实相,所以是相观禅。在这里,前行阶段指的是所缘观禅,出世间道刹那则指相观禅。因此应当知道,禅那要从所缘观、相观以及烧尽敌对法这三方面来理解。巴利
Paṭhamanti gaṇanānupubbatā paṭhamaṃ, idaṃ paṭhamaṃ uppannantipi paṭhamaṃ. Jhānanti duvidhaṃ jhānaṃ ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ lakkhaṇūpanijjhānañcāti. Tattha aṭṭha samāpattiyo pathavīkasiṇādiārammaṇaṃ upanijjhāyantīti ārammaṇūpanijjhānanti saṅkhyaṃ gatā. Vipassanāmaggaphalāni pana lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ nāma. Tattha vipassanā aniccādilakkhaṇassa upanijjhānato lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Vipassanāya katakiccassa maggena ijjhanato maggo lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, phalaṃ pana nirodhasaccaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Tesu idha pubbabhāge ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tasmā ārammaṇūpanijjhānato ca lakkhaṇūpanijjhānato ca paccanīkajhāpanato ca jhānanti veditabbaṃ.
具足,是说已经接近、已经达到。或者说使之具足,意思是使之完成。住,是指以与那种状态相应的行住坐卧方式而安住;也就是说,成就了前面所说的那种禅那的人,使自身的行止和活动得以完全实现。巴利
Upasampajjāti upagantvā, pāpuṇitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasampādayitvā vā, nipphādetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Viharatīti tadanurūpena iriyāpathavihārena iriyati, vuttappakārajhānasamaṅgī hutvā attabhāvassa iriyanaṃ vuttiṃ abhinipphādeti.
这初禅舍断了五支,又具足五支,具备三种善,成就十种相。其中,应当知道:由于断除了欲贪、瞋恚、昏沉睡眠、掉举追悔、疑这五种盖,所以说是“舍断了五支”。因为这五盖若未断除,禅那就不会生起,所以它们被称为禅那的“舍离支”。虽然在禅那生起的那一刹那,其他不善法也会被断除,但这五盖尤其是禅那的特别障碍。因为心被欲贪引诱、追逐种种不同的对象时,就无法在单一所缘上得定;或者,被欲贪战胜的心,不会走上舍离欲界的修行道路。被瞋恚冲击时,心对所缘产生抵触,就不能持续不断地运作。被昏沉睡眠压伏时,心就变得不堪能。被掉举追悔所控制时,心不能寂静,只是动摇散乱。被疑所损害时,心就登不上能证得禅那的修行之路。因此,正因它们特别障碍禅那,才被称为“舍离支”。巴利
Taṃ panetaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ tividhakalyāṇaṃ, dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ. Tattha kāmacchando byāpādo thinamiddhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ vicikicchāti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ pahānavasena pañcaṅgavippahīnatā veditabbā. Na hi etesu appahīnesu jhānaṃ uppajjati. Tenassetāni pahānaṅgānīti vuccanti. Kiñcāpi hi jhānakkhaṇe aññepi akusalā dhammā pahīyanti, tathāpi etāneva visesena jhānantarāyakarāni. Kāmacchandena hi nānāvisayappalobhitaṃ cittaṃ na ekattārammaṇe samādhiyati, kāmacchandābhibhūtaṃ vā, taṃ na kāmadhātuppahānāya paṭipadaṃ paṭipajjati. Byāpādena vā ārammaṇe paṭihaññamānaṃ na nirantaraṃ pavattati. Thinamiddhābhibhūtaṃ akammaññaṃ hoti. Uddhaccakukkuccaparetaṃ avūpasantameva hutvā paribbhamati. Vicikicchāya upahataṃ jhānādhigamasādhikaṃ paṭipadaṃ nārohati. Iti visesena jhānantarāyakarattā etāneva pahānaṅgānīti vuttāni.
因为寻把心导向并安放在所缘上,伺则让心持续地紧贴所缘,依靠这两者,心已经完成了不散乱的加行,加行的善巧成就了,喜就使心充实,乐就使身心增益。然后,与这些相应的其余诸法,在寻的导向、伺的持续、喜的充实、乐的增益这些力量的扶持下,心一境性就平等、正确地安立在单一所缘上。因此,应当知道,由于寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性这五者的生起,禅那具足五支。因为这五者生起时,禅那就叫作已经生起的禅那,所以说这五者是它的五支具足。因此不应当认为,除了这五支具足之外,还另外有一个叫禅那的东西。就像仅仅从支分的角度说四支军队、五支乐器、八支圣道一样,应当知道这里也只是从支分的角度,说它是五支或五支具足。巴利
Yasmā pana vitakko ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropeti, vicāro anupabandhati, tehi avikkhepāya sampāditapayogassa cetaso payogasampattisambhavā pīti pīṇanaṃ sukhañca upabrūhanaṃ karoti. Athassa sesasampayuttadhammā etehi abhiniropanānubandhanapīṇanupabrūhanehi anuggahitā ekaggatā ekattārammaṇe samaṃ sammā ca ādhiyati. Tasmā vitakko vicāro pīti sukhaṃ cittekaggatāti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ uppattivasena pañcaṅgasamannāgatatā veditabbā. Uppannesu hi etesu pañcasu jhānaṃ uppannaṃ nāma hoti. Tenassa etāni pañcaṅgasamannāgatānīti vuccanti. Tasmā na etehi samannāgataṃ aññadeva jhānaṃ nāma atthīti gahetabbaṃ. Yathā pana aṅgamattavaseneva caturaṅginī senā, pañcaṅgikaṃ tūriyaṃ, aṭṭhaṅgiko ca maggoti vuccati, evamidampi aṅgamattavaseneva pañcaṅgikanti vā pañcaṅgasamannāgatanti vā vuccatīti veditabbaṃ.
这五支虽然在近行定的刹那也存在,但那时它们只是比平常的心更强一些。而在这里,它们比近行定时更强,已经达到了色界禅那的特征,是圆满成就的。因为在这里,寻以非常清晰的方式生起,把心导向并安放在所缘上;伺则极其紧密地随顺、贴近所缘;喜和乐遍满整个身体。所以世尊说:“他的全身,没有一处不被远离所生的喜乐所遍满。”心一境性也像下层盒盖与上层盒盖紧密贴合那样,触碰着所缘而生起。这就是它们与其他近行定诸支的区别。其中,心一境性虽然在“有寻有伺”这段文里没有列出,但《分别论》中说:“禅那就是寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性”,所以它确实是禅支。因为世尊是以那样的意图作了简略说明,而那个意图在《分别论》中已经阐明。巴利
Etāni ca pañcaṅgāni kiñcāpi upacārakkhaṇepi atthi, atha kho upacāre pakaticittato balavatarāni. Idha pana upacāratopi balavatarāni rūpāvacaralakkhaṇappattāni nipphannāni. Ettha hi vitakko suvisadena ākārena ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropayamāno uppajjati. Vicāro ativiya ārammaṇaṃ anumajjamāno. Pītisukhaṃ sabbāvantampi kāyaṃ pharamānaṃ . Tenevāha – ‘‘nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṃ hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.226). Cittekaggatāpi heṭṭhimamhi samuggapaṭale uparimaṃ samuggapaṭalaṃ viya ārammaṇesu phusitā hutvā uppajjati, ayametesaṃ itarehi viseso. Tattha cittekaggatā kiñcāpi ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti imasmiṃ pāṭhe na niddiṭṭhā, tathāpi vibhaṅge (vibha. 565) ‘‘jhānanti vitakko vicāro pīti sukhaṃ cittekaggatā’’ti evaṃ vuttattā aṅgameva. Yena hi adhippāyena bhagavatā uddeso kato, soyeva tena vibhaṅge pakāsitoti.
具有三种善的状态巴利
Tividhakalyāṇaṃ
具有三种善、具足十种相:在这里,是按初、中、后三个阶段来说具有三种善。也应知道,正是就这些初、中、后各自的相状来说,具足十种相。关于这一点,经文如下:巴利
Tividhakalyāṇaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannanti ettha pana ādimajjhapariyosānavasenatividhakalyāṇatā. Tesaṃyeva ca ādimajjhapariyosānānaṃ lakkhaṇavasena dasalakkhaṇasampannatā veditabbā. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi –
初禅以行道清净为开端,以舍的随增为中间,以欢喜为结尾,初禅以行道清净为开端。开端有几种相?开端有三种相:心从它的障碍中净化;因为净化,心进入中间的止相;因为进入,心就在那里跃入。也就是:心从障碍中净化;因为净化,心进入中间的止相;因为进入,心就在那里跃入。初禅以行道清净为开端,开端有这三种相。因此说:初禅既是初善,也具足三相。巴利
‘‘Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ, paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi. Ādissa kati lakkhaṇāni? Ādissa tīṇi lakkhaṇāni – yo tassa paripantho, tato cittaṃ visujjhati, visuddhattā cittaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati, paṭipannattā tattha cittaṃ pakkhandati. Yañca paripanthato cittaṃ visujjhati, yañca visuddhattā cittaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati, yañca paṭipannattā tattha cittaṃ pakkhandati. Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, ādissa imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati – ‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ ādikalyāṇañceva hoti tilakkhaṇasampannañcā’ti.
初禅的舍随增属于中间阶段。中间阶段有几种相?中间阶段有三种相:以舍旁观清净的心,以舍旁观已进入止的心,以舍旁观单一性现前。也就是:以舍旁观清净的心,以舍旁观已进入止的心,以舍旁观单一性现前。初禅的舍随增属于中间阶段,中间阶段有这三种相。因此说:初禅是中间善,也具备三相。巴利
‘‘Paṭhamassa jhānassa upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe. Majjhassa kati lakkhaṇāni? Majjhassa tīṇi lakkhaṇāni – visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati, samathapaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati, ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Yañca visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati, yañca samathapaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati, yañca ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Paṭhamassa jhānassa upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, majjhassa imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati – ‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ majjhekalyāṇañceva hoti tilakkhaṇasampannañcā’ti.
初禅的欢喜满足是最后阶段。最后阶段有几种特征?最后阶段有四种特征:以那里生起的诸法不超越为欢喜满足,以诸根归于一味为欢喜满足,以策动相应精进为欢喜满足,以反复修习为欢喜满足。初禅的欢喜满足是最后阶段,最后阶段有这四种特征。因此说:初禅是最后阶段善,也具备四种特征。巴利
‘‘Paṭhamassa jhānassa sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ. Pariyosānassa kati lakkhaṇāni? Pariyosānassa cattāri lakkhaṇāni – tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, indriyānaṃ ekarāsaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, āsevanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā. Paṭhamassa jhānassa sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ, pariyosānassa imāni cattāri lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati ‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇañceva hoti catulakkhaṇasampannañcā’’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.158).
对此,有些人这样解说:所谓“行道清净”,就是具足资粮的近行定;所谓“舍随增”,就是安止定;所谓“庆慰”,就是省察。然而,经文里说“心达到一境,既趣入行道清净,又为舍所随增,又为智所庆慰”,因此应当知道:在安止定本身之中,按入定的方式来成立行道清净;按中舍的作用来成立舍随增;按令诸法不相超越等状态得以成就、从而使净化智的作用圆满的方式,来成立庆慰。巴利
‘‘Tatra paṭipadāvisuddhi nāma sasambhāriko upacāro. Upekkhānubrūhanā nāma appanā. Sampahaṃsanā nāma paccavekkhaṇā’’ti evameke vaṇṇayanti. Yasmā pana ‘‘ekattagataṃ cittaṃ paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandañceva hoti upekkhānubrūhitañca ñāṇena ca sampahaṃsita’’nti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā antoappanāyameva āgamanavasena paṭipadāvisuddhi, tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā, dhammānaṃ anativattanādibhāvasādhanena pariyodāpakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena sampahaṃsanā ca veditabbā.
怎么理解呢?当某一阶段安止定生起时,被称为“盖”的那一群烦恼就是该禅那的障碍,心从那里得到净化。由于清净,心脱离了障碍,便进入中等的止相。所谓“中等的止相”,其实就是真正现起的安止定本身。紧接着,前一个心念以融入同一相续的方式趋向那种状态,这就叫“进入中等的止相”;因为这样进入,又因趋向那种状态而投入其中,就叫“跃入”。因此应当知道,在初禅生起的那一刹那,依前一个心念中已存在的模式而成立的“修道清净”,是依入定之因而说的。巴利
Kathaṃ ? Yasmiñhi vāre appanā uppajjati, tasmiṃ yo nīvaraṇasaṅkhāto kilesagaṇo tassa jhānassa paripantho, tato cittaṃ visujjhati. Visuddhattā āvaraṇavirahitaṃ hutvā majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati. Majjhimasamathanimittaṃ nāma samappavatto appanāsamādhiyeva. Tadanantaraṃ pana purimacittaṃ ekasantatipariṇāmanayena tathattaṃ upagacchamānaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati nāma, evaṃ paṭipannattā tathattupagamanena tattha pakkhandati nāma. Evaṃ tāva purimacitte vijjamānākāranipphādikā paṭhamassa jhānassa uppādakkhaṇeyeva āgamanavasena paṭipadāvisuddhi veditabbā.
对于这样已经清净的心,因为再也没有需要清净的地方,所以不再在清净这件事上费力,这就叫作“舍而旁观清净的心”。由于已经进入寂止的状态,不再在令心入定这件事上费力,这就叫作“舍而旁观已进入寂止状态的心”。正因为已经进入寂止状态,他已经断除了与烦恼的纠缠,安住在单一所缘上,不再在令心安住单一所缘这件事上费力,这就叫作“舍而旁观已现起的单一所缘”。应当知道,这就是通过中舍的作用来使舍增长。巴利
Evaṃ visuddhassa pana tassa puna visodhetabbābhāvato visodhane byāpāraṃ akaronto visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Samathabhāvūpagamanena samathapaṭipannassa puna samādhāne byāpāraṃ akaronto samathapaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Samathapaṭipannabhāvato eva cassa kilesasaṃsaggaṃ pahāya ekattena upaṭṭhitassa puna ekattupaṭṭhāne byāpāraṃ akaronto ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Evaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā veditabbā.
当这些由舍这样培育起来、在此中生起的、被称为定与慧的双运法,生起时彼此不超越;那些信等诸根,因为从种种烦恼中解脱,以解脱之味而成为一味;那推动与此相应、符合它们不超越与一味本质的精进;以及在那刹那生起的重复修习——所有这些行相,都是因为以智在染污与清净中看见了种种过患与利益,经由那样的庆慰、净化和彻底净化而得以成就。因此说:以成就诸法不超越等状态来净化的智,其作用完成时,便有庆慰。巴利
Ye panete evaṃ upekkhānubrūhite tattha jātā samādhipaññāsaṅkhātā yuganaddhadhammā aññamaññaṃ anativattamānā hutvā pavattā, yāni ca saddhādīni indriyāni nānākilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasāni hutvā pavattāni, yañcesa tadupagaṃ tesaṃ anativattanaekarasabhāvānaṃ anucchavikaṃ vīriyaṃ vāhayati, yā cassa tasmiṃ khaṇe pavattā āsevanā, sabbepi te ākārā yasmā ñāṇena saṃkilesavodānesu taṃ taṃ ādīnavañca ānisaṃsañca disvā tathā tathā sampahaṃsitattā visodhitattā pariyodāpitattā nipphannāva, tasmā ‘‘dhammānaṃ anativattanādibhāvasādhanena pariyodāpakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena sampahaṃsanā veditabbā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“寻与伺的寂止”:是指寻和伺这两者的寂止、超越,也就是说,在第二禅那的刹那,它们不再出现。在这里应当知道:虽然第二禅中初禅的一切法都不存在——因为初禅的触等法和这里的触等法并不相同——但为了说明“由于超越了较粗的禅支,才能从初禅之后证得第二禅等”,才这样说“寻与伺的寂止”。“内”:这里指的是自身内部。不过在《分别论》中只说“内,自己的”。因为指的是自身内部,所以这里的意思是:在自身中生起,在自己的相续中生起。巴利
Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti vitakkassa ca vicārassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vūpasamā samatikkamā, dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe apātubhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kiñcāpi dutiyajjhāne sabbepi paṭhamajjhānadhammā na santi, aññeyeva hi paṭhamajjhāne phassādayo, aññe idha. Oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamo hotīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ajjhattanti idha niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, vibhaṅge pana ‘‘ajjhattaṃ paccatta’’nti (vibha. 573) ettakameva vuttaṃ. Yasmā niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, tasmā attani jātaṃ, attano santāne nibbattanti ayamettha attho.
净信:信被称为净信。由于与净信相应,禅那本身也是净信,就像因为与蓝色相应,蓝布就被称为蓝布一样。或者,因为那禅那具足了净信,又通过止息寻与伺的扰动而使心清净,所以也被称为“净信”。在这个释义中,应当理解词的关系是“心的净信”。而在前一个释义中,“心的”这个词应当与“心一境性”连在一起理解。巴利
Sampasādananti sampasādanaṃ vuccati saddhā. Sampasādanayogato jhānampi sampasādanaṃ, nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viya. Yasmā vā taṃ jhānaṃ sampasādanasamannāgatattā vitakkavicārakkhobhavūpasamanena ca ceto sampasādayati, tasmāpi ‘‘sampasādana’’nti vuttaṃ. Imasmiñca atthavikappe sampasādanaṃ cetasoti evaṃ padasambandho veditabbo. Purimasmiṃ pana atthavikappe cetasoti etaṃ ekodibhāvena saddhiṃ yojetabbaṃ.
这里对含义的梳理如下:“一境”(ekodi)是指独自生起;因为不被寻和伺所覆盖,所以它是作为最高、最殊胜的状态而生起,这就是它的含义。因为在世间,最殊胜的东西也被称为“一”。或者也可以说,它是脱离寻与伺、没有同伴而独自生起。另一种解释是:它使相应的心法生起,所以叫“生起者”,意思是令其生起。以殊胜之义来说,这个“一”就是“生起者”,合起来叫“一境”(ekodi),这是定的同义词。因此,修习、增长这个“一境”,就是第二禅那的“心一境性”。不过,这个“一境”是属于心的,不是属于众生的,也不是属于命者的。所以说它是“心的一境性”。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ atthayojanā – eko udetīti ekodi, vitakkavicārehi anajjhārūḷhattā aggo seṭṭho hutvā udetīti attho. Seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccati. Vitakkavicāravirahito vā eko asahāyo hutvātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Atha vā sampayuttadhamme udāyatīti udi, uṭṭhāpetīti attho. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena eko ca so udi cāti ekodi, samādhissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Iti imaṃ ekodiṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti idaṃ dutiyajjhānaṃ ekodibhāvaṃ. So panāyaṃ ekodi yasmā cetaso, na sattassa, na jīvassa. Tasmā etaṃ ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti vuttaṃ.
有人问:第一禅那中不是也有信吗?也有称为“一境”的定吗?那为什么只说第二禅那是“心的净信、心一境性”呢?回答:因为第一禅那被寻和伺的搅动所干扰,就像被波浪搅浑的水一样,并不清澈明净。所以,虽然有信,也不说它是“净信”。也正因为不够明净,那里的定也不够明显,所以也不说它是“心一境性”。但在第二禅那中,因为没有寻和伺的障碍,信就得到了空间,变得强大有力;又因为有了强力的信作为同伴,定也变得明显。所以应当知道,只有这个禅那才这样称呼。巴利
Nanu cāyaṃ saddhā paṭhamajjhānepi atthi, ayañca ekodināmako samādhi, atha kasmā idameva ‘‘sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti vuttanti? Vuccate – aduñhi paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkavicārakkhobhena vīcitaraṅgasamākulamiva jalaṃ na suppasannaṃ hoti, tasmā satiyāpi saddhāya sampasādananti na vuttaṃ. Na suppasannattāyeva cettha samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭo, tasmā ekodibhāvantipi na vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana jhāne vitakkavicārapalibodhābhāvena laddhokāsā balavatī saddhā, balavasaddhāsahāyapaṭilābheneva ca samādhipi pākaṭo. Tasmā idameva evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
无寻、无伺:因为通过修习已经断除,所以在这个禅那中没有寻;或者对于这个禅那来说,没有寻,因此叫无寻。用同样的方式,也应知道是无伺。这里有人问:难道“寻与伺的寂止”这句话不也已经成立这个意思了吗?那为什么还要再说“无寻、无伺”呢?回答说:确实如此,这个意思已经成立。但这句话并不是专门用来显示这个意思的。我们不是已经说过吗:为了显示由于超越越来越粗的禅支,从初禅之后才能证得第二禅等,所以才说“寻与伺的寂止”。巴利
Avitakkaṃ avicāranti bhāvanāya pahīnattā etasmiṃ, etassa vā vitakko natthīti avitakkaṃ. Imināva nayena avicāraṃ. Etthāha ‘‘nanu ca ‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’ti imināpi ayamattho siddho. Atha kasmā puna vuttaṃ ‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’’’nti? Vuccate – evametaṃ, siddhovāyamattho. Na panetaṃ tadatthadīpakaṃ, nanu avocumha ‘‘oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ samadhigamo hotīti dassanatthaṃ ‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’ti evaṃ vutta’’nti.
不过,寻与伺的寂止所带来的这种净信,并不是因为烦恼污浊被清除。同样,寻与伺的寂止所带来的心一境性,也不像近行禅那样是因为舍弃了诸盖,也不像初禅那样是因为禅支显现。所以,这句话是在说明净信和心一境性的原因。
同样,寻与伺的寂止所带来的这种无寻无伺,也不像第三禅、第四禅那样,也不像眼识等那样,是因为寻与伺根本不存在。所以,这句话既说明了无寻无伺状态的原因,又不只是在说寻与伺不存在。而“无寻无伺”这句话本身,才仅仅是在说明寻与伺不存在。因此,前面虽然已经说过,这里仍然需要再说一次。巴利
Api ca vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ sampasādanaṃ, na kilesakālussiyassa. Vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā ekodibhāvaṃ, na upacārajjhānamiva nīvaraṇappahānā, na paṭhamajjhānamiva ca aṅgapātubhāvāti evaṃ sampasādanaekodibhāvānaṃ hetuparidīpakamidaṃ vacanaṃ. Tathā vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ, na tatiyacatutthajjhānāni viya cakkhuviññāṇādīni viya ca abhāvāti, evaṃ avitakkaavicārabhāvassa hetuparidīpakañca, na vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakaṃ. Vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakameva pana ‘‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ. Tasmā purimaṃ vatvāpi puna vattabbamevāti.
“定生”的意思是:从初禅的定生起,或者从与初禅相应的定生起。在这里,虽然初禅也是从相应的定生起的,但只有这第二禅的定才真正配得上称为“定”,因为它没有寻和伺的扰动,极其安稳不动,又极其清净。所以,为了赞叹这个定的殊胜,才特别说这第二禅的喜乐是“定生”。“喜乐”这个词,也是按照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Samādhijanti paṭhamajjhānasamādhito sampayuttasamādhito vā jātanti attho. Tattha kiñcāpi paṭhamampi sampayuttasamādhito jātaṃ, atha kho ayameva samādhi ‘‘samādhī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati, vitakkavicārakkhobhavirahena ativiya acalattā suppasannattā ca. Tasmā imassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ idameva ‘‘samādhija’’nti vuttaṃ. Pītisukhanti idaṃ vuttanayameva.
第二,因为按计数顺序是第二个。这个因为是第二个生起的,所以叫第二。巴利
Dutiyanti gaṇanānupubbatā dutiyaṃ. Idaṃ dutiyaṃ uppannantipi dutiyaṃ.
关于“由喜的离贪”这一说法:“离”指的是对前面所说的那种喜感到厌弃,或者是超越它。而中间的“和”字有合并、统摄的作用,它可以把“寂止”合并进来,也可以把“寻与伺的寂止”合并进来。当它合并的是“寂止”时,就应该这样理解句子的连接:由喜的离贪,以及更进一步,由寂止。在这种连接方式中,“离”是厌弃的意思,因此应该理解为:由于对喜的厌弃和超越。当它合并的是“寻与伺的寂止”时,就应该这样理解句子的连接:由喜的离贪,以及更进一步,由寻与伺的寂止。在这种连接方式中,“离”是超越的意思,因此应该理解为:由喜的超越,以及寻与伺的寂止。巴利
Pītiyā ca virāgāti virāgo nāma vuttappakārāya pītiyā jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā . Ubhinnaṃ pana antarā ca-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, so vūpasamaṃ vā sampiṇḍeti vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ vā. Tattha yadā vūpasamameva sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā virāgā ca, kiñca bhiyyo vūpasamā cāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāya virāgo jigucchanattho hoti, tasmā pītiyā jigucchanā ca samatikkamā cāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo. Yadā pana vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā ca virāgā, kiñca bhiyyo vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāya virāgo samatikkamanattho hoti, tasmā pītiyā ca samatikkamā vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo.
寻与伺其实在第二禅时就已经止息了,这里之所以这样说,是为了指明进入这个禅定的途径,同时也是为了赞叹它。因为一旦说“寻与伺的止息”,人们就会明白:“寻与伺的止息,正是进入这个禅定的途径。”就像在第三圣道时,那些有身见等烦恼并非由第三圣道所断除,经文却说“断除五下分结”,这是一种赞叹的说法,用来激励那些精勤修行的人发起努力。同样地,在这里,寻与伺并非在此才止息,却说它们止息,也是一种赞叹。因此,这个意思就被表述为:“由喜的超越,以及寻与伺的止息。”巴利
Kāmañcete vitakkavicārā dutiyajjhāneyeva vūpasantā, imassa pana jhānassa maggaparidīpanatthaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthañcetaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti hi vutte idaṃ paññāyati ‘‘nūna vitakkavicāravūpasamo maggo imassa jhānassā’’ti. Yathā ca tatiye ariyamagge appahīnānampi sakkāyadiṭṭhādīnaṃ ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ pahānā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.132-133) evaṃ pahānaṃ vuccamānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti, tadadhigamāya ussukkānaṃ ussāhajanakaṃ, evameva idha avūpasantānampi vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo vuccamāno vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti, tenāyamattho vutto ‘‘pītiyā ca samatikkamā vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā’’ti.
这里“以舍而住”的意思是:所谓“舍”,就是依生起而观察,也就是平等地看待,以不偏不倚的心态去观察。由于具备了那种清净、广大、稳固的舍,证得第三禅的人就被称为“具舍者”。巴利
Upekkhako ca viharatīti ettha upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā, samaṃ passati, apakkhapatitā hutvā passatīti attho. Tāya visadāya vipulāya thāmagatāya samannāgatattā tatiyajjhānasamaṅgī ‘‘upekkhako’’ti vuccati.
舍有十种:六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、精进舍、行舍、受舍、观舍、中舍、禅那舍、清净舍。巴利
Upekkhā pana dasavidhā hoti – chaḷaṅgupekkhā brahmavihārupekkhā bojjhaṅgupekkhā vīriyupekkhā saṅkhārupekkhā vedanupekkhā vipassanupekkhā tatramajjhattupekkhā jhānupekkhā pārisuddhupekkhāti.
在这里,所谓“六支舍”,就是经中说的:“诸比丘,比丘用眼睛看到色之后,既不欢喜,也不忧愁,而是安住在舍中,保持正念和正知。”这种舍,是漏尽者在六个根门面对可意和不可意的六种所缘时,因为本性清净、不失去本来状态而呈现的舍,这就叫六支舍。巴利
Tattha yā ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno’’ti (ma. ni. 6.1) evamāgatā khīṇāsavassa chasu dvāresu iṭṭhāniṭṭhachaḷārammaṇāpāthe parisuddhapakatibhāvāvijahanākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ chaḷaṅgupekkhā nāma.
还有一种舍,是像《长部》和《中部》里说的那样:“以与舍俱行的心,遍满一个方向而安住。”这是面对众生时保持中立、不偏不倚的心态,这种舍就叫梵住舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.556; ma. ni. 1.77) evamāgatā sattesu majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ brahmavihārupekkhā nāma.
而依据《中部》中“修习依远离的舍觉支”这句话所说的、对同时生起的诸法保持平等中舍状态的舍,这就叫作舍觉支。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti vivekanissita’’nti (ma. ni. 2.247) evamāgatā sahajātānaṃ dhammānaṃ majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ bojjhaṅgupekkhā nāma.
不过,如果是像《增支部》里说的“应当时不时地作意舍相”那样提到的舍,也就是被称为既不过度精进、也不过分松懈的舍,这就叫精进舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘kālena kālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasi karotī’’ti (a. ni. 3.103) evamāgatā anaccāraddhanātisithilavīriyasaṅkhātā upekkhā, ayaṃ vīriyupekkhā nāma.
还有一类舍,是《无碍解道》里这样说的:“有多少种行舍是依靠止而生起的?有多少种行舍是依靠观而生起的?依靠止而生起八种行舍,依靠观而生起十种行舍。”在对盖等法进行思择而安住、不执取时,处于中立状态的舍,这就叫作行舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘kati saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, kati saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti? Aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.57) evamāgatā nīvaraṇādipaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanāgahaṇe majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā nāma.
而“受舍”是指《法集论》里所说的“当欲界善心生起、与舍俱行”时,那种被称为不苦不乐的感受,这就叫受舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti upekkhāsahagata’’nti (dha. sa. 150) evamāgatā adukkhamasukhasaṅkhātā upekkhā, ayaṃ vedanupekkhā nāma.
还有一种舍,是依照“凡是存在的、已生起的,他就舍断它,从而获得舍”这句话而来的,在审察时处于中立状态的舍,这叫作观舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘yadatthi yaṃ bhūtaṃ, taṃ pajahati, upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.71-72; a. ni. 7.55) evamāgatā vicinane majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā nāma.
不过,那种在欲等随附心所中提到的、与俱生诸法相应而平等运转的舍,就叫作中舍性舍。巴利
Yā pana chandādīsu yevāpanakesu āgatā sahajātānaṃ samavāhitabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhā nāma.
而那种以“住于舍”这样的方式出现的舍,即使面对最上等的乐,也不会产生偏袒,这就叫作禅那舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhako ca viharatī’’ti evamāgatā aggasukhepi tasmiṃ apakkhapātajananī upekkhā, ayaṃ jhānupekkhā nāma.
而“舍念清净的第四禅那”所说的那种舍,从一切对立中完全清净,即使在对立已经平息时也不起作用,这叫作清净舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhāna’’nti (dha. sa. 165; dī. ni. 1.232) evamāgatā sabbapaccanīkaparisuddhā paccanīkavūpasamanepi abyāpārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ pārisuddhupekkhā nāma.
在这里,六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、中舍性舍、禅那舍和清净舍,从含义上来说其实是同一个,就是中舍性舍。只是随着各种不同阶段,它才有这些分类。就像同一个人,随着他是男孩、青年、长者、将军、国王等,而有不同的称呼一样。所以应当知道:在六支舍存在的地方,就没有觉支舍等;或者在觉支舍存在的地方,就没有六支舍等。巴利
Tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā ca brahmavihārupekkhā ca bojjhaṅgupekkhā ca tatramajjhattupekkhā ca jhānupekkhā ca pārisuddhupekkhā ca atthato ekā, tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti. Tena tena avatthābhedena panassā ayaṃ bhedo . Ekassāpi sato sattassa kumārayuvatherasenāpatirājādivasena bhedo viya, tasmā tāsu yattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā, na tattha bojjhaṅgupekkhādayo. Yattha vā pana bojjhaṅgupekkhā, na tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhādayo hontīti veditabbā.
就像这些舍在意义上是一体的,行舍和观舍也是如此。这其实就是慧,只是按作用分成两种。譬如有人傍晚走进屋里,发现有一条蛇,就拿起羊足杖去寻找;看见蛇躺在糠堆里,便观察“这到底是不是蛇?”看清三个特征后,不再怀疑,在审察“是蛇、不是蛇”时,心中生起中舍。同样,已经开始修观的行者,以观智照见诸行的三相,在审察诸行无常等性质时生起的中舍,就是观舍。又像那个人用羊足杖牢牢叉住蛇,心想:“我要怎样才能不伤害这条蛇,也不被它咬到,而把它放走呢?”在寻求放走的方法时,对抓握这件事保持中舍。同样,由于已经看见三相,便看待三有如同炽燃的火聚,此时对执取诸行保持中舍,这就是行舍。这样,观舍成就时,行舍也就成就了。不过,这种慧按其在审察和执取时的中舍作用,被分成两种而已。而精进舍和受舍,彼此不同,与其余诸舍在意义上也各不相同。这里说:巴利
Yathā cetāsaṃ atthato ekībhāvo, evaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanupekkhānampi. Paññā eva hi esā, kiccavasena dvidhā bhinnā, yathā hi purisassa sāyaṃ gehaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ sappaṃ ajapadadaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pariyesamānassa taṃ thusakoṭṭhake nipannaṃ disvā ‘‘sappo nu kho no’’ti avalokentassa sovatthikattayaṃ disvā nibbematikassa ‘‘sappo na sappo’’ti vicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, evameva yā āraddhavipassakassa vipassanāñāṇena lakkhaṇattaye diṭṭhe saṅkhārānaṃ aniccabhāvādivicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā. Yathā pana tassa purisassa ajapadadaṇḍakena gāḷhaṃ sappaṃ gahetvā ‘‘kintāhaṃ imaṃ sappaṃ aviheṭhento attānañca iminā aḍaṃsāpento muñceyya’’nti muñcanākārameva pariyesato gahaṇe majjhattatā hoti, evameva yā lakkhaṇattayassa diṭṭhattā āditte viya tayo bhave passato saṅkhāraggahaṇe majjhattatā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā. Iti vipassanupekkhāya siddhāya saṅkhārupekkhāpi siddhāva hoti. Iminā panesā vicinanaggahaṇesu majjhattatāsaṅkhātena kiccena dvidhā bhinnāti. Vīriyupekkhā pana vedanupekkhā ca aññamaññañca avasesāhi ca atthato bhinnāyevāti. Āha cettha –
中舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、六支舍、禅那舍、清净舍,
观、行舍、受舍、精进。
从广说的角度,则有十种舍,依次从六支舍、中舍等开始。
两种慧,再加上另外两种,就成了这四种。巴利
‘‘Majjhattabrahmabojjhaṅgachaḷaṅgajhānasuddhiyo; Vipassanā ca saṅkhāravedanāvīriyaṃ iti. ‘‘Vitthārato dasopekkhā-chamajjhattādito tato; Duve paññā tato dvīhi, catassova bhavantimā’’ti.
因此,在这些舍当中,这里指的是禅那舍。它的特相是中舍,作用是无所作为,现起是不造作,近因是离喜。对此有人问:“从含义上说,这不就是中舍性吗?而中舍性在初禅和第二禅里也有。那么,为什么在那里不说‘他住于舍’呢?为什么不这样说?”因为在那里它的作用还不明显。因为在那些禅那里,它被寻等所压倒,作用不明显。但在这里,它不被寻、伺、喜所压倒,就像抬起头来一样,作用变得明显了,所以才宣说。巴利
Iti imāsu upekkhāsu jhānupekkhā idha adhippetā. Sā majjhattalakkhaṇā, anābhogarasā , abyāpārapaccupaṭṭhānā, pītivirāgapadaṭṭhānāti. Etthāha – ‘‘nanu cāyaṃ atthato tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti, sā ca paṭhamadutiyajjhānesupi atthi. Tasmā tatrāpi ‘upekkhako ca viharatī’ti evamayaṃ vattabbā siyā, sā kasmā na vuttā’’ti? Aparibyattakiccato. Aparibyattañhi tassā tattha kiccaṃ, vitakkādīhi abhibhūtattā. Idha panāyaṃ vitakkavicārapītīhi anabhibhūtattā ukkhittasirā viya hutvā paribyattakiccā jātā, tasmā vuttāti.
在“具念与正知”这一句中,忆念就是“具念”,清楚了知就是“正知”。这样,是就这个人而说念与正知两者。其中,念以忆持为特相,以不忘失为作用,以守护为现起;正知以不迷惑为特相,以审察为作用,以辨别探究为现起。巴利
Satoca sampajānoti ettha saratīti sato. Sampajānātīti sampajāno. Iti puggalena sati ca sampajaññañca vuttaṃ. Tattha saraṇalakkhaṇā sati, asammussanarasā ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā. Asammohalakkhaṇaṃ sampajaññaṃ, tīraṇarasaṃ, pavicayapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ.
在这里,虽然这种念与正知在前面的禅那里也有,但要知道,失念、没有正知的人,连近行定都成不了,更别说安止定了。不过,因为那些禅那比较粗,心在那种状态里走起来很轻松,就像人在平地上走一样,所以在那里念与正知的作用不明显。而通过舍弃粗重的禅支,这个禅那变得微细,心的运行就像走在刀刃上的人一样,必须靠念与正知的作用来摄持,所以只有在这里(第三禅)才特别说到它。还有什么道理呢?就像一头跟着母牛的小牛,被人从母牛身边带走,没人看管,它就会再跑回母牛那里;同样,这第三禅的乐虽然已经脱离了喜,但如果没有念与正知的守护,它就可能又退回到和喜相应,或者众生会对乐产生贪染。而且这种乐极其甜美,因为再往上就没有比这更殊胜的乐了。然而,正是靠念与正知的力量,在这里才能对乐不产生贪染,否则做不到。应当知道,为了显示这个道理上的差别,才唯独在这里说到它。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpi idaṃ satisampajaññaṃ purimajjhānesupi atthi, muṭṭhassatissa hi asampajānassa upacāramattampi na sampajjati, pageva appanā. Oḷārikattā pana tesaṃ jhānānaṃ bhūmiyaṃ viya purisassa cittassa gati sukhā hoti, abyattaṃ tattha satisampajaññakiccaṃ. Oḷārikaṅgappahānena pana sukhumattā imassa jhānassa purisassa khuradhārāyaṃ viya satisampajaññakiccapariggahitā eva cittassa gati icchitabbāti idheva vuttaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo – yathā dhenupago vaccho dhenuto apanīto arakkhiyamāno punadeva dhenuṃ upagacchati, evamidaṃ tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ pītito apanītampi satisampajaññārakkhena arakkhiyamānaṃ punadeva pītiṃ upagaccheyya, pītisampayuttameva siyā, sukhe vāpi sattā sārajjanti. Idañca atimadhurasukhaṃ, tato paraṃ sukhābhāvā. Satisampajaññānubhāvena panettha sukhe asārajjanā hoti, no aññathāti imampi atthavisesaṃ dassetuṃ idamidheva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
现在解释“以身体感受乐”这一句:虽然具足第三禅的人并没有对乐受的执取,但即便如此,因为他的名身与乐相应。或者说,与名身相应的乐,由它所生起的极殊胜色法触及了他的色身;由于这种触及,即使从禅那出定后,他也能感受乐。因此,为了显示这个含义,才说“以身体感受乐”。巴利
Idāni sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetīti ettha kiñcāpi tatiyajjhānasamaṅgino sukhapaṭisaṃvedanābhogo natthi, evaṃ santepi yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ. Yaṃ vā taṃ nāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhānenassa yasmā atipaṇītena rūpena rūpakāyo phuṭo, yassa phuṭattā jhānā vuṭṭhitopi sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyya, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti āha.
现在来解释“圣者们称说他为‘舍者、具念者、住于乐者’”这一句。这里的含义是:佛陀等圣者们以该禅那为因、以该禅那为缘,来称说、开示、施设、阐明、分别、揭示、显明、公开赞叹那位具足第三禅的人。是怎样的呢?就是“舍者、具念者、住于乐者”。应当知道,这里应这样连接理解:他成就此第三禅而安住。巴利
Idāni yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti ettha yaṃjhānahetu yaṃjhānakāraṇā taṃ tatiyajjhānasamaṅgīpuggalaṃ buddhādayo ariyā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti pakāsenti, pasaṃsantīti adhippāyo. Kinti? Upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti. Taṃ tatiyajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharatīti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
为什么那些圣者会这样称赞他呢?因为他值得称赞。这位修行者在第三禅中,虽然已经达到极其甜美的殊胜之乐、抵达了乐的顶点,却仍然保持“舍”,不会被对乐的贪著所牵引。又因为“喜”不再生起,念住现前,所以是“具念者”。再者,他以名身感受那种圣者所喜爱、圣者所修习、没有杂染的乐,因此值得称赞。应当知道,圣者们为了显示这些值得称赞的功德,才这样称赞他:“舍者、具念者、住于乐者。”说“第三”,是因为按计数顺序排在第三,也因为它是第三个生起的,所以叫“第三”。巴利
Kasmā pana taṃ te evaṃ pasaṃsantīti? Pasaṃsārahato. Ayañhi yasmā atimadhurasukhe sukhapāramippattepi tatiyajjhāne upekkhako, na tattha sukhābhisaṅgena ākaḍḍhīyati. Yathā ca pīti na uppajjati, evaṃ upaṭṭhitasatitāya satimā. Yasmā ca ariyakantaṃ ariyajanasevitameva ca asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ sukhaṃ nāmakāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, tasmā pasaṃsāraho. Iti pasaṃsārahato naṃ ariyā te evaṃ pasaṃsāhetubhūte guṇe pakāsento ‘‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsantīti veditabbaṃ. Tatiyanti gaṇanānupubbatā tatiyaṃ, idaṃ tatiyaṃ uppannantipi tatiyaṃ.
“因为舍断乐、因为舍断苦”,说的是舍断身体的乐和身体的苦。“在之前”,是说这些确实都在之前,而不是在第四禅那的那一刻。“因为喜与忧的息灭”,说的是心里的乐和心里的苦——这两者也是在之前就已息灭,也就是已经舍断了。巴利
Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānāti kāyikasukhassa ca kāyikadukkhassa ca pahānā. Pubbevāti tañca kho pubbeva, na catutthajjhānakkhaṇe. Somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāti cetasikasukhassa ca cetasikadukkhassa cāti imesampi dvinnaṃ pubbeva atthaṅgamā, pahānā icceva vuttaṃ hoti.
那么,它们是在什么时候被断除的呢?是在四种禅那各自的近行刹那。喜,正是在第四禅的近行刹那才被断除;而苦、忧、乐,则是在第一、第二、第三禅的近行刹那被断除。虽然在这里,乐、苦、喜、忧的断除并没有按照断除的先后次第来说,但在《根分别》中,它们是按照诸根的列举次第来说的,这里也应当同样理解:应当知道乐、苦、喜、忧的断除。巴利
Kadā pana nesaṃ pahānaṃ hoti? Catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe. Somanassañhi catutthajjhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyati, dukkhadomanassasukhāni paṭhamadutiyatatiyajjhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇesu. Evametesaṃ pahānakkamena avuttānaṃ, indriyavibhaṅge pana indriyānaṃ uddesakkameneva idhāpi vuttānaṃ sukhadukkhasomanassadomanassānaṃ pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
如果这些感受只是在各个禅那的近行刹那才被断除,那为什么经中又说:“所生起的苦根在哪里无余灭尽?诸比丘,在这里,比丘远离诸欲……成就初禅而住,就在这里,所生起的苦根无余灭尽。所生起的忧根……乐根……喜根在哪里无余灭尽?诸比丘,在这里,比丘舍断乐……成就第四禅而住。就在这里,所生起的喜根无余灭尽”呢?这是把灭尽说在禅那本身之中,因为那是殊胜的灭尽。在初禅等禅那中,它们的灭尽是殊胜的灭尽,而不只是灭尽。但在近行刹那,只是灭尽,并不是殊胜的灭尽。巴利
Yadi panetāni tassa tassa jhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyanti, atha kasmā ‘‘kattha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, ettha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati. Kattha cuppannaṃ domanassindriyaṃ… sukhindriyaṃ… somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu, sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ettha cuppannaṃ somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.510) evaṃ jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti. Atisayanirodhattā. Atisayanirodho hi nesaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīsu, na nirodhoyeva. Nirodhoyeva pana upacārakkhaṇe nātisayanirodho.
正因为这样,在取不同所缘的初禅近行定中,即使苦根已经灭去,也可能因为蚊虻叮咬之类的接触,或者坐卧不适之类的伤害而重新生起;但在安止定里面,就绝不会生起。在近行定中,它虽然灭去了,却不算真正灭尽,因为还没有被它的对治法彻底摧毁。而在安止定中,由于喜遍满全身,整个身体都被乐所浸润,身体被乐浸润之后,苦根就彻底灭尽了,因为已被对治法摧毁。同样,在取不同所缘的第二禅近行定中,忧根虽然已经断除,但因为寻和伺还在,当身体疲劳、内心受到伤害时,忧仍会生起;一旦没有寻和伺,它就完全不生起。它在哪里生起呢?就在有寻有伺的地方。在第二禅近行定中,寻和伺还没有被断除,所以忧可能在那里生起;但在第二禅本身中绝不会生起,因为它的生起之缘已被断除。同样,在第三禅近行定中,乐根虽然已经断除,但如果身体被喜所生的殊胜细触所触及,乐仍可能生起;但在第三禅本身中绝不会生起,因为在第三禅中,作为乐之缘的喜已经完全灭尽。同样,在第四禅近行定中,喜根虽然已经断除,但由于接近安止,又因为尚未完全超越未达安止的舍,喜仍可能生起;但在第四禅本身中绝不会生起。正因为如此,经文里才处处说“在这里生起的苦根无余灭尽”,这是把无余灭尽安立在各个禅那本身之中。巴利
Tathā hi nānāvajjane paṭhamajjhānūpacāre niruddhassāpi dukkhindriyassa ḍaṃsamakasādisamphassena vā visamāsanupatāpena vā siyā uppatti, na tveva antoappanāyaṃ. Upacāre vā niruddhampetaṃ na suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti, paṭipakkhena avihatattā. Antoappanāyaṃ pana pītipharaṇena sabbo kāyo sukhokkanto hoti, sukhokkantakāyassa ca suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti dukkhindriyaṃ, paṭipakkhena vihatattā. Nānāvajjaneyeva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi domanassindriyassa yasmā etaṃ vitakkavicārapaccayepi kāyakilamathe cittupaghāte ca sati uppajjati, vitakkavicārābhāve neva uppajjati. Yattha pana uppajjati, tattha vitakkavicārabhāve. Appahīnāyeva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre vitakkavicārāti tatthassa siyā uppatti, na tveva dutiyajjhāne, pahīnappaccayattā. Tathā tatiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi sukhindriyassa pītisamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭakāyassa siyā uppatti, na tveva tatiyajjhāne. Tatiyajjhāne hi sukhassa paccayabhūtā pīti sabbaso niruddhāti. Tathā catutthajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi somanassindriyassa āsannattā, appanāpattāya upekkhāya abhāvena sammā anatikkantattā ca siyā uppatti, na tveva catutthajjhāne. Tasmā eva ca ‘‘etthuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti tattha tattha aparisesaggahaṇaṃ katanti.
这里有人问:那些受在进入各个禅那的近行阶段时就已经被断除了,为什么在这里还要把它们都拿出来一起说呢?是为了容易把握。因为这里所说的不苦不乐受极其微细、难以辨认,没办法轻易把握它。就好比一头恶牛,不管从哪个方向靠近都抓不住它,牧牛人为了容易抓住它,就把所有的牛都赶进一个牛栏里,然后一头一头往外牵,轮到那头牛出来时,就说“就是这头,抓住它”,这样就能把它抓住。同样地,世尊为了容易把握,就把这些受全都集合在一起。这样把集合起来的受展示出来之后,就能指出:“那既不是乐,也不是苦,不是喜悦,也不是忧愁——这就是不苦不乐受”,这样才有可能让人把握它。巴利
Etthāha – ‘‘athevaṃ tassa tassa jhānassupacāre pahīnāpi etā vedanā idha kasmā samāhaṭā’’ti? Sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ. Yā hi ayaṃ adukkhamasukhanti ettha adukkhamasukhā vedanā vuttā, sā sukhumā dubbiññeyyā, na sakkā sukhena gahetuṃ, tasmā yathā nāma duṭṭhassa yathā vā tathā vā upasaṅkamitvā gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyassa goṇassa sukhagahaṇatthaṃ gopo ekasmiṃ vaje sabbā gāvo samāharati, athekekaṃ nīharanto paṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ ‘‘ayaṃ so gaṇhatha na’’nti tampi gāhāpeti, evameva bhagavā sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ sabbā etā samāharīti. Evañhi samāhaṭā etā dassetvā ‘‘yaṃ neva sukhaṃ, na dukkhaṃ, na somanassaṃ, na domanassaṃ, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā’’ti sakkā hoti esā gāhayituṃ.
不过,也应该知道,这里说这些感受,也是为了显示不苦不乐心解脱的缘。因为断苦等就是它的缘。正如经中所说:“贤友,有四种缘能成就进入不苦不乐心解脱。贤友,在这里,比丘舍弃乐……成就并安住于第四禅。贤友,这四种缘就是成就进入不苦不乐心解脱的缘。”又像在其他地方,身见等虽然已经断除,但为了赞叹第三道,仍然说“在那里断除”;同样,这里也是为了赞叹这种禅那,才说这些感受,应当这样理解。或者也可以理解为:这里说这些感受,是为了通过破坏它们的缘,来显示贪和嗔离得极远。因为在这些感受中,乐是喜的缘,喜是贪的缘;苦是忧的缘,忧是嗔的缘。由于乐等被破坏,那些依缘而起的贪和嗔也就被摧毁,变得极其遥远。巴利
Api ca adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā paccayadassanatthañcāpi etā vuttāti veditabbā. Dukkhappahānādayo hi tassā paccayā. Yathāha – ‘‘cattāro kho, āvuso, paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ime kho, āvuso, cattāro paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458). Yathā vā aññattha pahīnāpi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo tatiyamaggassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ ‘‘tattha pahīnā’’ti vuttā, evaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthampetassa jhānassetā idha vuttātipi veditabbā. Paccayaghātena vā ettha rāgadosānaṃ atidūrabhāvaṃ dassetumpetā vuttāti veditabbā. Etāsu hi sukhaṃ somanassassa paccayo, somanassaṃ rāgassa, dukkhaṃ domanassassa, domanassaṃ dosassa. Sukhādighātena ca te sappaccayā rāgadosā hatāti atidūre hontīti.
不苦不乐:因为完全没有苦,所以是不苦;因为完全没有乐,所以是不乐。这里要表达的是与苦、乐相对立的第三种受,而不只是单纯地“没有苦也没有乐”。这第三种受就叫不苦不乐,也称为舍。应当这样理解它:它的特相是体验那些与可意、不可意相反的对象;它的作用是保持中舍;它的现起是不明显;它的直接原因是乐的灭尽。巴利
Adukkhamasukhanti dukkhābhāvena adukkhaṃ, sukhābhāvena asukhaṃ. Etenettha sukhadukkhapaṭipakkhabhūtaṃ tatiyavedanaṃ dīpeti, na dukkhasukhābhāvamattaṃ. Tatiyavedanā nāma adukkhamasukhā, upekkhātipi vuccati. Sā iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇā, majjhattarasā, avibhūtapaccupaṭṭhānā, sukhanirodhapadaṭṭhānāti veditabbā.
舍念清净,是指由舍所产生的念清净。在这个禅那里,念极其清净,而这份念的清净是由舍造成的,不是由别的什么造成的。所以这就叫作舍念清净。在这里,使念清净的那个舍,从意义上应当理解为中舍性。而且在这里,不只是念依靠它而清净,实际上一切相应的心所法也都是清净的,只是开示时以念为代表来说罢了。巴利
Upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti upekkhāya janitasatipārisuddhiṃ. Imasmiñhi jhāne suparisuddhā sati, yā ca tassā satiyā pārisuddhi, sā upekkhāya katā, na aññena. Tasmā etaṃ ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti vuccati. Yāya ca upekkhāya ettha sati pārisuddhi hoti, sā atthato tatramajjhattatāti veditabbā. Na kevalañcettha tāya satiyeva parisuddhā, api ca kho sabbepi sampayuttadhammā, satisīsena pana desanā vuttā.
在这里,虽然这种舍在下面的三个禅那里也存在,但就像白天的月亮,虽然白天也有,却因为被太阳的光芒压过,又因其温和性或对其自身有助益,而没有同类的夜晚,所以不清净、不皎洁;同样,这种中舍的月亮,在初禅等状态里,被寻等敌对法的力量压过,又没有同类的舍受之夜,所以虽然存在,也不清净。它不清净时,与它同时生起的念等,也像白天不清净的月亮的光一样,同样不清净。因此在那些禅那里,连一个都不能说是“舍念清净”。但在这里,因为没有寻等敌对法的力量压制,又得到了同类的舍受之夜,这种中舍的月亮就极其清净;因为它清净,与它同时生起的念等,也像皎洁月亮的光一样,清净而皎洁。因此应当知道,只有这里才被称为“舍念清净”。第四:按数目顺序,就是第四。这是第四禅的生起,所以称为第四。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpi ayaṃ upekkhā heṭṭhāpi tīsu jhānesu vijjati, yathā pana divā sūriyappabhābhibhavā sommabhāvena ca attano upakārakattena vā sabhāgāya rattiyā alābhā divā vijjamānāpi candalekhā aparisuddhā hoti apariyodātā, evamayampi tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā vitakkādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā apaṭilābhā vijjamānāpi paṭhamajjhānādibhedesu aparisuddhā hoti. Tassā ca aparisuddhāya divā aparisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo aparisuddhāva honti. Tasmā tesu ekampi ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti na vuttaṃ. Idha pana vitakkādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavābhāvā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā paṭilābhā ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā ativiya parisuddhā, tassā parisuddhattā parisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo parisuddhā honti pariyodātā. Tasmā idameva ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Catutthanti gaṇanānupubbatā catutthaṃ. Idaṃ catutthaṃ uppannantipi catutthaṃ.
有慧:因为他有慧,所以叫有慧。趣向生灭:就是既趣向生起也趣向灭尽。具足:就是圆满。圣:就是无过失的。能穿透的:就是属于穿透分的。导向苦尽:就是导向涅槃。对于“这是苦”等,他通过对自性特相的证悟,如实了知、通达:“苦只有这么多,不会超过这个”,从而遍知一切苦谛。对于能产生那苦的渴爱,他了知为“这是苦集”。对于这两者达到灭尽状态、也就是它们不再生起的涅槃,他了知为“这是苦灭”。对于能导致那灭的圣道,他了知为“这是导向苦灭之道”,也同样通过对自性特相的证悟,如实了知、通达。应当这样理解这里的意思。巴利
Paññavā hotīti paññā assa atthīti paññavā. Udayatthagāminiyāti udayagāminiyā ceva atthagāminiyā ca. Samannāgatoti paripuṇṇo. Ariyāyāti niddosāya. Nibbedhikāyāti nibbedhapakkhikāya. Dukkhakkhayagāminiyāti nibbānagāminiyā. So idaṃ dukkhanti evamādīsu ‘‘ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ na ito bhiyyo’’ti sabbampi dukkhasaccaṃ sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti paṭivijjhati. Tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattikaṃ taṇhaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti. Tadubhayampi yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhati, taṃ tesaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’’ti. Tassa ca sampāpakaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti paṭivijjhatīti evamattho veditabbo.
像这样,从自性上说明了诸谛之后,现在又从烦恼的角度,以间接的方式来说明,于是说了“这些是漏”等话。这些应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。像这样说明了三学之后,现在为了说明它们圆满的次第,又说了“作意这三学而学”等话。它的意思是:为了逐一圆满每一学,作意时也在学;作意之后,知道“这就是学”,也在学;知道之后,反复观察,也在学;观察之后,按照所见到的去审察,也在学;审察之后,把心安住在那里不动摇,使它稳固,也在学;依靠与每一种学相应的信、精进、念、定、慧,让它们各自发挥各自的作用,也在学;即使在应当证知而证知的时候,也履行各项该做的事,修学这三学。也就是:修习增上戒,正确地修习增上心,受持并践行增上慧。巴利
Evaṃ sarūpato saccāni dassetvā idāni kilesavasena pariyāyato dassento ‘‘ime āsavā’’tiādimāha. Te vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Evaṃ tisso sikkhāyo dassetvā idāni tāsaṃ pāripūrikkamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imā tisso sikkhāyo āvajjanto sikkheyyā’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – paccekaṃ paripūretuṃ āvajjantopi sikkheyya, āvajjitvāpi ‘‘ayaṃ nāma sikkhā’’ti jānantopi sikkheyya, jānitvā punappunaṃ passantopi sikkheyya, passitvā yathādiṭṭhaṃ paccavekkhantopi sikkheyya, paccavekkhitvā tattheva cittaṃ acalaṃ katvā patiṭṭhapentopi sikkheyya, taṃtaṃsikkhāsampayuttasaddhāvīriyasatisamādhipaññāhi sakasakakiccaṃ karontopi sikkheyya, abhiññeyyābhijānanakālepi taṃ taṃ kiccaṃ karontopi tisso sikkhāyo sikkheyya, adhisīlaṃ ācareyya, adhicittaṃ sammā careyya, adhipaññaṃ samādāya vatteyya.
在此是根本句。用此见等这十个词,说的正是被称为三学的一切知者佛陀的教法。因为这是佛陀世尊所见,所以称为见;以忍受故称为忍;以喜欢故称为喜好;以领受故称为执取;以自性之义称为法;以应当学之义称为律;因为这两者兼具,所以称为法与律;因为它是所宣说的,所以称为教说;因为是最上之行,所以称为梵行;因为给予教导,所以称为导师的教法。因此,在此见等表达中,就是指这个佛陀之见、这个佛陀之忍、这个佛陀之喜好、这个佛陀之执取、这个佛陀之法、这个佛陀之律。巴利
Idhāti mūlapadaṃ. Imissā diṭṭhiyātiādīhi dasahi padehi sikkhattayasaṅkhātaṃ sabbaññubuddhasāsanameva kathitaṃ. Tañhi buddhena bhagavatā diṭṭhattā diṭṭhīti vuccati. Tasseva khamanavasena khanti, ruccanavasena ruci, gahaṇavasena ādāyo, sabhāvaṭṭhena dhammo, sikkhitabbaṭṭhena vinayo, tadubhayenapi dhammavinayo, pavuttavasena pāvacanaṃ, seṭṭhacariyaṭṭhena brahmacariyaṃ, anusiṭṭhidānavasena satthusāsananti vuccati. Tasmā ‘‘imissā diṭṭhiyā’’tiādīsu imissā buddhadiṭṭhiyā imissā buddhakhantiyā imissā buddharuciyā imasmiṃ buddhaādāye imasmiṃ buddhadhamme imasmiṃ buddhavinaye.
乔达弥,如果你知道某些法会导向贪染,而不是导向离贪;会导向结缚,而不是导向解缚;会导向积聚,而不是导向消散;会导向多欲,而不是导向少欲;会导向不知足,而不是导向知足;会导向群聚,而不是导向独处;会导向懈怠,而不是导向精进;会导向难养,而不是导向易养——那么,乔达弥,你就应当毫不犹豫地认定:这不是法,这不是律,这不是导师的教导。巴利
‘‘Ye kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi ‘ime dhammā sarāgāya saṃvattanti, no virāgāya, saññogāya saṃvattanti, no visaññogāya, ācayāya saṃvattanti, no apacayāya, mahicchatāya saṃvattanti, no appicchatāya, asantuṭṭhiyā saṃvattanti, no santuṭṭhiyā, saṅgaṇikāya saṃvattanti , no pavivekāya, kosajjāya saṃvattanti, no vīriyārambhāya, dubbharatāya saṃvattanti, no subharatāyā’ti. Ekaṃsena, gotami, dhāreyyāsi ‘neso dhammo, neso vinayo, netaṃ satthusāsana’nti.
乔达弥,凡是你能知道“这些法导向离贪,不导向贪……导向易养,不导向难养”的,你就应当确定地认定:“这是法,这是律,这是导师的教法。”巴利
‘‘Ye ca kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi ‘ime dhammā virāgāya saṃvattanti, no sarāgāya…pe… subharatāya saṃvattanti, no dubbharatāyā’ti. Ekaṃsena, gotami, dhāreyyāsi ‘eso dhammo, eso vinayo, etaṃ satthusāsana’’’nti (a. ni. 8.53; cūḷava. 406) –
听到这话之后,应当知道它的意思是:在佛陀的法和律中,在佛陀的教说中,在佛陀的清净修行中,在佛陀的教导中。巴利
Evaṃ vutte imasmiṃ buddhadhammavinaye imasmiṃ buddhapāvacane imasmiṃ buddhabrahmacariye imasmiṃ buddhasāsaneti evamattho veditabbo.
而且,这整个以三学为内容的教法,因为是世尊亲见的,又因为是以正见为条件、以正见为先导,所以称为“见”。因为世尊认可接受,所以称为“忍”;因为欢喜,所以称为“喜”;因为执取,所以称为“执”。它能护持修行者,使他不堕入恶道,所以称为“法”。这法又能去除杂染那一类,所以称为“律”。既是法又是律,所以称为“法与律”。或者,以善法来调伏不善法,这就是“法与律”。因此才这样说:巴利
Api cetaṃ sikkhattayasaṅkhātaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ bhagavatā diṭṭhattā sammādiṭṭhipaccayattā sammādiṭṭhipubbaṅgamattā ca diṭṭhi. Bhagavato khamanavasena khanti. Ruccanavasena ruci. Gahaṇavasena ādāyo. Attano kārakaṃ apāyesu apatamānaṃ katvā dhāretīti dhammo. Sova saṃkilesapakkhaṃ vinetīti vinayo. Dhammo ca so vinayo cāti dhammavinayo. Kusaladhammehi vā akusaladhammānaṃ esa vinayoti dhammavinayo. Teneva vuttaṃ –
乔达弥,如果你知道某些法导向离欲,而不是导向贪染……那么,乔达弥,你就应当坚定地认定:这是法,这是律,这是导师的教导。巴利
‘‘Ye ca kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi ‘ime dhammā virāgāya saṃvattanti, no sarāgāya…pe… ekaṃsena gotami dhāreyyāsi ‘eso dhammo, eso vinayo, etaṃ satthusāsana’’’nti (a. ni. 8.53; cūḷava. 406).
以法来调伏,而不是靠棍棒之类来调伏,所以叫“法与律”。关于这一点也有这样的说法:巴利
Dhammena vā vinayo, na daṇḍādīhīti dhammavinayo. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
有些人用棍棒来驯服,有些人用铁钩和鞭子。
那位大仙不用棍棒、不用武器,就调伏了龙象。巴利
‘‘Daṇḍeneke damayanti, aṅkusehi kasāhi ca; Adaṇḍena asatthena, nāgo danto mahesinā’’ti. (cūḷava. 342; ma. ni. 2.352);
对于被如法引导的人来说,明白事理的人有什么好嫉妒的呢?巴利
‘‘Dhammena nīyamānānaṃ, kā usūyā vijānata’’nti. (mahāva. 63);
法的调伏,所以叫“法律”。因为这种调伏是为了法义的无责难,不是为了生存、财富和欲乐这些世间利益。所以世尊说:“比丘们,这梵行不是为了欺诳众人而住的……”(《增支部》4.25,详见该处)。富楼那长老也说:“贤友,在世尊座下,梵行是为了无取著般涅槃而住的。”(《中部》1.259)又因为它能特别地引导,所以叫“律”。从法而来的引导,就是“法律”。因为它正是从轮回之法或忧悲等法中,特别地引导至涅槃。又或者,它是法的引导,不是外道师的引导,所以叫“法律”。因为世尊就是法身,只有他的引导才是法律。巴利
Dhammāya vā vinayo dhammavinayo. Anavajjadhammatthañhesa vinayo, na bhavabhogāmisatthaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘nayidaṃ, bhikkhave, brahmacariyaṃ vussati janakuhanattha’’nti (a. ni. 4.25) vitthāro. Puṇṇattheropi āha ‘‘anupādāparinibbānatthaṃ kho, āvuso, bhagavati brahmacariyaṃ vussatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.259). Visiṭṭhaṃ vā nayatīti vinayo. Dhammato vinayo dhammavinayo. Saṃsāradhammato hi sokādidhammato vā esa visiṭṭhaṃ nibbānaṃ nayati. Dhammassa vā vinayo, na titthakarānanti dhammavinayo. Dhammabhūto hi bhagavā, tasseva vinayo.
或者,因为诸法才是应当被证知、遍知、断除、修习和作证的,所以这是对诸法的调伏,而不是对众生或命者的调伏,因此称为“法与律”。由于具足义理和文句等功德,比其他人的说法更为殊胜,所以称为“胜说”,这胜说本身就是“圣典”。因为在一切修行中属于最殊胜的修行,所以称为“梵行”。因为是天人师——世尊的教法,所以称为“导师的教法”。或者,“成为导师的教法”本身就是“导师的教法”。因为经中说:“在我灭度后,法与律就是你们的导师”(《长部》2.216),这就是说,法与律本身就是导师。这些词句的含义应当这样理解。巴利
Yasmā vā dhammā eva abhiññeyyā pariññeyyā pahātabbā bhāvetabbā sacchikātabbā ca, tasmā esa dhammesu vinayo, na sattesu na jīvesu cāti dhammavinayo. Sātthasabyañjanatādīhi aññesaṃ vacanato padhānaṃ vacananti pavacanaṃ, pavacanameva pāvacanaṃ. Sabbacariyāhi visiṭṭhacariyabhāvena brahmacariyaṃ. Devamanussānaṃ satthubhūtassa bhagavato sāsananti satthusāsanaṃ. Satthubhūtaṃ vā sāsanantipi satthusāsanaṃ. ‘‘So vo mamaccayena satthāti (dī. ni. 2.216) hi dhammavinayova satthā’’ti vuttoti evametesaṃ padānaṃ attho veditabbo.
不过,正因为只有在这样的教法里,才能看到能生起一切种类禅那的比丘,在其他地方则看不到,所以应当知道,各处经文里用“于此教法中”和“在此中”这样的限定,就是根据这一点而定的。巴利
Yasmā pana imasmiṃyeva sāsane sabbappakārajjhānanibbattako bhikkhu dissati, na aññatra, tasmā tattha tattha ‘‘imissā’’ti ca ‘‘imasmi’’nti ca ayaṃ niyamo katoti veditabbo.
诸法依靠它而存活,所以它就叫“命”。它在守护的特相中扮演主导角色,所以叫“根”。命本身就是根,所以叫“命根”。它对生命活动的持续流转起主导作用。不过,从特相等角度来说,命根的特相是守护那些与自己不可分离的诸法,作用是让它们持续运转,现起是让它们维持住,近因是那些应当被维持的诸法。虽然它有守护等这些不同的面向,但它只在自身存在的那个刹那守护那些法,就像水滋养青莲花等一样。对于依各自因缘而生起的诸法,它像乳母保护婴儿那样守护它们;而它自身的运作,则是通过与俱生法的关联来进行,就像舵手驾驶船只一样。它不会在诸法已经坏灭之后还让它们运转,因为那时它自己和那些应被运转的法都已经不存在了。它也不会在坏灭的那个刹那让它们安住,因为它自身正在坏灭,就像灯芯的油逐渐耗尽时还能维持灯焰,但彻底烧尽时就无法维持了。不过,也不能说它完全没有守护、运转和安住的能力,应当这样理解:在上述各个适当的时机,它确实能完成那些作用。或者说,称为“命根”,是因为“住时短暂”,意思是住刹那的微弱和短暂。所谓“微小”,就是微弱、低劣。或者说,因为自性微弱,也就是作为自身之缘的作用和成就的缺乏与薄弱。巴利
Jīvanti tena taṃsampayuttakā dhammāti jīvitaṃ. Anupālanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ. Jīvitameva indriyaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ. Taṃ pavattasantatādhipateyyaṃ hoti. Lakkhaṇādīhi pana attanā avinibhuttānaṃ dhammānaṃ anupālanalakkhaṇaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ, tesaṃ pavattanarasaṃ, tesaṃyeva ṭhapanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, yāpayitabbadhammapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Santepi ca anupālanalakkhaṇādimhi vidhāne atthikkhaṇeyeva taṃ te dhamme anupāleti, udakaṃ viya uppalādīni. Yathāsakaṃ paccayehi uppannepi ca dhamme pāleti, dhāti viya kumāraṃ, sayaṃpavattitadhammasambandheneva ca pavattati, niyāmako viya nāvaṃ. Na bhaṅgato uddhaṃ pavattayati, attano ca pavattayitabbānañca abhāvā. Na bhaṅgakkhaṇe ṭhapeti, sayaṃ bhijjamānattā, khīyamāno viya vaṭṭisineho padīpasikhaṃ, na ca anupālanapavattanaṭṭhapanānubhāvavirahitaṃ , yathāvuttakkhaṇe tassa tassa sādhanatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ṭhitiparittatāya vāti ṭhitikkhaṇassa mandatāya thokatāya. Appakanti mandaṃ lāmakaṃ. Sarasaparittatāya vāti attano paccayabhūtānaṃ kiccānaṃ sampattīnaṃ vā appatāya dubbalatāya.
为了说明这两种原因的区别,接着说了“如何以住时短促……”等话。这里应当理解:在五蕴有的生命流转中,当心灭去的时刻,一切色法和非色法虽然都还没有灭,但这是就非色法的命根作为色法的前提来说的;或者,是就五蕴有中与死心一起、一切色法和非色法都灭去的情况,针对死心来说的;而在四蕴有中,因为没有色法,所以是针对四蕴有来说的。所谓“在过去的心刹那”,是指具足过去心的坏灭刹那的那个时候,具足那个心的人可以说“曾活过”,不能说“活着”,也不能说“将会活着”。所谓“在未来的心刹那,将会活着”,是指具足未来心尚未生起的那个刹那的时候,可以说“将会活着”,不能说“活着”,也不能说“曾活过”。所谓“在现在的心刹那”,是指具足现在心刹那的时候,可以说“活着”,也就是现在活着,不能说“曾活过”,也不能说“将会活着”。巴利
Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ kāraṇaṃ vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘kathaṃ ṭhitiparittatāyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘atīte cittakkhaṇe jīvitthāti evamādi pañcavokārabhave pavattiyaṃ cittassa nirujjhanakāle sabbasmiṃ rūpārūpadhamme anirujjhantepi rūpato arūpassa paṭṭhānabhāvena arūpajīvitaṃ sandhāya, cuticittena vā saddhiṃ sabbesaṃ rūpārūpānaṃ nirujjhanabhāvena pañcavokārabhave cuticittaṃ sandhāya, catuvokārabhave rūpassa abhāvena catuvokārabhavaṃ sandhāya kathita’’nti veditabbaṃ. Atīte cittakkhaṇeti atītacittassa bhaṅgakkhaṇasamaṅgīkāle taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo ‘‘jīvittha’’ iti vattuṃ labbhati. Na jīvatīti ‘‘jīvatī’’tipi vattuṃ na labbhati. Na jīvissatīti ‘‘jīvissatī’’tipi vattuṃ na labbhati. Anāgate cittakkhaṇe jīvissatīti anāgatacittassa anuppajjanakkhaṇasamaṅgīkāle ‘‘jīvissatī’’ti vattuṃ labbhati. Na jīvatīti ‘‘jīvatī’’ti vattuṃ na labbhati. Na jīvitthāti ‘‘jīvittha’’itipi vattuṃ na labbhati. Paccuppanne cittakkhaṇeti paccuppannacittakkhaṇasamaṅgīkāle. Jīvatīti ‘‘idāni jīvatī’’ti vattuṃ labbhati. Na jīvitthāti ‘‘jīvittha’’iti vattuṃ na labbhati. Na jīvissatīti ‘‘jīvissatī’’tipi vattuṃ na labbhati.
“有生命与身体,以及苦与乐”这首偈颂,应当理解为:它是针对五蕴有而说的,因为只有在不脱离五蕴有的情况下,才能执取到苦受。怎么理解呢?“生命”,是以生命为首来指行蕴。“身体”,是指色蕴。由于《分别论注》中说“舍受因寂静,故说为乐”,所以“苦与乐”是包含了舍受在内的受蕴;“心”则是识蕴。既然已经说了这四蕴,那么依诸蕴以同一相为特征之理,从特征行相的角度来说,想蕴也应当被认为已经说到了。在这样说的五蕴当中,非色法不舍弃由业等所生的色法,而以色法不转起,并与同一心相应——这就说明了以非色法为主导的道理。怎么讲?在无想有情中,色法也依在此处所累积的业力,不捨离地继续生起;入灭尽定者的色法,也依先前入初禅的定力,不捨离地继续生起。如此,即使在自身不生起之处,色法仍作为属于自己的而持续生起;而对于具有“在自己生起之处就能生起”这一性质的非色法来说,它正是色法得以生起的主要原因,所以说“与同一心相应”——应当知道,这就是阐明了以心为主导的道理。巴利
Jīvitaṃattabhāvo ca sukhadukkhā cāti ayaṃ gāthā pañcavokārabhavaṃ amuñcitvā labbhamānāya dukkhāya vedanāya gahitattā pañcavokārabhavameva sandhāya vuttāti veditabbā. Kathaṃ? Jīvitanti jīvitasīsena saṅkhārakkhandho. Attabhāvoti rūpakkhandho. ‘‘Upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 232) vuttattā upekkhāvedanā antokaritvā sukhadukkhā cāti vedanākkhandho, cittaṃ iti viññāṇakkhandho vutto. Imesaṃ catunnaṃ khandhānaṃ kathitattāyeva khandhalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇabhāvena lakkhaṇākāravasena saññākkhandhopi kathitoti veditabbo. Evaṃ vuttesu pañcasu khandhesu arūpadhammaṃ muñcitvā kammasamuṭṭhānādirūpassa appavattanabhāvena ekacittasamāyuttāti arūpapadhānabhāvo kathito hoti. Kathaṃ? Asaññasatte rūpampi idhupacitakammabalaṃ amuñcitvāva pavattati, nirodhasamāpannānaṃ rūpampi paṭhamasamāpannasamāpattibalaṃ amuñcitvāva pavattati. Evaṃ attano appavattiṭṭhānepi rūpapavattiṃ attano santakameva katvā pavattanasabhāvassa arūpadhammassa attano pavattiṭṭhāne rūpapavattiyā padhānakāraṇabhāvena ekacittasamāyuttāti cittapadhānabhāvo kathitoti veditabbo.
在五蕴有中,当作为色法生起的主导心灭去时,即使色法还在持续,那些正在生起的法也叫做“灭”——所以这里是就非色法而说“刹那轻快地流转”。或者应当知道,这是针对五蕴有中的死心而说的。这样解说时,“苦与乐”指身体的乐受、心的乐受,以及身体的苦受、心的苦受;虽然它们在死心那一刹那并不存在,但依同一相续,与死心一起灭去,所以这样说。也应当知道,这是就四蕴有而说的。怎么理解呢?因为在别处,“躯体”被用作想蕴的表述,所以这里的“躯体”就是指想蕴。在梵天界,虽然没有身体的乐、苦和忧,但以受的通称来说,可以归入受蕴,因此用“苦与乐”来表示,应当这样理解。其余部分和前面说的一样。在这三种解释中,“唯”是指没有恒常、乐、净、我,纯粹不被这些所混杂。“刹那轻快地流转”:按照前面所说的方式,因为只有一个心识刹那,所以生命等现象的刹那被说为轻快、极为短暂,就这样流转着。巴利
Evaṃ pañcavokārabhave pavattiyaṃ rūpapavattiyā padhānabhūtacittanirodhena rūpe dharamāneyeva pavattānaṃ nirodho nāma hotīti arūpadhammavasena eva ‘‘lahuso vattate khaṇo’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā pañcavokārabhave cuticittaṃ sandhāya kathitāti veditabbā. Evaṃ kathiyamāne sukhadukkhā cāti kāyikacetasikasukhavedanā ca kāyikacetasikadukkhavedanā ca cuticittakkhaṇe ahontīpi ekasantativasena cuticittena saddhiṃ nirujjhatīti kathitā. Catuvokārabhavaṃ vā sandhāya kathitātipi veditabbā. Kathaṃ ? Aññasmiṃ ṭhāne attabhāvoti saññākkhandhassa vuttabhāvena attabhāvoti saññākkhandhova gahito. Brahmaloke kāyikasukhadukkhadomanassaṃ ahontampi sukhadukkhā cāti vedanāsāmaññato labbhamāno vedanākkhandho gahitoti veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttasadisameva. Imesu ca tīsu vikappesu kevalāti dhuvasukhasubhaattā natthi, kevalaṃ tehi avomissā. Lahuso vattati khaṇoti vuttanayena ekacittakkhaṇikatāya lahuko atiparitto jīvitādīnaṃ khaṇo vattati.
为了说明两种心不会同时生起,而说了这首偈颂:“八万四千……”这首偈颂说“八万四千劫,那些阿修罗和天众安住”:意思是那些阿修罗和天众住于八万四千劫的寿命,安住在非想非非想处。巴利文本中也作“那些人”。然而,他们也不是以两种心同时活着——那些天人也并非以两种心合为一体、像双头并行的情形那样活着,而是以一种心接着一种心相续不断地活着,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Ekato dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ appavattiṃ dassento ‘‘cullāsītisahassānī’’ti gāthamāha. Cullāsītisahassāni, kappā tiṭṭhanti ye marūti ye devagaṇā caturāsīti kappasahassāni āyuṃ gahetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatane tiṭṭhanti. ‘‘Ye narā’’tipi pāḷi. Na tveva tepi jīvanti, dvīhi cittasamohitāti tepi devā dvīhi cittehi samohitā ekato hutvā yuganaddhena cittena na tu eva jīvanti, ekenekena cittena jīvantīti attho.
现在为了说明临终的时刻,而说了这偈颂:“那些已灭的”。其中,“那些已灭的”是指那些已经灭去、已经消逝的诸蕴。“临死者的”是指死者的。“或者还活着的”是指仍然存在的。一切蕴都相似:无论是死后已灭的蕴,还是生命过程中已灭的蕴,由于都不可能再重新组合起来,从这个意义上说,一切蕴都是相似的。“已去而无结生”:已灭的诸蕴因为不会再回来结生,所以称为“已去而无结生”。巴利
Idāni maraṇakālaṃ dassento ‘‘ye niruddhā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha ye niruddhāti ye khandhā niruddhā atthaṅgatā. Marantassāti matassa. Tiṭṭhamānassa vāti dharamānassa vā. Sabbepi sadisā khandhāti cutito uddhaṃ niruddhakkhandhā vā pavatte niruddhakkhandhā vā puna ghaṭetuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṭṭhena sabbepi khandhā sadisā. Gatā appaṭisandhikāti niruddhakkhandhānaṃ puna āgantvā paṭisandhānābhāvena gatā appaṭisandhikāti vuccanti.
现在,为了说明在三个时段的已灭诸蕴并没有多样性,而说了“无间”这个偈颂。其中,“无间已坏者,以及未来当坏者”:是指那些已成为无间过去而坏灭、已灭的蕴,以及那些未来将会坏灭的蕴。“其间”:是指在它们之间已灭的现在诸蕴。“于相无不平”:不平的状态就是“不平”,这里说没有那种不平,意思是它们之间没有差异。“相”:是指能被认知的特征,在那种特征上。巴利
Idāni tīsu kālesu niruddhakkhandhānaṃ nānattaṃ natthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘anantarā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha anantarā ca ye bhaggā, ye ca bhaggā anāgatāti ye khandhā anantarātītā hutvā bhinnā niruddhā, ye ca anāgatā khandhā bhijjissanti. Tadantareti tesaṃ antare niruddhānaṃ paccuppannakhandhānaṃ. Vesamaṃ natthi lakkhaṇeti visamassa bhāvo vesamaṃ, taṃ vesamaṃ natthi, tehi nānattaṃ natthīti attho. Lakkhīyatīti lakkhaṇaṃ, tasmiṃ lakkhaṇe.
现在,为了说明未来诸蕴与现在诸蕴互不混杂,而说了这首偈颂:“未生者不成。”所谓“未生者不成”,是说依那个未生起、未显现的未来诸蕴,不能说它“已生”、不能说它“已产生”。通过这句话,说明了未来诸蕴与现在诸蕴互不混杂。“以现在者活命”,是依那属于刹那现在的、正在现前的诸蕴而活命。通过这句话,说明并不是在同一刹那以两个心识活命。“由心坏灭而死”,是因为在同一刹那不能以两个心识活命,所以死就是心的坏灭。巴利文本也作“由心坏灭以上”,这个读法更直接。“施设是究竟义的”,按照“凡人的色会衰老,名姓不会衰老”这样的说法次第,那仅仅是施设,并不具有衰老的本性;而它以其真实自性而安住,这就是“究竟义”,意思是依自性而安住。因为像“达多死了、弥多死了”这样的说法,确实只是施设层面上的存续。或者也可以说,“究竟义的”就是究竟的;最上的意义属于它,所以叫究竟的。“譬如未生的虚空”,就如同依不存在的事物来言说一样,说“死”并不是依“人”这个不存在的施设而说,而是依名为命根坏灭的真实法而说。巴利
Idāni anāgatakkhandhānaṃ vattamānakkhandhehi asammissabhāvaṃ kathento ‘‘anibbattena na jāto’’ti gāthamāha. Anibbattena na jātoti ajātena apātubhūtena anāgatakkhandhena na jāto na nibbatto. Etena anāgatakkhandhassa vattamānakkhandhena asammissabhāvaṃ kathesi. Paccuppannena jīvatīti khaṇapaccuppannena vattamānakkhandhena jīvati. Etena ekakkhaṇe dvīhi cittehi na jīvatīti kathitaṃ. Cittabhaggā matoti dvīhi cittehi ekakkhaṇe ajīvanabhāvena cittabhaṅgena mato. ‘‘Uparito cittabhaṅgā’’tipi pāḷi, taṃ ujukameva. Paññatti paramatthiyāti ‘‘rūpaṃ jīrati maccānaṃ, nāmagottaṃ na jīratī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.76) vacanakkamena paṇṇattimattaṃ na jīraṇasabhāvena paramā ṭhiti etissāti paramatthiyā, sabhāvaṭṭhitikāti attho. ‘‘Datto mato, mitto mato’’ti paṇṇattimattameva hi tiṭṭhati. Atha vā paramatthiyāti paramatthikā. Paramo attho etissāti paramatthikā. Ajaṭākāsoti paññattiyā natthidhammaṃ paṭicca kathanaṃ viya matoti paññatti natthidhammaṃ paṭicca na kathiyati, jīvitindriyabhaṅgasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca kathiyati.
那些已经坏灭的蕴,不会去到任何存放、安置、积攒的地方,所以叫“不往藏处”。未来也没有它们的堆积,也就是说,在未来它们同样没有堆聚、积聚的状态。只有已经生起的,才在当下住立——按现在来说,已经生起的法在住立的那个刹那,只是作为具有坏灭性质的法而住立。那像什么呢?就像放在针尖上的芥子一样。巴利
Anidhānagatābhaggāti ye khandhā bhinnā, te nidhānaṃ nihitaṃ nicayaṃ na gacchantīti anidhānagatā. Puñjo natthi anāgateti anāgatepi nesaṃ puñjabhāvo rāsibhāvo natthi. Nibbattāyeva tiṭṭhantīti paccuppannavasena uppannā ṭhitikkhaṇe vayadhammāva hutvā tiṭṭhanti. Kimiva? Āragge sāsapūpamāti sūcimukhe sāsapo viya.
现在,为了说明诸蕴可见的状态,而说这偈颂:“已生……”等等。在这里,“已生之法”指现在的诸蕴。“它们的坏灭在前”指把它们的坏灭放在前面,即置于前导。“衰坏法”指本性就是坏灭。“不被先者所摄”指不被先前已生的诸蕴所混合、不相掺杂。巴利
Idāni khandhānaṃ dassanabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘nibbattāna’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha nibbattānaṃ dhammānanti paccuppannānaṃ khandhānaṃ. Bhaṅgo nesaṃ purakkhatoti etesaṃ bhedo purato katvā ṭhapito. Palokadhammāti nassanasabhāvā. Purāṇehi adhissitāti pure uppannehi khandhehi na missitā na saṃsaggā.
现在,为了说明诸蕴不可见的状态,说了这首偈颂:“从不可见而来。”其中,“从不可见而来”是说:它们正是在不被看见的情况下到来、生起。“坏灭而去,见不到”是说:坏灭之后,就进入不可见的状态。“如空中闪电出现”是说:就像在开阔的天空中,闪电的光束闪现一样。“生起又消逝”是说:从过去际之后,它们生起又坏灭,也就是消失的意思。就像“月亮升起、圆满、亏缺”这类说法中的用法一样。巴利
Idāni khandhānaṃ adassanabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘adassanato āyantī’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha adassanato āyantīti adissamānāyeva āgacchanti uppajjanti. Bhaṅgā gacchantidassananti bhedā bhaṅgato uddhaṃ adassanabhāvaṃ gacchanti. Vijjuppādova ākāseti vivaṭākāse vijjulatāniccharaṇaṃ viya. Uppajjanti vayanti cāti pubbantato uddhaṃ uppajjanti ca bhijjanti ca, nassantīti attho. ‘‘Udeti āpūrati veti cando’’ti (jā. 1.5.3) evamādīsu viya.
这样说明了寿在“住立”方面的微细之后,现在要说明它在“自性”方面的微细,于是说:“如何以自性之微细……”等等。在这里,依入息而系缚的命,是指系缚于进入体内的鼻风的命根。出息,是指向外呼出的鼻风。入出息,是指这两者的合称。依大种而系缚的命,是指系缚于地、水、火、风四大种的命,这些大种由四种来源产生。依抟食而系缚的命,是指系缚于所食、所饮等抟食的命。依暖而系缚的命,是指系缚于业所生火界的命。依识而系缚的命,是指系缚于有分识的命。关于这一点,曾这样说:“寿、暖与识,当它们舍弃身体时。”巴利
Evaṃ ṭhitiparittataṃ dassetvā idāni sarasaparittataṃ dassento ‘‘kathaṃ sarasaparittatāyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha assāsūpanibandhaṃ jīvitanti abbhantarapavisananāsikavātapaṭibaddhaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ. Passāsoti bahinikkhamananāsikavāto. Assāsapassāsoti tadubhayaṃ. Mahābhūtūpanibandhanti catusamuṭṭhānikānaṃ pathavīāpatejavāyānaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ paṭibaddhaṃ jīvitaṃ. Kabaḷīkārāhārūpanibandhanti asitapītādikabaḷīkāraāhārena upanibandhaṃ. Usmūpanibandhanti kammajatejodhātūpanibandhaṃ. Viññāṇūpanibandhanti bhavaṅgaviññāṇūpanibandhaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘āyu usmā ca viññāṇaṃ, yadā kāyaṃ jahantima’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.95).
现在,为了说明这些(入出息等)虚弱的原因,说了“这些的根也是虚弱的”等话。其中,“根也是”:从作为立足点的意义上说,也是根本。因为对于入出息来说,业生身是根本;对于大种等来说,无明、业、渴爱和食是根本。“这些的”:指前面所说的入出息等,它们是按命根得以运转的原因来说的。因为在它们当中,只要缺少任何一个,命根就无法维持。“虚弱的”:就是力量微弱。“前因也是”:在过去生中,作为这个异熟轮回之因的、被称为原因的無明、行、渴爱、取、有,也是(这些的根)。“这些的虚弱的”:凡是这些的缘,它们也是虚弱的,即指作为所缘等共同缘的(诸法)。“能生的”:成为主要的而生起的,是有的渴爱。“俱生的”:也是俱生的色法与无色法。“相应的”:也是结合在一起的诸无色法。“俱起的”:也是在同一个心中一起生起的。“凡是所作的”:从死与结生的意义上说,为了连接而受任用的,是所作的,即以轮回为根的渴爱。这确实说过:“以渴爱为第二的人。”“恒常虚弱的”:不间断地虚弱。“不停止的”:不停止,即进入后不停住。“使堕落”:这些使彼此堕落、令衰败。“互相的”:一个对一个,即一个对另一个之义。“Hi”:是表示原因的小词。“没有保护者”:没有保护者、守护者。“也不能互相建立”:不能互相建立。凡是能产生它们的那个法,它现在也不存在。巴利
Idāni nesaṃ dubbalakāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘mūlampi imesaṃ dubbala’’ntiādimāha. Tattha mūlampīti patiṭṭhaṭṭhena mūlabhūtampi. Assāsapassāsānañhi karajakāyo mūlaṃ. Mahābhūtādīnaṃ avijjākammataṇhāhārā. Imesanti vuttappakārānaṃ assāsādīnaṃ jīvitindriyapavattikāraṇavasena vuttānaṃ. Etesu hi ekekasmiṃ asati jīvitindriyaṃ na tiṭṭhati. Dubbalanti appathāmaṃ. Pubbahetūpīti atītajātiyaṃ imassa vipākavaṭṭassa hetubhūtā kāraṇasaṅkhātā avijjāsaṅkhārataṇhupādānabhavāpi. Imesaṃ dubbalā ye paccayā tepi dubbalāti ye ārammaṇādisādhāraṇapaccayā. Pabhāvikāti padhānaṃ hutvā uppādikā bhavataṇhā. Sahabhūmīti sahabhavikāpi rūpārūpadhammā. Sampayogāpīti ekato yuttāpi arūpadhammā. Sahajāpīti saddhiṃ ekacitte uppannāpi. Yāpi payojikāti cutipaṭisandhivasena yojetuṃ niyuttāti payojikā, vaṭṭamūlakā taṇhā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘taṇhādutiyo puriso’’ti (itivu. 15, 105). Niccadubbalāti nirantarena dubbalā. Anavaṭṭhitāti na avaṭṭhitā, otaritvā na ṭhitā. Paripātayanti imeti ime aññamaññaṃ pātayanti khepayanti. Aññamaññassāti añño aññassa, eko ekassāti attho. Hi-iti kāraṇatthe nipāto. Natthi tāyitāti tāyano rakkhako natthi. Na cāpi ṭhapenti aññamaññanti aññe aññaṃ ṭhapetuṃ na sakkonti. Yopinibbattako so na vijjatīti yopi imesaṃ uppādako dhammo, so idāni natthi.
没有任何一者会因为任何一者而减损:没有任何一个,会凭借另一个而减损。而这些就像乾闼婆一样,一切皆:因为所有这些蕴,都必定在一切方面走向坏灭。这些由前者所生:指这些现在正在生起的法,是由过去的因缘所生。那些能生的也是:那些使这些现在生起的法得以生起的过去因缘,它们先前就已死灭:那些所说的因缘,尚未到达现在就已首先达到了死亡。前面的以及后面的也是:指作为前因缘的,以及后面由缘所生的法,彼此在任何时候都不曾见过:在任何时候,它们彼此之间都从未被见过。这里的“ma”是为了词句连接而说的。巴利
Na ca kenaci koci hāyatīti koci ekopi kassaci vasena na parihāyati. Gandhabbā ca ime hi sabbasoti sabbe hi ime khandhā sabbākārena bhaṅgaṃ pāpuṇituṃ yuttā. Purimehi pabhāvitā imeti pubbahetupaccayehi ime vattamānakā uppādikā. Yepi pabhāvikāti yepi ime vattamānakā uppādakā pubbahetupaccayā. Te pure matāti te vuttappakārapaccayā vattamānaṃ apāpuṇitvā paṭhamameva maraṇaṃ pattā. Purimāpi ca pacchimāpi cāti purimā pubbahetupaccayāpi ca pacchimā vattamāne paccayasamuppannā ca. Aññamaññaṃ na kadāci maddasaṃsūti aññamaññaṃ kismiñci kāle na diṭṭhapubbā. Ma-kāro padasandhivasena vutto.
所谓“四大王天的天神们”,是指持国、增长、广目、俱毗罗这四位大王,他们是这些天众的主宰,所以叫“四大王天”。以种种色欲等享乐而游戏嬉戏的,就是“天”。他们住在须弥山的中间。他们当中,有的住在山上,有的住在虚空中。他们的相续一直延伸到轮围山。嬉戏放逸天、意忿放逸天、寒云天、热云天、月天子、日天子——所有这些,都只是住在四大王天界里的天神,他们的寿命就是那样。“执取”就是缘于。“少许”是对多的否定。“短暂”指时间很短,是对持续长日的否定。“刹那”指极短的时间,是对时间间隔的否定。“轻快”指非常轻快,是对缓慢的否定。“其他的”是对强力迅速的否定。“不能经久的”指从时间上说不能承受久远。“不长久住立的”指不能持续许多天而长久安住,所以叫不长久住立,这是对日数的否定。巴利
Cātumahārājikānaṃ devānanti dhataraṭṭhavirūḷhakavirūpakkhakuverasaṅkhātā catumahārājā issarā etesanti cātumahārājikā. Rūpādīhi dibbanti kīḷantīti devā. Te sinerupabbatassa vemajjhe honti. Tesu atthi pabbataṭṭhakāpi, atthi ākāsaṭṭhakāpi. Tesaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ pattā. Khiḍḍāpadosikā manopadosikā sītavalāhakā uṇhavalāhakā candimā devaputto sūriyo devaputtoti ete sabbepi cātumahārājikadevalokaṭṭhā eva tesaṃ cātumahārājikānaṃ jīvitaṃ. Upādāyāti paṭicca. Parittakanti vuddhipaṭisedho. Thokanti mandakālaṃ, dīghadivasapaṭisedho. Khaṇikanti mandakālaṃ, kālantarapaṭisedho. Lahukanti sallahukaṃ, alasapaṭisedho. Itaranti sīghabalavapaṭisedho . Anaddhanīyanti kālavasena na addhānakkhamaṃ. Naciraṭṭhitikanti divasena ciraṃ na tiṭṭhatīti naciraṭṭhitikaṃ, divasapaṭisedho.
三十三天:有三十三个人生在那里,所以叫三十三天。不过也有另一种说法:三十三天只是那些天神的名称而已。他们当中,有的住在山上,有的住在虚空中,他们的相续一直延伸到轮围山。夜摩天等也是这样。其实在任何一个天界里,都不存在天神的相续达不到轮围山的情况。已经享受到天乐、达到天乐的,叫夜摩天。满足、欢喜的,叫兜率天。对自然呈现的所缘,在想要格外变化出更殊胜事物的时候,随自己的喜好变化出各种享乐并乐在其中的,叫化乐天。能知道他人的心思活动,在别人变化出来的享乐中行使自在支配的,叫他化自在天。在梵众之中被安排为梵众的,叫梵身天。这里把所有具有五蕴的梵天都包括进去了。巴利
Tāvatiṃsānanti tettiṃsajanā tattha upapannāti tāvatiṃsā. Api ca tāvatiṃsāti tesaṃ devānaṃ nāmamevātipi vuttaṃ. Tepi atthi pabbataṭṭhakā, atthi ākāsaṭṭhakā, tesaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ pattā. Tathā yāmādīnaṃ. Ekadevalokepi hi devānaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ appattā nāma natthi. Dibbasukhaṃ yātā payātā sampattāti yāmā. Tuṭṭhā pahaṭṭhāti tusitā. Pakatipaṭiyattārammaṇato atirekena nimmitukāmakāle yathārucite bhoge nimminitvā ramantīti nimmānaratī. Cittācāraṃ ñatvā parehi nimmitesu bhogesu vasaṃ vattentīti paranimmitavasavattī. Brahmakāye brahmaghaṭāya niyuttāti brahmakāyikā. Sabbepi pañcavokārabrahmāno gahitā.
“去者”就是乾闼婆。“他世”就是另一个世界。比丘们,所谓“长久活着”,就是能长久住立的人,他住立的时间不过百年左右。“或者更少或更多”:超过百岁而住立、住立两百岁的人,是不存在的。“他应轻蔑它”:他应轻视这个生命,把它看作低劣。也有人读作“hīḷeyyāna”。“越过”:就是超越。“日夜”:就是一日一夜的区分。“被灭尽”:命根灭去,进入不存在。“众生的寿被耗尽”:有情的寿行走向耗尽。“犹如小河之水”:就像一条水已断绝的小河里的水,同样,众生的寿也被耗尽。因为从究竟意义上说,众生的生命刹那极其短暂,仅仅是一个心识刹那而已。正如车轮转动时,只靠轮辋的一部分在转动,停住时也只靠一部分停住;同样,众生的生命只有一个心识刹那。当那个心识灭去时,众生就被称为灭去。巴利
Gamaniyoti gandhabbo. Samparāyoti paraloko. Yo bhikkhave ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasatanti yo ciraṃ tiṭṭhamāno, so vassasatamattaṃ tiṭṭhati. Appaṃ vā bhiyyoti vassasatato upari tiṭṭhamāno dve vassasatāni tiṭṭhamāno nāma natthi. Hīḷeyya nanti naṃ jīvitaṃ avaññātaṃ kareyya, lāmakato cinteyya. ‘‘Hīḷeyyāna’’nti ca paṭhanti. Accayantīti atikkamanti. Ahorattāti rattindivaparicchedā. Uparujjhatīti jīvitindriyaṃ nirujjhati, abhāvaṃ upagacchati. Āyu khiyyati maccānanti sattānaṃ āyusaṅkhāro khayaṃ yāti. Kunnadīnaṃva odakanti yathā udakacchinnāya kunnadiyā udakaṃ, evaṃ maccānaṃ āyu khiyyati. Paramatthato hi atiparitto sattānaṃ jīvitakkhaṇo ekacittakkhaṇikamattoyeva. Yathā nāma rathacakkaṃ pavattamānampi ekeneva nemipadesena pavattati, tiṭṭhamānampi ekeneva tiṭṭhati, evameva ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ tasmiṃ citte niruddhamatte satto niruddhoti vuccati.
贤者,就是贤者。又说贤者,指的是智者。具慧者,是因为他有慧,所以叫具慧者。具足慧,就是具备贤智。已除恶者,就是已舍弃被呵责的恶。为了说明这个同义词,接着说了“dhī被称为慧”等话。其中,“它了知”,所以叫慧。了知什么?以“这是苦”这样的方式了知四圣谛。不过义注里说:“以令知为慧。”它令知什么?它令知“无常、苦、无我”。这个慧,因为能制伏无明,从增上的意义说是根;或者以见为特相,起主宰的作用,所以也是根。慧本身就是根,就是慧根。而这个慧以照明为特相,也以了知为特相。就像四面有墙的屋子里,夜里点起灯,黑暗就消失,光明显现;同样,慧以照明为特相。没有什么光明能比得上慧的光明。因为有慧的人结跏趺坐时,一万个世界都成了一片光明。因此长老说——巴利
Dhīrāti dhīrā iti. Puna dhīrāti paṇḍitā. Dhitimāti dhiti assa atthīti dhitimā. Dhitisampannāti paṇḍiccena samannāgatā. Dhīkatapāpāti garahitapāpā. Taṃyeva pariyāyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dhī vuccati paññā’’tiādimāha. Tattha pajānātīti paññā. Kiṃ pajānāti? ‘‘Idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā nayena ariyasaccāni. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘paññāpanavasena paññā’’ti vuttā. Kinti paññāpeti? ‘‘Aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti paññāpeti. Sāva avijjāya abhibhavanato adhipatiyaṭṭhena indriyaṃ, dassanalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretītipi indriyaṃ, paññāva indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Sā panesā obhāsanalakkhaṇā, pajānanalakkhaṇā ca; yathā hi catubhittike gehe rattibhāge dīpe jalite andhakāraṃ nirujjhati, āloko pātubhavati, evameva obhāsanalakkhaṇā paññā. Paññobhāsasamo obhāso nāma natthi. Paññavato hi ekapallaṅkena nisinnassa dasasahassilokadhātu ekālokā hoti. Tenāha thero –
大王,就像有人把一盏油灯拿进漆黑的屋子,灯一进去,就驱散了黑暗,带来光亮,放出光明,让各种东西都看得清清楚楚;同样地,大王,慧生起的时候,就驱散无明的黑暗,带来光明,放出智慧之光,让四圣谛清清楚楚地显现出来。大王,慧就是以照明为它的特征。巴利
‘‘Yathā, mahārāja, puriso andhakāre gehe telappadīpaṃ paveseyya, paviṭṭho padīpo andhakāraṃ viddhaṃseti, obhāsaṃ janeti, ālokaṃ vidaṃseti, pākaṭāni ca rūpāni karoti; evameva kho, mahārāja, paññā uppajjamānā avijjandhakāraṃ viddhaṃseti, vijjobhāsaṃ janeti, ñāṇālokaṃ vidaṃseti, pākaṭāni ariyasaccāni karoti. Evaṃ kho, mahārāja, obhāsanalakkhaṇā paññā’’ti (mi. pa. 2.1.15).
就像一位善巧的医生,能分辨病人适合与不适合的食物等;同样,慧生起时,能清楚地了知善与不善、应修与不应修、低劣与殊胜、黑与白、有对应与无对应的诸法。关于这一点,法将舍利弗也说过:“贤友,因为‘它了知,它了知’,所以称为有慧者。了知什么呢?了知‘这是苦’……”(《中部》1.449)应当详细展开。如此,应当知道慧就是以了知为特相。巴利
Yathā pana cheko bhisakko āturānaṃ sappāyāsappāyāni bhojanādīni jānāti, evaṃ paññā uppajjamānā kusalākusale sevitabbāsevitabbe hīnappaṇītakaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgaappaṭibhāge dhamme pajānāti. Vuttampi cetaṃ dhammasenāpatinā ‘‘pajānāti pajānātīti kho, āvuso, tasmā paññavāti vuccati. Kiñca pajānāti? Idaṃ dukkhanti pajānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.449) vitthāretabbaṃ. Evamassā pajānanalakkhaṇatā veditabbā.
另一种说法是:慧以如实通达自性为特相,或者以无偏差地通达为特相,就像善巧的射手一箭射中目标一样。它的作用是照亮所缘,就像灯一样。它表现为不迷乱,就像熟悉森林的人做向导一样。巴利
Aparo nayo – yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā paññā, akkhalitapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā vā, kusalissāsakhittausupaṭivedho viya. Visayobhāsarasā, padīpo viya. Asammohapaccupaṭṭhānā, araññagatasudesako viya.
“蕴慧者”是指在五蕴中运用智慧的人。“界慧者”是指在十八界中运用智慧的人。其余的词也应当按这个方式理解。“这些智者这样说”意思是这些有智慧的人这样讲。“讲”是说“极少、微少”。“说”是说“一点点、刹那”。“宣示”是说“轻、短暂”。“言说”是用种种方式说“不长久、不能久住”。巴利
Khandhadhīrāti pañcasu khandhesuñāṇaṃ pavattentīti khandhadhīrā. Aṭṭhārasasu dhātūsu ñāṇaṃ pavattentīti dhātudhīrā. Sesesupi iminā nayena attho netabbo. Te dhīrā evamāhaṃsūti ete paṇḍitā evaṃ kathayiṃsu. Kathentīti ‘‘appakaṃ parittaka’’nti kathayanti. Bhaṇantīti ‘‘thokaṃ khaṇika’’nti bhāsanti. Dīpayantīti ‘‘lahukaṃ ittara’’nti patiṭṭhapenti. Voharantīti ‘‘anaddhanikaṃ naciraṭṭhitika’’nti nānāvidhena byavaharanti.
11 现在,为了说明那些不这样做的人会遭遇什么灾祸,说了“我看见”这首偈颂。其中,“我看见”是指用肉眼等来看。“世间”是指地狱等恶趣。“挣扎颤动”是指从这里到那里不停地颤动。“这些众生”是指这群有情。“被渴爱所控制”的意思是被渴爱征服、击倒。“在有中”是指在欲有等生存状态中。“卑下的人”是指行为卑下的人。“在死门口悲叹”是指临死时在死亡面前哀泣。“未离渴爱者”是指还没有离开渴爱。“有”是指欲有等。“在有中”是指在欲有等中。或者说,“在有有中”是指在种种有中,也就是一再、反复的生存。巴利
11. Idāni ye tathā na karonti, tesaṃ byasanuppattiṃ dassento ‘‘passāmī’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha passāmīti maṃsacakkhuādīhi pekkhāmi. Loketi apāyādimhi. Pariphandamānanti ito cito ca phandamānaṃ. Pajaṃ imanti imaṃ sattakāyaṃ. Taṇhāgatanti taṇhāya gataṃ abhibhūtaṃ nipātitanti adhippāyo. Bhavesūti kāmabhavādīsu. Hīnā narāti hīnakammantā narā. Maccumukhe lapantīti antakāle sampatte maraṇamukhe paridevanti. Avītataṇhāseti avigatataṇhā. Bhavāti kāmabhavādikā. Bhavesūti kāmabhavādikesu. Atha vā bhavābhavesūti bhavabhavesu, punappunabhavesūti vuttaṃ hoti.
“我看见”是指我也用肉眼看。肉眼有两种:带资具的眼和净色眼。其中,位于眼眶里,下方以眼眶骨为界,上方以眉骨为界,两侧以眼角为界,外面以睫毛为界,由穿过眼眶中央的筋腱连着脑,带有黑白分明的圆斑,这个肉团就叫带资具的眼。而在这个肉团中依止、系属,由四大所生的净色,就叫净色眼。这里指的是净色眼。这个净色眼位于带资具的眼当中,处在白色圆环围绕的黑色圆环中央,正对着面前站立者身形所在的视野位置。它分布在七层眼膜中,就像油渗进七层棉花一样,遍满七层眼膜,大小如虱子的头,恰当地为眼识等充当所依和门而安住。巴利
Passāmīti maṃsacakkhunāpi passāmīti duvidhaṃ maṃsacakkhu – sasambhāracakkhu pasādacakkhūti. Tattha yoyaṃ akkhikūpake patiṭṭhito heṭṭhā akkhikūpakaṭṭhikena upari bhamukaṭṭhikena ubhato akkhikūṭehi bahiddhā akkhilomehi paricchinno akkhikūpakamajjhā nikkhantena nhārusuttakena matthaluṅge ābaddho setakaṇhamaṇḍalavicitto maṃsapiṇḍo, idaṃ sasambhāracakkhu nāma. Yo pana ettha sito ettha paṭibaddho catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya pasādo, idaṃ pasādacakkhu nāma. Idamadhippetaṃ. Tadetaṃ tassa sasambhāracakkhuno setamaṇḍalaparikkhittassa kaṇhamaṇḍalassa majjhe abhimukhe ṭhitānaṃ sarīrasaṇṭhānuppattipadese diṭṭhamaṇḍale sattasu picupaṭalesu āsittatelaṃ picupaṭalāni viya sattakkhipaṭalāni byāpetvā pamāṇato ūkāsiramattaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati.
因为能看,所以叫眼,我用肉眼看。天眼,就是像“诸比丘,我以清净、超越常人的天眼看见……”(《中部》1.284)所说的那种天眼。慧眼,就是像“远离尘垢的法眼生起”(《中部》2.395;《大品》16)所说的那种慧眼。佛眼,就是像“诸比丘,我以佛眼观察世间,看见……”(《中部》1.283)所说的那种佛眼。一切眼,就是像“一切眼称为一切知智”(《小部注·陶他咖童子问解说》32;《摩伽罗阇童子问解说》85)所说的那种一切眼。我看见,是用肉眼看色,就像看放在手掌里的余甘子果一样。我了知,是用天眼了知众生的死与生。我观察,是用慧眼观察四圣谛。我审虑,是用佛眼审察以信为首的五根。我遍察,是用一切眼遍察五种可被引导的众生。巴利
Taṃ cakkhatīti cakkhu, tena maṃsacakkhunā passāmi. Dibbacakkhunāti ‘‘addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.284) evaṃvidhena dibbacakkhunā. Paññācakkhunāti ‘‘virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.395; mahāva. 16) evaṃ āgatena paññācakkhunā. Buddhacakkhunāti ‘‘addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento’’ti (ma. ni. 1.283) evamāgatena buddhacakkhunā. Samantacakkhunāti ‘‘samantacakkhu vuccati sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. dhotakamāṇavapucchāiddesa 32; mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85) evamāgatena samantacakkhunā. Passāmīti maṃsacakkhunā hatthatale ṭhapitāmalakaṃ viya rūpagataṃ maṃsacakkhunā. Dakkhāmīti sañjānāmi dibbena cakkhunā cutūpapātaṃ. Olokemīti avalokemi paññācakkhunā catusaccaṃ. Nijjhāyāmīti cintemi buddhacakkhunā saddhāpañcamakāni indriyāni. Upaparikkhāmīti samantato ikkhāmi pariyesāmi samantacakkhunā pañca neyyapathe.
因渴爱的颤动而颤动,就是指被渴爱的躁动所躁动。从这里往后,从邪见的颤动等一直到因邪见灾患之苦而颤动的终点,因为前面已经说过了,所以很容易理解。Samphandamānaṃ 是一再地颤动。Vipphandamānaṃ 是以种种不同的方式躁动。Vedhamānaṃ 是震动。Pavedhamānaṃ 是剧烈地震动。Sampavedhamānaṃ 是一再反复地震动。或者也可以说,这是通过前缀来扩展词的含义。巴利
Taṇhāphandanāya phandamānanti taṇhācalanāya calamānaṃ. Ito paraṃ diṭṭhiphandanādidiṭṭhibyasanena dukkhena phandamānapariyosānaṃ vuttanayattā uttānameva. Samphandamānanti punappunaṃ phandamānaṃ. Vipphandamānanti nānāvidhena calamānaṃ. Vedhamānanti kampamānaṃ. Pavedhamānanti padhānena kampamānaṃ. Sampavedhamānanti punappunaṃ kampamānaṃ. Upasaggena vā padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ.
被渴爱带走的,就是被渴爱渗入的。被渴爱遍满的,就是被渴爱铺满了。沉溺于渴爱的,就是已经陷进渴爱里了。被渴爱抛掷的,就是被渴爱扔出去了。也有写成“被彻底抛掷”的版本。被征服的,就是被渴爱压碎、完全盖住了。心被耗尽的,就是心被拿走、用光了。换个说法:就像被洪水冲走一样,是被渴爱带走了;就像落进执取所生的色等缘里一样,是被渴爱跟上了;就像蓝绿藻覆盖水面、铺满水面一样,是被渴爱遍覆了;就像掉进粪坑一样,是沉入渴爱了;就像从树顶摔下来、掉进地狱一样,是被渴爱抛落了;就像被执取所生的色绑住一样,是被渴爱征服了;就像执取所生色的拥有者心中生起了观智那样,心被渴爱耗尽了。又或者,被欲贪带走的是“渴爱所行”,被欲的渴爱跟随的是“渴爱跟随”,被欲漏遍满的是“渴爱遍覆”,被欲的热恼沉没的是“沉入渴爱”,被欲的执著抛掷的是“被渴爱抛掷”,被欲的暴流征服的是“被渴爱征服”,被欲取耗尽心的是“心被渴爱耗尽”——有些人是这样解释的。欲有,指欲界。色有,指色界。无色有,指无色界。它们之间的差别前面已经讲过了。巴利
Taṇhānugatanti taṇhāya anupaviṭṭhaṃ. Taṇhāyānusaṭanti taṇhāya anupatthaṭaṃ. Taṇhāyāsannanti taṇhāya nimuggaṃ. Taṇhāya pātitanti taṇhāya khittaṃ. ‘‘Paripātita’’nti vā pāṭho. Abhibhūtanti taṇhāya madditaṃ ajjhotthaṭaṃ. Pariyādinnacittanti khepetvā gahitacittaṃ. Atha vā oghena gataṃ viya taṇhāgataṃ. Upādiṇṇakarūpapaccayehi patitvā gataṃ viya taṇhānugataṃ. Udakapiṭṭhiṃ chādetvā patthaṭanīlikā udakapiṭṭhi viya taṇhānusaṭaṃ. Vaccakūpe nimuggaṃ viya taṇhāyāsannaṃ. Rukkhaggato patitvā narake patitaṃ viya taṇhāpātitaṃ. Upādiṇṇakarūpaṃ saṃyogaṃ viya taṇhāya abhibhūtaṃ. Upādiṇṇakarūpapariggāhakassa uppannavipassanaṃ viya taṇhāya pariyādinnacittaṃ. Atha vā kāmacchandena taṇhāgataṃ. Kāmapipāsāya taṇhānugataṃ. Kāmāsavena taṇhānusaṭaṃ. Kāmapariḷāhena taṇhāyāsannaṃ. Kāmajjhosānena taṇhāya pātitaṃ. Kāmoghena taṇhāya abhibhūtaṃ. Kāmupādānena taṇhāya pariyādinnacittanti evameke vaṇṇayanti. Kāmabhaveti kāmāvacare. Rūpabhaveti rūpāvacare. Arūpabhaveti arūpāvacare. Tesaṃ nānattaṃ heṭṭhā pakāsitaṃyeva.
在种种有之中,所谓“有与非有”:“有”指欲界,“非有”指色界和无色界。另一种说法是,“有”指欲界和色界,“非有”指无色界。也就是在这些有与非有之中。“业有”指业之轮转。“再有”指投生再生的果报轮转。“欲有”指欲界。“业有”指业之轮转。其中,业有使得“有”得以存在,所以叫“有”。在欲有中,“再有”指在欲界投生中的果报轮转。果报有之所以存在,所以叫“有”。在色有等当中,道理也是一样。这里说的“在欲有、色有、无色有”,是就处所有而说的。在三者中,“业有”是就业有而说的,同样,“再有”是就投生有而说的。“再三再有”指一次又一次地生起。于趣中,指于五趣中任何一趣。有身的再生,指诸有身的再生。“未离贪”是根本词。“未离去贪”如同刹那定一样,因为不具有刹那断的缘故,贪未离去,所以叫“未离去贪”。“未舍贪”因为不具有彼分断的缘故,贪未被完全舍弃。“未吐贪”因为不具有镇伏断的缘故,贪未被吐出。“未解脱贪”因为不具有彻底断除的缘故,贪未得解脱。“未断贪”因为不具有止息断的缘故,贪未被断除。“未舍离贪”因为不具有出离断的缘故,安住于有中而未舍离随眠烦恼,所以叫“未舍离贪”。巴利
Bhavābhavesūti bhavābhaveti bhavoti kāmadhātu. Abhavoti rūpārūpadhātu. Atha vā bhavoti kāmadhātu rūpadhātu. Abhavoti arūpadhātu. Tesu bhavābhavesu. Kammabhaveti kammavaṭṭe. Punabbhaveti ponobhavike vipākavaṭṭe. Kāmabhaveti kāmadhātuyā. Kammabhaveti kammavaṭṭe. Tattha kammabhavo bhāvayatīti bhavo. Kāmabhave punabbhaveti kāmadhātuyā upapattibhave vipākavaṭṭe. Vipākabhavo bhavatīti bhavo. Rūpabhavādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca ‘‘kāmabhave rūpabhave arūpabhave’’ti okāsabhavaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tīsupi ‘‘kammabhave’’ti kammabhavaṃ , tathā ‘‘punabbhave’’ti upapattibhavaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Punappunabbhaveti aparāparaṃ uppattiyaṃ. Gatiyāti pañcagatiyā aññatarāya. Attabhāvābhinibbattiyāti attabhāvānaṃ abhinibbattiyā. Avītataṇhāti mūlapadaṃ. Avigatataṇhāti khaṇikasamādhi viya khaṇikappahānābhāvena na vigatā taṇhā etesanti avigatataṇhā. Acattataṇhāti tadaṅgappahānābhāvena apariccattataṇhā. Avantataṇhāti vikkhambhanappahānābhāvena na vantataṇhāti avantataṇhā. Amuttataṇhāti accantasamucchedappahānābhāvena na muttataṇhā. Appahīnataṇhāti paṭippassaddhippahānābhāvena na pahīnataṇhā. Appaṭinissaṭṭhataṇhāti nissaraṇappahānābhāvena bhave patiṭṭhitaṃ anusayakilesaṃ appaṭinissajjitvā ṭhitattā appaṭinissaṭṭhataṇhā.
12 现在,因为那些还没有离开渴爱的人就是这样颤动、哀叹,所以佛陀为了劝导他们调伏渴爱,说了“mamāyite”这首偈颂。其中,“mamāyite”是指被渴爱和邪见执为“我的”的事物。“Passatha”(你们看)是佛陀对听众的呼唤。“Etampi”是说这也是过患。其余内容很容易理解。巴利
12. Idāni yasmā avigatataṇhā evaṃ phandanti ca lapanti ca, tasmā taṇhāvinaye samādapento ‘‘mamāyite’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha mamāyiteti taṇhādiṭṭhimamattehi ‘‘mama’’nti pariggahite vatthusmiṃ. Passathāti sotāre ālapanto āha. Etampīti etampi ādīnavaṃ. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.
两种我所执指两种爱著。Yāvatā是表示限定、确定的虚词。由渴爱所计称是指渴爱的部分,这里的“称”与“计称”同义,就像“想为因缘故有戏论计称”等经文中的用法。有界是指没有未划定过失的划定界限,如“可认定三由旬为最大界”等。有限是指没有言词未划定过失的限定,如同界标树。尽边是指已经划定边界。界标树是双方共有的,但此如同连成一体的多罗树行,全然切定,所以叫尽边划定。已执取是指即使在别的时间也舍弃属他者而完全执取。已我所执是指作爱著,如雨季安居的住所。这是我的指近处位于的。这是我的指远处位于的。这么多是限定资具,如“连这么多也不应反驳”。到此为止也是表示限定、确定的虚词,如“到此为止,摩诃男”。整个大地指全部大地。巴利
Dve mamattāti dve ālayā. Yāvatāti paricchedaniyamatthe nipāto. Taṇhāsaṅkhātenāti taṇhākoṭṭhāsena, saṅkhā saṅkhātanti atthato ekaṃ ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 880) viya. Sīmakatanti aparicchedadosavirahitaṃ mariyādakataṃ ‘‘tiyojanaparamaṃ sīmaṃ sammannitu’’nti ādīsu (mahāva. 140) viya. Odhikatanti vacanaparicchedadosavirahitaṃ paricchedakataṃ sīmantarikarukkho viya. Pariyantakatanti paricchedakataṃ. Sīmantarikarukkho pana dvinnaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ, ayaṃ pana ekābaddhatālapanti viya katanti pariyantakataṃ. Pariggahitanti kālantarepi parāyattaṃ muñcitvā sabbākārena gahitaṃ. Mamāyitanti ālayakataṃ vassūpagataṃ senāsanaṃ viya. Idaṃ mamanti samīpe ṭhitaṃ. Etaṃ mamanti dūre ṭhitaṃ. Ettakanti parikkhāraniyamanaṃ ‘‘ettakampi nappaṭibhāseyyā’’ti viya. Ettāvatāti paricchedatthepi nipātaniyamanaṃ ‘‘ettāvatā kho mahānāmā’’ti viya. Kevalampi mahāpathavinti sakalampi mahāpathaviṃ.
一百零八种渴爱活动,就是一百零八种渴爱行径的详细展开。为什么是一百零八种呢?对色的渴爱……乃至对法的渴爱,这些在眼门等处的速行心路中生起的渴爱,就像“富商之子”“婆罗门之子”这类称呼是依据父亲而得来的一样,是依着与自身相似的所缘而生起的。在这里,以色为所缘而对色生起的渴爱,就是色爱。当它以色欲贪的形态,贪著于色而现起时,就是欲爱。当它以常见相应的贪的形态,贪著于“色是恒常的、稳固的、永恒的”而现起时,就是有爱。当它以断见相应的贪的形态,贪著于“色将断灭、消失、彻底断绝”而现起时,就是无有爱。这样一来,一种色爱就分成三种。色爱如此,声爱等也是如此,因此就有十八种渴爱活动。这十八种,缘内色等的有十八种,缘外色等的有十八种,合起来三十六种。过去的三十六种、未来的三十六种、现在的三十六种,总共就是一百零八种。或者,依于内的色等,生起“我是”“我如此”等,这样依内色等而有十八种;依于外的色等,由此生起“我是”、由此生起“我如此”等,依外色等也有十八种,合起来三十六种。过去的三十六种、未来的三十六种、现在的三十六种,这样也是一百零八种渴爱活动。巴利
Aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritanti aṭṭhuttarasataṃ taṇhāgamanavitthāraṃ. Aṭṭhuttarasataṃ kathaṃ hotīti ce? Rūpataṇhā…pe… dhammataṇhāti evaṃ cakkhudvārādīsu javanavīthiyā pavattā taṇhā ‘‘seṭṭhiputto, brāhmaṇaputto’’ti evamādīsu pitito laddhanāmā viya pitusadisārammaṇe bhūtā. Ettha ca rūpārammaṇā rūpe taṇhāti rūpataṇhā. Sā kāmarāgabhāvena rūpaṃ assādentī pavattamānā kāmataṇhā. Sassatadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena ‘‘rūpaṃ niccaṃ dhuvaṃ sassata’’nti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā bhavataṇhā. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena ‘‘rūpaṃ ucchijjati vinassati pacchedaṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā vibhavataṇhāti evaṃ tividhā hoti. Yathā ca rūpataṇhā, tathā saddataṇhādayopīti etāni aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni honti. Tāni ajjhattarūpādīsu aṭṭhārasa, bahiddhārūpādīsu aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa, iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti aṭṭhasataṃ. Ajjhattikassa upādāya ‘‘asmī’’ti hoti, ‘‘itthasmī’’ti hotīti vā evamādīni ajjhattikarūpādinissitāni aṭṭhārasa, bāhirassupādāya iminā ‘‘asmī’’ti hoti, iminā ‘‘itthasmī’’ti hotīti bāhirarūpādinissitāni aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa. Iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti evampi aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni honti.
二十种事的身见:对色等五蕴,每一个都以“把色看作我”等方式(《无碍解道》1.130-131),按四种执取方式生起,以这些事为所依而生起的见,因为存在于叫作五蕴身的当下实有之中,所以叫身见。十种事的邪见:以“没有布施,没有供养”等方式生起的邪见,它是不符合真实的见,或者脱离了真实而执取,所以是邪见;也因为它带来无益、被智者呵责,所以叫邪见。应当知道它以不如理固执为特相,以执取为作用,以邪固执为现起,以不愿见圣者、贪著欲乐等为近因,是最应呵责的。十种事的边执见:以“世间是常的,世间是无常的,世间是有边的”等方式生起,每一种都执取一部分为立足点,这样生起的见就是十种事的边执见。凡是这类见:就是凡是这种类型的见。恶见:就是堕入诸见之中。这种见被包含在六十二种见里面,所以叫恶见;这见本身因为难以超越,所以叫见稠林,就像草稠林、林稠林、山稠林一样。因为充满危险和恐惧,所以叫见荒漠,就像贼荒漠、猛兽荒漠、无水荒漠、饥荒荒漠一样。因为它能刺穿和颠倒正见,所以叫见歪曲。因为邪见生起时会刺穿并颠倒正见。有时执取常,有时执取断,见以扭曲的方式颤动,所以叫见颤动。持恶见的人无法在一个立场上站住,有时随念常,有时随念断。这见本身以束缚之义成为结,所以叫见结。像鳄鱼等紧紧咬住人一样,它牢牢抓住所缘,所以叫执。因为安立而执取,所以叫执取。这执取以强有力的方式安立后抓住。以常等的方式固执,所以叫固执。超越法的自性,以常等的方式从外面触摸,所以叫执摸。因为带来无益,是低劣的道,或者是通往低劣恶趣的道,所以叫邪道。因为不是真实的路,所以叫邪路。就像迷路的人虽然认定“这是去某村的路”,却到不了那个村;同样,持恶见的人虽然认定自己的见是“通往善趣的路”,这见也不能带他到善趣,所以因为不是真实的路,叫邪路。因为本身就是邪的,所以叫邪性。愚人就在那里流转,或者在那里渡越,所以叫渡场;这渡场又是灾祸的处所,所以叫外道处;或者因为是外道出生和安住的地方,也叫外道处。是颠倒的执取,或者由颠倒而执取,所以叫颠倒执。执取非真实的自性,所以叫颠倒执。以“无常是常”等方式翻转过来执取,所以叫颠倒执。不是正确方法的执取,所以叫邪执。在不真实的事物上,不是在真实自性的事物上,却认为它是那样、是真实的、是自性,这样的执取就是“在不真实中认为它是真实”的执取。凡是:不管有多少。六十二恶见:就是《梵网经》里所说的六十二种恶见。巴利
Vīsativatthukāsakkāyadiṭṭhīti rūpādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ ekekampi ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.130-131) nayena catudhā gāhavasena pavattāni vatthūni katvā uppannā vijjamānaṭṭhena sati khandhapañcakasaṅkhāte kāye diṭṭhīti sakkāyadiṭṭhi. Dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhīti ‘‘natthi dinnaṃ, natthi yiṭṭha’’ntiādinayappavattā micchādiṭṭhi, ayāthāvadiṭṭhi virajjhitvā gahaṇato vā vitathā diṭṭhi micchādiṭṭhi, anatthāvahattā paṇḍitehi kucchitā diṭṭhītipi micchādiṭṭhi. Sā ayoniso abhinivesalakkhaṇā, parāmāsarasā, micchābhinivesapaccupaṭṭhānā, ariyānamadassanakāmatādipadaṭṭhānā, paramavajjāti daṭṭhabbā. Dasavatthukā antaggāhikā diṭṭhīti sassato loko, asassato loko, antavā loko’’ti ādinayappavattā ekekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ katvā gahaṇavasena evaṃ pavattā diṭṭhi dasavatthukā antaggāhikā diṭṭhi. Yā evarūpā diṭṭhīti yā evaṃjātikā diṭṭhi. Diṭṭhigatanti diṭṭhīsu gataṃ. Idaṃ dassanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiantogadhattāti diṭṭhigataṃ, diṭṭhiyeva duratikkamanaṭṭhena gahanaṃ diṭṭhigahanaṃ tiṇagahanavanagahanapabbatagahanāni viya. Sāsaṅkasappaṭibhayaṭṭhena diṭṭhikantāraṃ corakantāravāḷakantāranirudakakantāradubbhikkhakantārā viya. Sammādiṭṭhiyā vinivijjhanaṭṭhena vilomanaṭṭhena ca diṭṭhivisūkāyikaṃ. Micchādassanañhi uppajjamānaṃ sammādassanaṃ vinivijjhati ceva vilometi ca. Kadāci sassatassa, kadāci ucchedassa gahaṇato diṭṭhiyā virūpaṃ phanditanti diṭṭhivipphanditaṃ. Diṭṭhigatiko hi ekasmiṃ patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti. Kadāci sassataṃ anussarati, kadāci ucchedaṃ. Diṭṭhiyeva bandhanaṭṭhena saṃyojananti diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ. Susumārādayo viya purisaṃ ārammaṇaṃ daḷhaṃ gaṇhātīti gāho. Patiṭṭhahanato patiṭṭhāho. Ayañhi balavapavattibhāvena patiṭṭhahitvā gaṇhāti. Niccādivasena abhinivisatīti abhiniveso. Dhammasabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā niccādivasena parato āmasatīti parāmāso. Anatthāvahattā kucchito maggo, kucchitānaṃ vā apāyānaṃ maggoti kummaggo. Ayāthāvapathato micchāpatho. Yathā hi disāmūḷhena ‘‘ayaṃ asukagāmassa nāma patho’’ti gahitopi taṃ gāmaṃ na sampāpeti, evaṃ diṭṭhigatikena ‘‘sugatipatho’’ti gahitāpi diṭṭhi sugatiṃ na pāpetīti ayāthāvapathato micchāpatho. Micchāsabhāvato micchattaṃ. Tattheva paribbhamanato taranti ettha bālāti titthaṃ, titthañca taṃ anatthānañca āyatananti titthāyatanaṃ, titthiyānaṃ vā sañjātidesaṭṭhena nivāsaṭṭhānaṭṭhena ca āyatanantipi titthāyatanaṃ. Vipariyesabhūto gāho, vipariyesato vā gāhoti vipariyesaggāho. Asabhāvagāhoti viparītaggāho. ‘‘Anicce nicca’’nti ādinayappavattavasena parivattetvā gāho vipallāsaggāho. Anupāyagāho micchāgāho. Ayāthāvakasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ na sabhāvasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ tathaṃ yāthāvakaṃ sabhāvanti gāho ‘‘ayāthāvakasmiṃ yāthāvaka’’nti gāho. Yāvatāti yattakā. Dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatānīti brahmajāle (dī. ni. 1.29 ādayo) āgatāni dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatāni.
即使害怕被割断,也会动摇:心里生起“他们会割断、会强行用暴力夺走”的担忧时,也会颤动。正在被割断时:按照前面所说的方式,指正在被割断的时候。已被割断时:按照前面所说的方式,指已经被割断、被夺去的时候。即使害怕转变,也会动摇:指对会转变、会变成另一种状态心存担忧时,也会动摇。正在转变时:指正在转变的时候。已转变时:指已经转变了的时候。动摇:就是颤动。遍动:就是以一切方式颤动。纷动:就是以种种方式摇动。颤抖:就是看到危险而发抖。遍颤:就是因为惊惧而格外发抖。全颤:就是因为恐惧到汗毛竖立,以一切方式发抖。动摇这些:是动词的受格复数形式。少水:指水很少。寡水:指水被搅浑。水耗尽时:指水干了的时候。或被其余鸟类:指被其余种类的鸟。被啄食:指被伤害、被撞击。被提起:指从泥中被拖出来,或者被吞食。被吃掉:指被吃掉。被乌鸦所动摇。被鹰所遍动。被苍鹭所纷动。当被鸟用喙抓住的时候,因为面临死亡而颤抖。在被刺穿的时候而遍颤。在死亡临近的时候而全颤。巴利
Acchedasaṃkinopi phandantīti acchinditvā pasayha balakkārena gaṇhissantīti uppannasaṃkinopi calanti. Acchindantepīti vuttanayena acchijjantepi. Acchinnepīti vuttanayena acchinditvā gahitepi. Vipariṇāmasaṃkinopīti parivattetvā aññathābhāvena āsaṃkinopi . Vipariṇāmantepīti viparivattanakālepi. Vipariṇatepīti viparivattitepi. Phandantīti calanti. Samphandantīti sabbākārena calanti. Vipphandantīti vividhākārena phandanti. Vedhantīti bhayaṃ disvā kampanti. Pavedhantīti chambhitattā bhayena visesena kampanti. Sampavedhantīti lomahaṃsanabhayena sabbākārena kampanti. Phandamāneti upayogabahuvacanaṃ. Appodaketi mandodake. Parittodaketi luḷitodake. Udakapariyādāneti khīṇodake. Balākāhi vāti vuttāvasesāhi pakkhijātīhi. Paripātiyamānāti vihiṃsiyamānā ghaṭṭiyamānā. Ukkhipiyamānāti kaddamantarato nīhariyamānā giliyamānā vā. Khajjamānāti khādiyamānā. Phandanti kākehi. Samphandanti kulalehi. Vipphandanti balākāhi. Vedhanti tuṇḍena gahitakāle maraṇavasena. Pavedhanti vijjhanakāle. Sampavedhanti maraṇasamīpe.
看清之后,就是看清过失。衡量之后,就是衡量功德和过失。审察之后,就是把功德和过失详细展开。辨明之后,就是舍弃、避开应当断除的事物。使之显明之后,就是使其达到成就,成为独特的。或者,是摆脱混杂的过失,通过区分事物来观察;摆脱不确定的过失,通过确定标准来衡量;摆脱事物本身的过失,通过分别来审察;摆脱迷惑的过失,通过最上等的分别来辨明;摆脱密集的过失,通过按自然本性区分来使之显明。舍弃,就是彻底放下。舍弃,就是放弃。不执为我所有,就是不以渴爱与邪见作为执著之处。不执捉,就是不以初观智不执取。不执著,就是不以寻思作出估计。不固著,就是不以决意投入邪见的方式而进入。巴利
Passitvāti aguṇaṃ passitvā. Tulayitvāti guṇāguṇaṃ tulayitvā. Tīrayitvāti guṇāguṇaṃ vitthāretvā. Vibhāvayitvāti vatthuhānabhāgiṃ muñcitvā vajjetvā. Vibhūtaṃ katvāti nipphattiṃ pāpetvā āveṇikaṃ katvā. Atha vā saṃkiṇṇadosaṃ mocetvā vatthuvibhāgakaraṇena passitvā. Aparicchedadosaṃ mocetvā pamāṇakaraṇavasena tulayitvā. Vatthudosaṃ mocetvā vibhāgakaraṇavasena tīrayitvā. Sammohadosaṃ mocayitvā aggavibhāgakaraṇavasena vibhāvayitvā. Ghanadosaṃ mocetvā pakativibhāgakaraṇena vibhūtaṃ katvā. Pahāyāti pajahitvā. Paṭinissajjitvāti nissajjitvā. Amamāyantoti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi ālayaṃ akaronto. Agaṇhantoti diṭṭhiyā pubbabhāge paññāya taṃ na gaṇhanto. Aparāmasantoti vitakkena ūhanaṃ akaronto. Anabhinivesantoti niyāmokkantidiṭṭhivasena nappavisanto.
不造作:就是以执取的渴爱而不去造作。不令生起:就是以能导致再有的渴爱而不令其生起。不令生起:就是特别地不令其生起。不令产生:就是以欲求的渴爱而不令其产生。不令完全产生:就是以一切方式不令其完全产生。或者,这些词是依前缀而加以扩展的。如此,这里第一偈说的是乐味。巴利
Akubbamānoti pariggāhataṇhāvasena akaronto. Ajanayamānoti ponobhavikataṇhāvasena ajanayamāno. Asañjanayamānoti visesena asañjanayamāno. Anibbattayamānoti patthanātaṇhāvasena na nibbattayamāno. Anabhinibbattayamānoti sabbākārena na abhinibbattayamāno. Upasaggavasena vā etāni padāni vaḍḍhitāni. Evamettha paṭhamagāthāya assādaṃ.
13 接着,用后面四首偈颂说明了欲的过患之后,现在为了说明带有方法的出离以及出离的利益,又或者,通过所有这些偈颂说明了欲的过患、低劣和杂染之后,现在为了说明出离中的利益,而说了“于两端”等两首偈颂。其中,“于两端”是指触和触的集起等两方面,也就是两种界限。“调伏了欲”是指调伏了欲贪。“遍知触”是指遍知眼触等触,或者顺着触而遍知与它相应的一切非色法,以及依它们的依处、门、所缘而说的色法——也就是以三遍知遍知整个名色——“不贪求”:于色等一切法而不贪求;“凡自所呵责者则不造作”:凡是自己所呵责的,便不造作;“智者不染著于所见所闻”:如是具有坚固慧的智者,于所见与所闻之法,不染著于两种染著中的任何一种,犹如虚空,无所染著,达至极致清净。巴利
13. Tato parāhi catūhi gāthāhi ādīnavañca dassetvā idāni saupāyaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nissaraṇānisaṃsañca dassetuṃ, sabbāhi vā etāhi kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesañca dassetvā idāni nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ubhosu antesū’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha ubhosu antesūti phassaphassasamudayādīsu dvīsu, dvīsu paricchedesu. Vineyya chandanti chandarāgaṃ vinetvā. Phassaṃ pariññāyāti cakkhusamphassādiphassaṃ, phassānusārena vā taṃsampayutte sabbepi arūpadhamme, tesaṃ vatthudvārārammaṇavasena rūpadhamme cāti sakalampi nāmarūpaṃ tīhi pariññāhi parijānitvā. Anānugiddhoti rūpādīsu sabbadhammesu agiddho. Yadattagarahī tadakubbamānoti yaṃ attanā garahati, taṃ akurumāno. Na limpatī diṭṭhasutesu dhīroti so evarūpo dhitisampanno dhīro diṭṭhesu ca sutesu ca dhammesu dvinnaṃ lepānaṃ ekenāpi lepena na limpati, ākāsamiva nirupalitto accantavodānappatto hoti.
触是一种界定,也就是说,触有它自己单独的范围。它能碰触,所以叫触。这个触以碰触为特征,以撞击为作用,以会合为显现,以进入范围的所缘为直接原因。因为触虽然是非色法,却只是以碰触所缘的方式生起,所以它以碰触为特征。它虽然完全不黏着,却像色对眼、声对耳那样,让心和所缘互相撞击,所以以撞击为作用;或者因为它是由依处和所缘的撞击而生起,从成就的意义上,也可以把它的作用理解为撞击的作用。注释书里确实这样说:巴利
Phasso eko antoti phasso ekaparicchedo. Phusatīti phasso. Svāyaṃ phusanalakkhaṇo, saṅghaṭṭanaraso, sannipātapaccupaṭṭhāno, āpāthagatavisayapadaṭṭhāno. Ayañhi arūpadhammopi samāno ārammaṇe phusanākāreneva pavattatīti phusanalakkhaṇo. Ekadeseneva anallīyamānopi rūpaṃ viya cakkhuṃ, saddo viya ca sotaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇañca saṅghaṭṭetīti saṅghaṭṭanaraso, vatthārammaṇasaṅghaṭṭanato vā uppannattā sampattiatthenapi rasena ‘‘saṅghaṭṭanaraso’’ti veditabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
四地所摄的触,并非没有以接触为特相这回事,但撞击的作用只在五门转起时才有。五门转起的触,既有接触的特相,也有撞击的作用。意门转起的触,只有接触的特相这个名称,并没有撞击的作用。巴利
‘‘Catubhūmakaphasso no phusanalakkhaṇo nāma natthi, saṅghaṭṭanaraso pana pañcadvārikova hoti. Pañcadvārikassa hi phusanalakkhaṇotipi saṅghaṭṭanarasotipi nāmaṃ. Manodvārikassa phusanalakkhaṇotveva nāmaṃ, na saṅghaṭṭanaraso’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1, kāmāvacarakusala, dhammuddesakathā).
说完这段话之后,就引用了这部经(弥兰陀问经 2.3.8):巴利
Idañca vatvā idaṃ suttaṃ (mi. pa. 2.3.8) ābhataṃ –
大王,譬如两只公羊在争斗,其中一只公羊应当看作眼,另一只公羊应当看作色,它们两个的会合应当看作触。这样一来,触就是以碰触为特相,以撞击为作用。大王,又譬如两只手掌互相拍击,其中一只手应当看作眼,另一只手应当看作色,它们的会合应当看作触。这样一来,触就是以碰触为特相,以撞击为作用。以上就是详细解释。巴利
‘‘Yathā, mahārāja, dve meṇḍā yujjheyyuṃ, yathā eko meṇḍo, evaṃ cakkhu daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā dutiyo meṇḍo, evaṃ rūpaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā tesaṃ sannipāto, evaṃ phasso daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ phusanalakkhaṇo ca phasso saṅghaṭṭanaraso ca. Yathā, mahārāja, dve sammā vajjeyyuṃ, dve pāṇī vajjeyyuṃ. Yathā eko pāṇi, evaṃ cakkhu daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā dutiyo pāṇi, evaṃ rūpaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā tesaṃ sannipāto, evaṃ phasso daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ phusanalakkhaṇo ca phasso saṅghaṭṭanaraso cā’’ti vitthāro.
或者,就像“以眼见色”等说法里,眼识等是用眼等名称来说的;同样,在这里,它们也是用眼等名称来说的,应当这样理解。因此,在“应被看作眼”等说法里,按照这个道理,意思应理解为“应被看作眼识”。这样一来,由于心与所缘的撞击,在这部经里,也是从作用的意义上成立了“撞击的作用”。不过,因为它是依据“三者的会合”这一自身之因来阐述的,所以以会合为现起。因为各处都说“三者的和合是触”,这正是依据因来阐述的。而这段经文的意思是“三者的和合即是触”,并不是仅仅和合本身就是触。巴利
Yathā vā ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1352, 1354) cakkhuviññāṇādīni cakkhuādināmena vuttāni, evamidhāpi tāni cakkhuādināmeneva vuttānīti veditabbāni. Tasmā ‘‘evaṃ cakkhu daṭṭhabba’’ntiādīsu evaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbanti iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Evaṃ sante cittārammaṇasaṅghaṭṭanato imasmimpi sutte kiccaṭṭheneva rasena ‘‘saṅghaṭṭanaraso’’ti siddho hoti. Tiṇṇaṃ sannipātasaṅkhātassa pana attano kāraṇassa vasena paveditattā sannipātapaccupaṭṭhāno. Ayañhi tattha tattha ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso’’ti evaṃ kāraṇasseva vasena paveditoti. Imassa ca suttapadassa tiṇṇaṃ saṅgatiyā phassoti ayamattho, na saṅgatimattameva phasso.
因为已经这样说明,所以它就以那种方式呈现,因此说它是“以会和为现起”。但如果从果报意义上的现起来说,它就被称为“受的现起”。因为它让受现起,也就是让受生起的意思。而当它让受生起时,应当这样理解:比如外在的热虽然同样是缘,但依止于称为虫胶的那种物质而生起的温热,只会让它所依附的东西变软,却不会让作为它外缘的、称为无焰热炭的那种外在热本身变热。同样,这个受虽然有称为色基、所缘等的其他缘,但因为依止于心,所以它只在自己所依止的心中令受生起,而不会在作为它缘的色基或所缘那里生起。又因为它是以与自身相应的作意,以及根,在毫无障碍的情况下于境中生起的,所以说它是“以现前之境为足处”。巴利
Evaṃ paveditattā pana tenevākārena paccupaṭṭhātīti ‘‘sannipātapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti vutto. Phalaṭṭhena pana paccupaṭṭhānenesa vedanāpaccupaṭṭhāno nāma hoti. Vedanaṃ hesa paccupaṭṭhāpeti, uppādetīti attho. Uppādayamāno ca yathā bahiddhā uṇhapaccayāpi samānā lākhāsaṅkhātadhātunissitā usmā attano nissaye mudubhāvakārī hoti, na attano paccayabhūtepi bahiddhā vītaccitaṅgārasaṅkhāte uṇhabhāve. Evaṃ vatthārammaṇasaṅkhātaaññapaccayopi samāno cittanissitattā attano nissayabhūte citte eva esa vedanuppādako hoti, na attano paccayabhūtepi vatthumhi ārammaṇevāti veditabbo. Tajjena samannāhārena pana indriyena ca parikkhate visaye anantarāyena uppajjanato esa ‘‘āpāthagatavisayapadaṭṭhāno’’ti vuccati.
触从哪里生起、出现,那个缘就叫作“触的集起”。经里确实这样说:“以六处为缘,有触。”过去二法是从时间角度说的。受二法,因为注疏里说“舍受由于寂静,所以就说为乐”,所以是把舍受归入乐受,再从苦和乐两方面来说的。名色二法是从色与无色两方面说的。处二法是从轮回流转的角度说的。己身二法是从五蕴的角度说的,应当这样理解。其中,能带来乐,就是乐;能感受,就是受;能带来苦,就是苦。有朝向、弯曲的特相,是名;有变坏、破坏的特相,是色。眼处等六处是内的;色处等六处是外的。色蕴等五蕴,因为存在,所以叫己身。无明、业、爱、食、触、名色,这些就是己身的集起。巴利
Phasso yato samudeti uppajjati, so ‘‘phassasamudayo’’ti vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso’’ti (mahāva. 1; vibha. 225). Atītaduko kālavasena vutto. Vedanāduko ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 232) vuttattā upekkhāvedanaṃ sukhameva katvā sukhadukkhavasena, nāmarūpaduko rūpārūpavasena, āyatanaduko saṃsārapavattivasena, sakkāyaduko pañcakkhandhavasena vuttoti veditabbo. Tattha sukhayatīti sukhā. Vedayatīti vedanā. Dukkhayatīti dukkhā. Namanalakkhaṇaṃ nāmaṃ. Ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ. Cakkhāyatanādīni cha ajjhattikāni. Rūpāyatanādīni cha bāhirāni. Rūpakkhandhādayo pañcakkhandhā vijjamānaṭṭhena sakkāyo. Avijjākammataṇhāāhāraphassanāmarūpā sakkāyasamudayo.
眼触:“眼”就是能看的意思,能享受并辨明色,这就是它的含义。从眼生起的触,就是眼触。这个触对它相应的受,以俱生、互相、依止、果报、食、相应、有、不离去这八种方式成为缘。“耳”就是能听的意思。它位于带有附属结构的耳腔内部、覆着细薄茶色毛、形状像指套的地方,适当地成就耳识等的依处与门的作用。从耳生起的触,就是耳触。鼻触等也是同样的道理。“鼻”就是能嗅的意思。它位于带有附属结构的鼻腔内部、形状像羊蹄的地方,适当地成就鼻识等的依处与门的作用。“舌”是维持生命的意思,或者从品尝味道的意义上称为舌。它位于带有附属结构的舌部,避开舌尖、舌根和两侧,在舌面上方中间像破裂的青莲花瓣聚合的地方,适当地成就舌识等的依处与门的作用。“身”是有漏不善法生起的地方。“生处”就是产生之处。在这个身体中,凡有业力所生生命活动存在的地方,大多数都有身净色,适当地成就身识等的依处与门的作用。“意”就是能认知的意思,也就是了别。“意”指与转向心和有分心一起;从意生起的触,就是意触。巴利
Cakkhusamphassoti cakkhatīti cakkhu, rūpaṃ assādeti vibhāveti cāti attho. Cakkhuto pavatto samphasso cakkhusamphasso. So pana attanā sampayuttāya vedanāya sahajātaaññamaññanissayavipākaāhārasampayuttaatthiavigatavasena aṭṭhadhā paccayo hoti. Suṇātīti sotaṃ. Taṃ sasambhārasotabilassa anto tanutambalomācite aṅguliveṭhakasaṇṭhāne padese sotaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Sotato pavatto samphasso sotasamphasso. Ghānasamphassādīsupi eseva nayo. Ghāyatīti ghānaṃ . Taṃ sasambhārabilassa anto ajapadasaṇṭhāne padese ghānaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Jīvitamavhāyatīti jivhā, sāyanaṭṭhena vā jivhā. Sā sasambhārajivhāya atiaggamūlapassāni vajjetvā uparimatalamajjhe bhinnauppaladalaggasaṇṭhāne padese jivhāviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānā tiṭṭhati. Kucchitānaṃ sāsavadhammānaṃ āyoti kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. Yāvatā imasmiṃ kāye upādiṇṇapavatti nāma atthi, tattha yebhuyyena kāyappasādo kāyaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamāno tiṭṭhati. Munātīti mano, vijānātīti attho. Manoti sahāvajjanabhavaṅgaṃ; manato pavatto samphasso manosamphasso.
为了说明六种触其实只有两种,世尊说:“增语触和有对触。”在意门生起的触是增语触。在五门生起的触,因为依处、所缘等有对碍而生起,所以是有对触。巴利
Chabbidhampi phassaṃ duvidhameva hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘adhivacanasamphasso paṭighasamphasso’’ti āha . Manodvāriko adhivacanasamphasso. Pañcadvāriko vatthārammaṇādipaṭighena uppajjanato paṭighasamphasso.
以乐受为所缘时,就是能生起乐受的。以苦受为所缘时,就是能生起苦受的。以不苦不乐受为所缘时,就是能生起不苦不乐受的。在这里,能带来快乐,所以叫“乐”;意思是说,它让生起乐受的那个人变得快乐。或者,因为它能很好地挖除、吞噬身心的病痛,所以叫“乐”。能带来痛苦,所以叫“苦”;意思是说,它让生起苦受的那个人变得痛苦。既不是苦也不是乐,所以叫“不苦不乐”;这里的“不”(ma)字是按词语连读的方式说出来的。巴利
Sukhavedanāya ārammaṇe sukhavedanīyo. Dukkhavedanāya ārammaṇe dukkhavedanīyo. Adukkhamasukhavedanāya ārammaṇe adukkhamasukhavedanīyo. Tattha sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Suṭṭhu vā khanati, khādati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ. Dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ dukkhitaṃ karotīti attho. Na dukkhaṃ na sukhanti adukkhamasukhaṃ, ma-kāro padasandhivasena vutto.
“善”等说法,是就种类而说的。其中,“善”与二十一种善心相应;“不善”与十二种不善心相应;“无记”与其余的果报心、唯作心等无记心相应。巴利
Kusalotiādayo jātivasena vuttā. Tattha kusaloti ekavīsatikusalacittasampayutto. Akusaloti dvādasākusalacittasampayutto. Abyākatoti avasesavipākakiriyābyākatacittasampayutto.
接下来,按照有(存在)的类别来解说,所以说“欲界”等。与五十四种欲界心相应的,就是欲界。舍弃了欲,而活动于色界,所以叫色界;从善与无记来说,它与十五种色界心相应。舍弃了欲和色,而活动于无色界,所以叫无色界;从善与无记来说,它与十二种无色界心相应。巴利
Puna bhavappabhedavasena niddisanto ‘‘kāmāvacaro’’tiādimāha. Catupaññāsakāmāvacaracittasampayutto kāmāvacaro. Kāmaṃ pahāya rūpe avacaratīti rūpāvacaro, kusalābyākatavasena pañcadasarūpāvacaracittasampayutto. Kāmañca rūpañca pahāya arūpe avacaratīti arūpāvacaro, kusalābyākatavasena dvādasārūpāvacaracittasampayutto.
现在从执取倾向的角度来说明,说了“空”等这些话。其中,“空”是指因为远离贪、嗔、痴而空,所以叫“空”。“无相”是指因为没有贪、嗔、痴的相,所以叫“无相”。“无愿”是指因为不存在贪、嗔、痴的愿求,所以称为“无愿”。巴利
Idāni abhinivesavasena dassento ‘‘suññato’’tiādimāha. Tattha suññatoti rāgadosamohehi suññattā suññato. Rāgadosamohanimittehi animittattā animitto. Rāgadosamohapaṇidhīnaṃ abhāvato appaṇihitoti vuccati.
现在,从属于轮回和不属于轮回的角度来说明,而说了“世间的”等话。所谓“世间”,是以坏灭、崩坏之义来说的,也就是轮回;因为被包含在其中,系属于世间,所以叫“世间的”。超越出来就是“超胜的”;因为不属于世间,所以超越世间,叫“出世间的”。触,就是触的方式。触和已触的状态,是通过前缀把词扩展出来的。巴利
Idāni vaṭṭapariyāpannaapariyāpannavasena dassento ‘‘lokiyo’’tiādimāha. Loko vuccati lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena vaṭṭaṃ , tasmiṃ pariyāpannabhāvena loke niyuttoti lokiyo. Uttiṇṇoti uttaro, loke apariyāpannabhāvena lokato uttaroti lokuttaro. Phusanāti phusanākāro. Samphusanā samphusitattanti upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ.
“这样知道之后”意思是:这样弄清楚之后,了知的人就在判断、辨别,并按接下来要说的方式去思惟。因为它是无常的、有始有终的,所以判断为“无常”。因为不断生起和坏灭而带来逼迫,又是苦的所依处,所以判断为“苦”。因为要靠各种条件维持,又是疾病的根源,所以判断为“病”。因为和苦紧密相连,又流出烦恼的不净,并且由于生、老、坏灭而经历红肿、成熟、破裂,所以判断为“疮”。因为会制造逼迫、向内刺痛、又难以拔除,所以判断为“箭”。因为应当被呵责、会带来衰损、是罪恶之事的所依,所以判断为“恶”。因为会让人不得自在,又是疾病的根源,所以判断为“病”。因为不受自己控制、也不听从自己,所以判断为“敌”。因为被病、老、死所破坏、崩解,所以判断为“坏”。因为会带来种种灾难,所以判断为“灾”。因为会带来许多未曾预见的祸患,又是一切灾祸的所依,所以判断为“难”。因为是一切恐怖的来源,又和被称为苦灭的至上安稳完全相反,所以判断为“恐怖”。因为被种种不利跟着,被过失缠住,又像邪灵一样让人无法忍受,所以判断为“祸”。因为被病、老、死以及利、衰等世间法所动摇,所以判断为“动”。因为通过造作和它自身的性质,都有走向坏灭的倾向,所以判断为“坏”。因为一切状态都会毁坏,也没有坚固性,所以判断为“不坚”。因为没有救护的作用,也得不到安稳,所以判断为“无护”。因为不值得依附,即使依附了也起不到庇护的作用,所以判断为“无依”。因为对依靠它的人,并没有真正无所畏惧的保障,所以判断为“无皈依”。因为缺少人们所设想的那种常、乐、我、净等实体,所以是空虚的,判断为“虚”。正因为空虚,所以称为“空无”,或者是因为它微少。因为在世间,微少也被说成“空无”。因为没有主人、没有居住者、没有感受者、没有作者、没有支配者,所以判断为“空”。巴利
Evaṃ ñātaṃ katvāti evaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā jānanto tīreti tīrayati, upari vattabbākārena cinteti. Aniccantikatāya ādiantavantatāya ca aniccato tīreti. Uppādavayapaṭipīḷanatāya dukkhavatthutāya ca dukkhato. Paccayayāpanīyatāya rogamūlatāya ca rogato. Dukkhatāsūlayogitāya kilesāsucipaggharatāya uppādajarābhaṅgehi uddhumātaparipakkapabhinnatāya ca gaṇḍato. Pīḷājanakatāya antotudanatāya dunnīharaṇīyatāya ca sallato. Vigarahaṇīyatāya avaḍḍhiāvahanatāya aghavatthutāya ca aghato. Aseribhāvajanakatāya ābādhapadaṭṭhānatāya ca ābādhato. Avasatāya avidheyyatāya ca parato. Byādhijarāmaraṇehi lujjanapalujjanatāya palokato. Anekabyasanāvahanatāya ītito. Aviditānaṃyeva vipulānaṃ anatthānaṃ āvahanato sabbūpaddavavatthutāya ca upaddavato. Sabbabhayānaṃ ākaratāya ca dukkhavūpasamasaṅkhātassa paramassāsassa paṭipakkhabhūtatāya ca bhayato. Anekehi anatthehi anubaddhatāya dosūpasaṭṭhatāya, upasaggo viya anadhivāsanārahatāya ca upasaggato. Byādhijarāmaraṇehi ceva lābhādīhi ca lokadhammehi pacalitatāya calato. Upakkamena ceva sarasena ca pabhaṅgupagamanasīlatāya pabhaṅguto. Sabbāvatthāvinipātitāya, thirabhāvassa ca abhāvatāya adhuvato. Atāyanatāya ceva alabbhaneyyakhematāya ca atāṇato. Allīyituṃ anarahatāya, allīnānampi ca leṇakiccākāritāya aleṇato. Nissitānaṃ bhayasārakattābhāvena asaraṇato. Yathāparikappitehi dhuvasubhasukhattabhāvehi rittatāya rittato. Rittatāyeva tucchato, appakattā vā. Appakampi hi loke ‘‘tuccha’’nti vuccati. Sāminivāsivedaka kārakādhiṭṭhāyakavirahitatāya suññato.
由于没有主宰等性质,所以从无我的角度看。由于是流转的苦,又具有苦的过患,所以从过患的角度看。或者,“过患”的意思是走向、流转于不幸,这是对可怜人的称呼。诸蕴也确实可怜,因为类似过患,所以从过患的角度看。由于具有老和死这两种变坏的性质,所以从变易法的角度看。由于软弱无力,像边材一样容易破碎,所以从非坚实的角度看。由于是苦的因,所以从苦根的角度看。像表面是朋友实际上是敌人那样破坏信任,所以从杀手的角度看。由于灭尽了“有”的状态、从无有中产生,所以从无有的角度看。由于是诸漏的立足处,所以从有漏的角度看。由于由因缘造作而成,所以从有为的角度看。由于是死魔和烦恼魔的饵食,所以从魔饵的角度看。由于具有生、老、病、死的性质,所以从生老病死法的角度看。由于是愁、悲叹、忧恼的因,所以从愁悲叹忧恼法的角度看。由于是渴爱、邪见、恶行、染污诸法的境界,所以从染污法的角度看。由于依无明、业、渴爱、六处而生起,所以从集的角度看。由于这些不存在了就止灭,所以从灭的角度看。在接触上由于欲贪而有甜蜜的滋味,所以从滋味的角度看。由于接触变坏,所以从过患的角度看。由于从这两者出离,所以从出离的角度看。在所有这些当中,都应该补上“决断”这个词。巴利
Sayañca asāmikabhāvāditāya anattato. Pavattidukkhatāya, dukkhassa ca ādīnavatāya ādīnavato. Atha vā ādīnaṃ vāti gacchati pavattatīti ādīnavo, kapaṇamanussassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Khandhāpi ca kapaṇāyevāti ādīnavasadisatāya ādīnavato. Jarāya ceva maraṇena cāti dvedhā pariṇāmapakatitāya vipariṇāmadhammato. Dubbalatāya, pheggu viya sukhabhañjanīyatāya ca asārakato. Aghahetutāya aghamūlato. Mittamukhasapatto viya vissāsaghātitāya vadhakato. Vigatabhavatāya vibhavasambhūtatāya ca vibhavato. Āsavapadaṭṭhānatāya sāsavato. Hetupaccayehi abhisaṅkhatatāya saṅkhatato. Maccumārakilesamārānaṃ āmisabhūtatāya mārāmisato. Jātijarābyādhimaraṇapakatitāya jātijarābyādhimaraṇadhammato. Sokaparidevaupāyāsahetutāya sokaparidevaupāyāsadhammato. Taṇhādiṭṭhiduccaritasaṃkilesānaṃ visayadhammatāya saṃkilesadhammato. Avijjākammataṇhāsaḷāyatanavasena uppattito samudayato. Tesaṃ abhāvena atthaṅgamato. Phasse chandarāgavasena madhurassādena assādato. Phassassa vipariṇāmena ādīnavato. Ubhinnaṃ nissaraṇena nissaraṇato tīretīti sabbesu ca imesu ‘‘tīretī’’ti pāṭhaseso daṭṭhabbo.
断除:就是从自己的相续中拔掉。驱散:就是刺穿。使走到尽头:就是令其彻底终结。令归于不存在:就是一步步让它消失。这些人以圣道之剑斩断了由渴爱和无明所构成的根,所以叫根已断。就像多罗树桩一样,他们的根基被弄成了那样,所以叫被弄成多罗树桩。好比把一棵多罗树连根拔起,只在那个地方留下一个树桩,那棵多罗树就再也不会长出来了;同样,以圣道之剑把色等诸味的根连根拔除之后,使那些先前曾生起过它们的心相续成为仅存根基的状态,所有这些就都称为被弄成多罗树桩。Yassesoti:就是那个人的那种贪著。Samucchinnoti:就是彻底断。Vūpasantoti:就是以果而寂止。Paṭipassaddhoti:就是以安息断而安息。或者以接前缀而使词增长。Abhabbuppattikoti:就是不能再生起。Ñāṇagginā daḍḍhoti:以道智之火烧毁。或者说,像把毒药丢弃、连同容器一起扔掉一样,连同根基一起被舍弃。像根被斩断的毒藤一样,连根斩断,所以叫彻底断。像在火坑上洒水、把炭火熄灭一样,寂止。像水滴落在熄灭的炭火上一样,安息。像芽生起的因被斩断的种子一样,不能再生起。像被雷击中的毒树一样,以智火烧毁——有些人这样解释。巴利
Pajahatīti sakasantānato nīharati. Vinodetīti tudati. Byantiṃ karotīti vigatantaṃ karoti. Anabhāvaṃ gametīti anu anu abhāvaṃ gameti. Ariyamaggasatthena ucchinnaṃ taṇhāavijjāmayaṃ mūlametesanti ucchinnamūlā. Tālavatthu viya nesaṃ vatthu katanti tālāvatthukatā. Yathā hi tālarukkhaṃ samūlaṃ uddharitvā tassa vatthumatte tasmiṃ padese kate na puna tassa tālassa uppatti paññāyati, evaṃ ariyamaggasatthena samūle rūpādirase uddharitvā tesaṃ pubbe uppannapubbabhāvena vatthumatte cittasantāne kate sabbepi te ‘‘tālāvatthukatā’’ti vuccanti. Yassesoti yassa puggalassa eso gedho. Samucchinnoti ucchinno. Vūpasantoti phalena vūpasanto. Paṭipassaddhoti paṭipassaddhippahānena paṭipassambhito. Upasaggena vā padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Abhabbuppattikoti puna uppajjituṃ abhabbo. Ñāṇagginā daḍḍhoti maggañāṇagginā jhāpito. Atha vā visanikkhittaṃ bhājanena saha chaḍḍitaṃ viya vatthunā saha pahīno. Mūlacchinnavisavalli viya samūlacchinnoti samucchinno. Uddhane udakaṃ siñcitvā nibbāpitaaṅgāraṃ viya vūpasanto. Nibbāpitaaṅgāre patitaudakaphusitaṃ viya paṭipassaddho. Aṅkuruppattiyā hetucchinnabījaṃ viya abhabbuppattiko. Asanipātavisarukkho viya ñāṇagginā daḍḍhoti evameke vaṇṇayanti.
“离贪”这一说法,是就舍弃自身贪著而说的。“已离贪”这一说法,是就于所缘舍弃爱着性而说的。“弃贪”这一说法,是为了显示不再执取的状态。“脱贪”这一说法,是就相续中解脱而说的。“断贪”这一说法,是为了显示即使已解脱,也无处可住。“舍贪”这一说法,是为了显示舍弃先前所取之物。离贪者、已离贪者、弃贪者,应按照前面所说的方法来配合理解。其中,因抓取之义而称为贪求,因染着之义而称为贪染。“无渴爱者”就是没有渴爱。也写作“无遮障者”,意思是远离了渴爱的覆盖。“寂灭者”就是寂灭自性者。“清凉者”就是清凉自性者。“感受安乐者”就是领受身乐与心乐的自性者。“以成梵体者”就是以最上自性。“以自心”就是以心。巴利
Vītagedhoti idaṃ sakabhāvapariccajanavasena vuttaṃ. Vigatagedhoti idaṃ ārammaṇe sālayabhāvapariccajanavasena. Cattagedhoti idaṃ puna anādiyanabhāvadassanavasena. Muttagedhoti idaṃ santatito vinimocanavasena. Pahīnagedhoti idaṃ muttassāpi kvaci anavaṭṭhānadassanavasena. Paṭinissaṭṭhagedhoti idaṃ ādinnapubbassa nissaggadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Vītarāgo vigatarāgo cattarāgoti vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ. Tattha gijjhanavasena gedho. Rañjanavasena rāgo. Nicchātoti nittaṇho. ‘‘Nicchado’’tipi pāṭho, taṇhāchadanavirahitoti attho. Nibbutoti nibbutasabhāvo. Sītibhūtoti sītasabhāvo. Sukhapaṭisaṃvedīti kāyikacetasikasukhaṃ anubhavanasabhāvo. Brahmabhūtenāti uttamasabhāvena. Attanāti cittena.
“因已作故”,是指因为已经造作了那些恶业。“因未作故”,是指因为还没有造作那些善业。“我造了身恶行,没造身善行”这一类说法,是从根门、从不律仪与律仪、从业道这几个角度来讲的。“在戒上不是圆满实行者”这一类说法,是从四遍净戒的角度来讲的。“不勤于警寤”,是从五种警寤的角度来讲的。“以念与正知”,是从有益正知等角度来讲的。“四念处”等菩提分法,是从世间与出世间两个角度来讲的。“我没有遍知苦”这一类说法,应当知道是从四圣谛的角度来讲的。这些义理,因为在各处已经按相应方式解说过,所以在这里很清楚明了。巴利
Katattā cāti pāpakammānaṃ katabhāvena ca. Akatattā cāti kusalānaṃ akatabhāvena ca. Kataṃ me kāyaduccaritaṃ, akataṃ me kāyasucaritantiādayo dvāravasena avirativirativasena kammapathavasena ca vuttā. Sīlesumhi na paripūrakārītiādayo catupārisuddhisīlavasena. Jāgariyamananuyuttoti pañcajāgaraṇavasena. Satisampajaññenāti sātthakādisampajaññavasena . Cattāro satipaṭṭhānātiādayo bodhipakkhiyadhammā lokiyalokuttaravasena. Dukkhaṃ me apariññātantiādayo cattāro ariyasaccavasena vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Te atthato tattha tattha vuttanayattā pākaṭāyeva.
“坚毅者、智者”等七个词,意思和前面说的一样。不过还可以这样理解:在苦中毫不动摇,所以叫坚毅者。在乐中不漂浮不定,所以叫智者。对现世的利益和来世的利益都已经修习纯熟,所以叫有慧者。在自利和他利上都不动摇,所以叫具觉慧者。对深奥和浅显的道理都不退转,所以叫有智人。能照亮隐秘和覆藏的道理,所以叫照了者。因为远离烦恼而清净,像天平一样不偏不倚,所以叫具聪慧者。不沾着,就是不像同类那样沾着,就像虚空中划过。不遍沾,就是尤为不沾着。不附沾,就是虽与物结合亦不沾着,犹如掌中划过的痕迹。不沾,就是虽与物结合亦不为所染,犹如置于迦尸布上的摩尼宝珠。不遍沾,就是尤为不染着,犹如包裹摩尼宝珠的迦尸布。不附沾,就是虽贴近亦不附着,犹如莲叶上的水珠。出离者,就是已向外走出,如同从牢狱中逃出之人。弃舍者,就是已舍弃恶法,如同丢弃仇敌所藏的垢衣。解脱者,就是善巧地解脱,于应执取之境灭除喜爱,不再回转。离系者,就是不与烦恼结合,如同病已痊愈之人。以破除界限的心:即以离去界限的心,也就是以脱离了一切有、一切所缘、一切烦恼的心。巴利
Dhīropaṇḍitoti satta padā vuttatthāyeva. Api ca dukkhe akampiyaṭṭhena dhīro. Sukhe anuppilavaṭṭhena paṇḍito. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthe kataparicayaṭṭhena paññavā. Attatthaparatthe niccalaṭṭhena buddhimā. Gambhīrauttānatthe apaccosakkanaṭṭhena ñāṇī. Guḷhapaṭicchannatthe obhāsanaṭṭhena vibhāvī. Nikkilesabyavadānaṭṭhena tulāsadisoti medhāvī. Na limpatīti sajātiyā na limpati ākāse lekhā viya. Na palimpatīti visesena na limpati. Na upalimpatīti saññogo hutvāpi na limpati hatthatale lekhā viya. Alittoti saññogo hutvāpi na kilissati kāsikavatthe ṭhapitamaṇiratanaṃ viya. Apalittoti visesena na kilissati maṇiratane paliveṭhitakāsikavatthaṃ viya. Anupalittoti upagantvāpi na allīyati pokkharapatte udakabindu viya. Nikkhantoti bahi nikkhanto bandhanāgārato palāto viya. Nissaṭoti pāpapahīno amittassa paṭicchāpitakiliṭṭhavatthu viya. Vippamuttoti suṭṭhu mutto gayhūpage vatthumhi ratiṃ nāsetvā puna nāgamanaṃ viya. Visaññuttoti kilesehi ekato na yutto byādhinā muttagilāno viya. Vimariyādikatena cetasāti vigatamariyādakatena cittena, sabbabhavena sabbārammaṇena sabbakilesehi muttacittenāti attho.
14 在“遍知想”这一偈中,简要的含义是这样的:不只是触而已,对于欲想等各类想,或者随顺想,按照前面所说的方式,以三种遍知遍知想及名色之后,通过这条行道,也能度越四种瀑流。因此,那位已度越瀑流的人,在渴爱与邪见的执取中,由于断除了渴爱、邪见和烦恼,所以不被染着。他是漏尽的牟尼,因为贪等箭已被拔除,所以是“已拔箭者”;因为念力达到圆满,所以“不放逸”而行;或者在修行前期就不放逸地行持,凭这种不放逸的行持成为已拔箭者之后,不再希求自己与他人的自体等种种,不再贪恋此世与后世。他只是随着最后心的灭去,无所执取,就像柴尽之火一样般涅槃。这样,佛陀以阿罗汉果为顶点结束了这次说法,只是在安立教法而已;并不是通过这次说法使道或果生起,因为这次说法是为漏尽者而说的。巴利
14.Saññaṃ pariññāti gāthāya pana ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – na kevalañca phassameva, api ca kho pana kāmasaññādibhedaṃ saññaṃ, saññānusārena vā pubbe vuttanayeneva nāmarūpaṃ tīhi pariññāhi parijānitvā imāya paṭipadāya catubbidhampi vitareyya oghaṃ, tato so tiṇṇogho taṇhādiṭṭhipariggahesu taṇhādiṭṭhikilesappahānena anupalitto khīṇāsavamuni rāgādisallānaṃ abbūḷhattā abbūḷhasallo, sativepullappattiyā appamatto caraṃ, pubbabhāge vā appamatto caranto tena appamādacārena abbūḷhasallo hutvā sakaparattabhāvādibhedaṃ nāsīsati lokamimaṃ parañca, aññadatthu carimacittanirodhā nirupādānova jātavedo parinibbātīti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi, dhammanettiṭhapanameva karonto; na tu imāya desanāya maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā uppādesi, khīṇāsavassa desitattāti.
能够识别青、黄等各种所缘的差别,所以叫“想”。它以了知为相,以再认为作用。因为属于四地的想,没有哪一个不是以了知为相的,一切想都是以了知为相。不过,其中那种靠先前认过的标记来认知的想,就叫作有“再认的作用”。它的运作方式应当这样理解:就像木匠先在木头上做个记号,后来靠那个记号又认出那块木头;又像一个人先记住了别人身上的黑痣等特征,后来靠那个特征再认出来“这就是某某人”;又像替国王看管装饰品的人,在每件装饰品上都系上名牌,当有人吩咐“把某某装饰品拿来”时,他就点灯进入宝库,看清名牌,然后把那件装饰品取出来——想也是这样生起的。巴利
Nīlādibhedaṃ ārammaṇaṃ sañjānātīti saññā. Sā sañjānanalakkhaṇā paccābhiññāṇarasā. Catubhūmikasaññā hi nosañjānanalakkhaṇā nāma natthi, sabbā sañjānanalakkhaṇāva. Yā panettha abhiññāṇena sañjānāti, sā paccābhiññāṇarasā nāma hoti. Tassā vaḍḍhakissa dārumhi abhiññāṇaṃ katvā puna tena abhiññāṇena taṃ paccābhijānanakāle, purisassa kāḷatilakādiabhiññāṇaṃ sallakkhetvā puna tena abhiññāṇena ‘‘asuko nāma eso’’ti tassa paccābhijānanakāle, rañño piḷandhanagopakabhaṇḍāgārikassa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ piḷandhane nāmapaṇṇakaṃ bandhitvā ‘‘asukaṃ piḷandhanaṃ nāma āharā’’ti vutte dīpaṃ jāletvā sāragabbhaṃ pavisitvā paṇṇaṃ vācetvā tassa tasseva piḷandhanassa āharaṇakāle ca pavatti veditabbā.
另一种解释:从统摄一切的角度来说,想以了知为特相,以制造再次认知的缘——也就是做标记——为作用,就像木匠等人在木头上做记号一样;以依照所执取的标记而执著为现起,就像见过大象的盲人执取局部一样;或者,由于它不深入所缘、不能长久安住,以短暂停留为现起,就像闪电一样;以当下呈现的境为近因,就像小鹿把稻草人当成“人”而生起的想一样。不过,当想与智相应时,它就完全随顺智而行,应当理解为:就像在地等四大种中,其余与它俱生的诸法随顺地等一样。巴利
Aparo nayo – sabbasaṅgāhikavasena hi sañjānanalakkhaṇā saññā, punasañjānanapaccayanimittakaraṇarasā dāruādīsu tacchakādayo viya, yathāgahitanimittavasena abhinivesakaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānā hatthidassakaandho viya, ārammaṇe anogāḷhavuttitāya aciraṭṭhānapaccupaṭṭhānā vā vijju viya, yathāupaṭṭhitavisayapadaṭṭhānā tiṇapurisakesu migapotakānaṃ purisāti uppannasaññā viya. Yā panettha ñāṇasampayuttā hoti, sā ñāṇameva anuvattati, sasambhārapathavīādīsu sesadhammā pathavīādīni viyāti veditabbā.
与欲相应的想,就是欲想。与嗔相应的想,就是嗔想。与害相应的想,就是害想。在这三种想当中,前两种(欲想和嗔想)既能对有情生起,也能对诸行生起。因为,当一个人寻思可爱、可意的有情或诸行时,欲想就会生起。当一个人对不可爱、不可意的有情或诸行心生愤怒,从以嗔怒注视的那一刻开始,一直到想要毁灭对方,这期间生起的,就是嗔想。害想不会对诸行生起,因为诸行根本不存在可以被加害这回事。只有当一个人想着“愿这些有情被杀掉、被消灭、被彻底灭尽,或者干脆不存在”的时候,害想才会对有情生起。
与出离相应的想,就是出离想。它在不净观的前分阶段属于欲界,在不净禅那中属于色界,以那个禅那作为基础而生起道与果的时候,则属于出世间。
与无嗔相应的想,就是无嗔想。它在慈心观的前分阶段属于欲界,在慈心禅那中属于色界,以那个禅那作为基础而生起道与果的时候,则属于出世间。
与无害相应的想,就是无害想。它在悲心观的前分阶段属于欲界,在悲心禅那中属于色界,以那个禅那作为基础而生起道与果的时候,则属于出世间。
当无贪为主导时,另外两个(无嗔、无害)就跟随它。当慈心为主导时,另外两个就跟随它。当悲心为主导时,另外两个就跟随它。
依托色尘而生起的想,就是色想。声想等也是同样的道理。这是就它所缘的对象来命名的。由于所缘已经说了,眼触所生等处的说法也就等于已经说了。巴利
Kāmapaṭisaññuttā saññā kāmasaññā. Byāpādapaṭisaññuttā saññā byāpādasaññā. Vihiṃsāpaṭisaññuttā saññā vihiṃsāsaññā. Tesu dve sattesupi saṅkhāresupi uppajjanti. Kāmasaññā hi piye manāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā vitakkentassa uppajjati. Byāpādasaññā appiye amanāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā kujjhitvā olokanakālato paṭṭhāya yāva vināsanā uppajjati. Vihiṃsāsaññā saṅkhāresu na uppajjati. Saṅkhāro hi dukkhāpetabbo nāma natthi. ‘‘Ime sattā haññantu vā, ucchijjantu vā, vinassantu vā, mā vā ahesu’’nti cintanakāle pana sattesu uppajjati. Nekkhammapaṭisaññuttā saññā nekkhammasaññā, sā asubhapubbabhāge kāmāvacarā hoti, asubhajhāne rūpāvacarā, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttarā. Abyāpādapaṭisaññuttā saññā abyāpādasaññā, sā mettāpubbabhāge kāmāvacarā hoti, mettājhāne rūpāvacarā, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttarā. Avihiṃsāpaṭisaññuttā saññā avihiṃsāsaññā, sā karuṇāpubbabhāge kāmāvacarā, karuṇājhāne rūpāvacarā, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttarā. Yadā alobho sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti. Yadā mettā sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti. Yadā karuṇā sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti. Rūpārammaṇaṃ ārabbha uppannā saññā rūpasaññā. Saddasaññādīsupi eseva nayo. Idaṃ tassāyeva ārammaṇato nāmaṃ. Ārammaṇānaṃ vuttattā cakkhusamphassajādivatthūnipi vuttāneva honti.
对于“像这样的想”这句话,还应当知道其他类似的类别,比如“有对触所生想”“名言触所生想”等等。其中,“名言触所生想”按宽泛的说法,其实也涵盖六门生起的想。因为三个非色蕴本身就像背靠背一样同时存在,它们为与自己同时生起的想安立了“名言触所生想”这个名称。但严格来说,“有对触所生想”指的是前五门生起的想,“名言触所生想”指的是意门生起的想。应当知道,这些都是为了把其余更多的想也涵盖进来。巴利
Yā evarūpā saññāti aññāpi ‘‘paṭighasamphassajā saññā adhivacanasamphassajā saññā’’ti evamādikā veditabbā. Tattha adhivacanasamphassajā saññātipi pariyāyena chadvārikāyeva . Tayo hi arūpino khandhā sayaṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakā hutvā attanā sahajātasaññāya ‘‘adhivacanasamphassajā saññā’’ti nāmaṃ karonti, nippariyāyena pana paṭighasamphassajā saññā nāma pañcadvārikā saññā, adhivacanasamphassajā saññā nāma manodvārikā saññā. Etā atirekasaññā pariggahitāti veditabbā.
想,就是它自己的本性名称。认知,就是认知的活动方式。已被认知的状态,就是已被认知的体性。巴利
Saññāti sabhāvanāmaṃ. Sañjānanāti sañjānanākāro. Sañjānitattanti sañjānitabhāvo.
无明暴流:从不应积集的意义上说,身恶行等就叫作“不应得”,意思是得不到。它得到这个不应得的东西,所以叫无明。反过来,身善行等就叫作“应得”,它得不到这个应得的东西,所以叫无明。它使蕴的积集义、处的处义、界的空义、根的主宰义、谛的真实义变得不了知,所以叫无明。它使苦等四谛——也就是依逼迫等角度所说的四种含义——变得不了知,所以叫无明。它在没有边际的轮回中,让有情在胎、趣、有、识住、有情居这五种生存形态中奔走,所以叫无明。它在究竟意义上并不存在的女人、男人等概念上奔走,却在真实存在的蕴等法上不奔走,所以叫无明。再者,它覆盖眼识等的依处和所缘,以及缘起和缘生诸法,所以叫无明。这就是无明暴流。
应当以欲暴流来度越,以有暴流来渡过,以见暴流来超越,以无明暴流来越过。或者说,以入流道断除而度越,以一来道断除而渡过,以不来道断除而超越,以阿拉汉道断除而越过。也有人主张:“度越等五句,应当配合彼分断等五种断除来理解。”巴利
Avijjoghanti pūretuṃ ayuttaṭṭhena kāyaduccaritādi avindiyaṃ nāma, aladdhabbanti attho. Taṃ avindiyaṃ vindatīti avijjā. Tabbiparītato kāyasucaritādi vindiyaṃ nāma, taṃ vindiyaṃ na vindatīti avijjā. Khandhānaṃ rāsaṭṭhaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanaṭṭhaṃ, dhātūnaṃ suññaṭṭhaṃ, indriyānaṃ adhipatiyaṭṭhaṃ, saccānaṃ tathaṭṭhaṃ aviditaṃ karotītipi avijjā. Dukkhādīnaṃ pīḷanādivasena vuttaṃ catubbidhaṃ atthaṃ aviditaṃ karotītipi avijjā. Antavirahite saṃsāre yonigatibhavaviññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsesu satte javāpetīti avijjā. Paramatthato avijjamānesu itthipurisādīsu javati, vijjamānesu khandhādīsu na javatīti avijjā. Api ca cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ vatthārammaṇānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannānañca dhammānaṃ chādanatopi avijjā, taṃ avijjoghaṃ. Kāmoghavasena uttareyya. Bhavoghavasena patareyya. Diṭṭhoghavasena samatikkameyya. Avijjoghavasena vītivatteyya. Atha vā sotāpattimaggena pahānavasena uttareyya. Sakadāgāmimaggena pahānavasena patareyya. Anāgāmimaggena pahānavasena samatikkameyya. Arahattamaggena pahānavasena vītivatteyya. Atha vā ‘‘tareyyādipañcapadaṃ tadaṅgādipañcapahānena yojetabba’’nti keci vadanti.
说了“痴被称为智”之后,为了把它的分类展示出来,又接着说了“那种慧、了知……”等等。这里除了前面说过的方式之外,特别指出了“无痴、择法”这一项。无痴与善法中的不修习相对立,是修习的原因。靠无痴,能无颠倒地执取;有痴的人则颠倒执取。靠无痴,能如实、依照真实的样子执持,随顺事物的本来面目而运作。因为有痴的人会把真实的当成不真实,把不真实的当成真实;同样地,靠无痴就不会有求不得苦。无痴的人因为能这样审察:“在这里,这又能从哪里得到呢?”所以没有死苦。因为有痴的死亡是苦,而这种苦对无痴的人来说并不存在。对出家人来说,是安乐共住,不会投生到畜生道。因为有痴而常常迷惑的人,会投生到畜生道。无痴是痴的对治,它靠无痴的力量,能消除由痴造成的偏离中道的状态。靠无痴,能有无害想、界想,能依中道而行,也能破除后面两种执取。后面两种念处,也正是依靠无痴的力量才能成就。无痴是长寿的原因。无痴的人能了知有利和不利,避开不利、接受有利,所以能长寿,不会从自身的成就中退失。无痴的人正是做对自己有利的事,所以能成就自己。无痴是圣者安住的因,在种种中立的事物中保持寂静,因为无痴的人没有一切执取的聚集。靠无痴,能有无我的见。不迷惑的人善于如实执取,能了知五蕴不受引导,因为五蕴本来就是不受引导的。正如靠无痴而有这种无我的见,同样地,靠痴而有我的见。既然已经了知自我之空,谁还会再陷入迷惑呢?巴利
‘‘Monaṃ vuccati ñāṇa’’nti vatvā taṃ pabhedato dassetuṃ ‘‘yā paññā pajānanā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ vuttanayameva ṭhapetvā ‘‘amoho dhammavicayo’’ti padaṃ. Amoho kusalesu dhammesu abhāvanāya paṭipakkho bhāvanāhetu. Amohena aviparītaṃ gaṇhāti mūḷhassa viparītaggahaṇato. Amohena yāthāvaṃ yāthāvato dhārento yathāsabhāve pavattati. Mūḷho hi ‘‘tacchaṃ atacchaṃ, atacchañca taccha’’nti gaṇhāti; tathā icchitālābhadukkhaṃ na hoti. Amūḷhassa ‘‘taṃ kutettha labbhā’’ti evamādipaccavekkhaṇasambhavato maraṇadukkhaṃ na hoti. Sammohamaraṇañhi dukkhaṃ, na ca taṃ amūḷhassa hoti. Pabbajitānaṃ sukhasaṃvāso hoti, tiracchānayoniyaṃ nibbatti na hoti. Mohena hi niccasammūḷhā tiracchānayoniṃ upapajjanti . Mohapaṭipakkho ca amoho mohavasena amajjhattabhāvassa abhāvakaro. Amohena avihiṃsāsaññā dhātusaññā majjhimāya paṭipattiyā paṭipajjanaṃ, pacchimaganthadvayassa pabhedanañca hoti. Pacchimāni dve satipaṭṭhānāni tasseva ānubhāvena ijjhanti. Amoho dīghāyukatāya paccayo hoti. Amūḷho hi hitāhitaṃ ñatvā ahitaṃ parivajjento hitañca paṭisevamāno dīghāyuko hoti, attasampattiyā aparihīno hoti. Amūḷho hi attano hitameva karonto attānaṃ sampādeti. Ariyavihārassa paccayo hoti, udāsinapakkhesu nibbuto hoti amūḷhassa sabbābhisaṅgatāya abhāvato. Amohena anattadassanaṃ hoti. Asammūḷho hi yāthāvagahaṇakusalo apariṇāyakaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ apariṇāyakato bujjhati. Yathā ca etena anattadassanaṃ, evaṃ attadassanaṃ mohena. Ko hi nāma attasuññataṃ bujjhitvā puna sammohaṃ āpajjeyyāti.
具备了那种智,就是具足这里所说的那种智,成为有学等圣者的牟尼。得到牟尼境界,就是获得了智、达到了牟尼的状态。三是数量上的限定。牟尼法就是能成就牟尼、造作牟尼的修行法。在身牟尼等当中,身牟尼是依表身与色身来安立的;语牟尼是依表语与语音来安立的;意牟尼是依意门的心等来安立的。断除三种身恶行,就是断除杀生等从身体发起的恶劣行为。身善行,就是从身体发起的善行。以身为所缘的智,就是以身体为所缘,从无常等角度生起的智。身遍知,就是对身体以知遍知、度遍知、断遍知来了知的智。与遍知俱行的道,就是全面观照自身后生起的、与遍知相应的道。断除对身体的欲贪,就是断除对身体的渴爱与欲贪。身行的灭,就是入出息灭、止息,也就是进入第四禅。语行的灭,就是寻与伺灭、止息,也就是进入第二禅。心行的灭,就是想与受灭、止息,也就是进入想受灭定。巴利
Tena ñāṇena samannāgatoti etena vuttappakārena ñāṇena samaṅgībhūto sekkhādayo muni. Monappattoti paṭiladdhañāṇo munibhāvaṃ patto. Tīṇīti gaṇanaparicchedo. Moneyyānīti munibhāvakarā moneyyakarā paṭipadā dhammā. Kāyamoneyyantiādīsu viññattikāyarūpakāyavasena paññāpetabbaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ. Viññattivācāsaddavācāvasena paññāpetabbaṃ vacīmoneyyaṃ. Manodvārikacittādivasena paññāpetabbaṃ manomoneyyaṃ. Tividhakāyaduccaritānaṃ pahānanti pāṇātipātādividhānaṃ kāyato pavattānaṃ duṭṭhu caritānaṃ pajahanaṃ. Kāyasucaritanti kāyato pavattaṃ suṭṭhu caritaṃ. Kāyārammaṇe ñāṇanti kāyaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā aniccādivasena pavattaṃ kāyārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ. Kāyapariññāti kāyaṃ ñātatīraṇappahānapariññāhi jānanavasena pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Pariññāsahagato maggoti ajjhattikaṃ kāyaṃ sammasitvā uppāditamaggo pariññāsahagato. Kāye chandarāgassa pahānanti kāye taṇhāchandarāgassa pajahanaṃ. Kāyasaṅkhāranirodhoti assāsapassāsānaṃ nirodho āvaraṇo, catutthajjhānasamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ. Vacīsaṅkhāranirodhoti vitakkavicārānaṃ nirodho āvaraṇo, dutiyajjhānasamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ. Cittasaṅkhāranirodhoti saññāvedanānaṃ nirodho āvaraṇo, saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ.
在第一首偈颂里,说到“身牟尼”等词时:因为断除了身恶行,所以叫身牟尼;因为断除了语恶行,所以叫语牟尼;因为断除了意恶行,所以叫意牟尼;因为断除了一切不善,所以叫无漏牟尼。所谓“成就牟尼法”,应当理解为:已经了知应当了知的事,并安住在果位上,所以叫成就牟尼法。所谓“说为一切舍断者”,是因为已经舍弃一切烦恼而安住,所以说是一切舍断者。巴利
Paṭhamagāthāya kāyamunintiādīsu kāyaduccaritappahānavasena kāyamuni. Vacīduccaritappahānavasena vācāmuni. Manoduccaritappahānavasena manomuni. Sabbākusalappahānavasena anāsavamuni. Moneyyasampannanti jānitabbaṃ jānitvā phale ṭhitattā moneyyasampannaṃ. Āhu sabbappahāyinanti sabbakilese pajahitvā ṭhitattā sabbappahāyinaṃ kathayanti.
在第二首偈颂中,“已洗净罪恶”:应当这样理解其含义——对于被称为内在与外在的一切处,以内在和外在为所缘而生起的所有罪恶,都已通过道智洗净、涤除而安住,因此他称为“已洗净罪恶”。住在家的,是在家牟尼。出家过无家生活的,是非家牟尼。其中,有学圣者是有学牟尼。阿拉汉是无学牟尼。独觉佛是独觉牟尼。正自觉者是牟尼中的牟尼。巴利
Dutiyagāthāya ninhātapāpakanti yo ajjhattabahiddhasaṅkhāte sabbasmimpi āyatane ajjhattabahiddhārammaṇavasena uppattirahāni sabbapāpakāni maggañāṇena ninhāya dhovitvā ṭhitattā ninhātapāpakaṃ āhūti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Agāramajjhe vasantā agāramunino. Pabbajjupagatā anagāramunino. Tattha sekkhā sekkhamunino. Arahanto asekkhamunino. Paccekabuddhā paccekamunino. Sammāsambuddhā munimunino.
接着,为了进一步说明而提问,以“哪些是在家牟尼”这样发问。在家者,就是从事耕作、畜牧等在家职业的人。已见道者,就是已经见到涅槃的人。已了知教法者,就是已经了知三学之教法,因此称为已了知教法者。非家者,就是没有耕作、畜牧等在家职业,出家的人被称为非家者。七有学,就是入流者等七类圣者。他们还在三学中修学,所以叫有学。阿拉汉不再修学,所以叫无学。独觉佛是依各自的因缘,独自一人、没有老师而觉悟四圣谛,所以叫独觉牟尼。巴利
Puna kathetukamyatāpucchāvasena ‘‘katame agāramunino’’ti āha. Agārikāti kasigorakkhādiagārikakamme niyuttā. Diṭṭhapadāti diṭṭhanibbānā . Viññātasāsanāti viññātaṃ sikkhattayasāsanaṃ etesanti viññātasāsanā. Anagārāti kasigorakkhādiagāriyakammaṃ etesaṃ natthīti pabbajitā ‘‘anagārā’’ti vuccanti. Satta sekkhāti sotāpannādayo satta. Tīsu sikkhāsu sikkhantīti sekkhā. Arahanto na sikkhantīti asekkhā. Taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca ekakāva anācariyakāva catusaccaṃ bujjhitavantoti paccekabuddhā paccekamunino.
牟尼中的牟尼被称为如来。在这里,世尊以八种理由成为如来:像过去的诸佛那样而来,所以是如来;像过去的诸佛那样而去,所以是如来;已经到达真实相,所以是如来;已经如实觉悟真实法,所以是如来;因为如实而见,所以是如来;因为如实而说,所以是如来;因为如实而行,所以是如来;以超胜之义,所以是如来。巴利
Munimunino vuccanti tathāgatāti ettha aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato – tathā āgatoti tathāgato, tathā gatoti tathāgato, tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato, tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato, tathadassitāya tathāgato, tathavāditāya tathāgato, tathākāritāya tathāgato, abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgatoti.
世尊为什么是“如来”呢?因为他是“如此而来”的。就像过去那些正自觉者,为了利益一切世间而精勤努力,这样而来。这话是什么意思呢?过去那些世尊是凭着怎样的誓愿而来,我们的世尊也是凭着同样的誓愿而来。或者说,过去那些世尊圆满了布施、持戒、出离、智慧、精进、忍辱、真实、决意、慈、舍这十种波罗蜜,十种近波罗蜜,十种究竟波罗蜜,也就是三十种波罗蜜;舍弃了肢节、眼睛、财富、王国、子女、妻子这五种大舍;圆满了过去世的修行、过去的行为、说法开示、了知利益众生等种种修行,达到智行的顶点而来,我们的世尊也是这样而来。再者,过去那些世尊修习并圆满了四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八支圣道而来,我们的世尊也是这样而来。就这样,因为“如此而来”,所以是如来。巴利
Kathaṃ bhagavā tathā āgatoti tathāgato? Yathā sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannā purimakā sammāsambuddhā āgatā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yenābhinīhārena purimakā bhagavanto āgatā, teneva amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Atha vā yathā purimakā bhagavanto dānasīlanekkhammapaññāvīriyakhantisaccādhiṭṭhānamettupekkhāsaṅkhātā dasa pāramiyo dasa upapāramiyo dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsapāramiyo pūretvā aṅgapariccāgaṃ nayanadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāganti ime pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajitvā pubbayogapubbacariyadhammakkhānañātatthacariyādayo pūretvā buddhicariyāya koṭiṃ patvā āgatā, tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Yathā ca purimakā bhagavanto cattāro satipaṭṭhāne, cattāro sammappadhāne, cattāro iddhipāde, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅge, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvetvā pūretvā āgatā, tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Evaṃ tathā āgatoti tathāgato.
就像燃灯佛等诸位牟尼,为了证得一切知而来到此世间;
同样地,这位释迦牟尼也这样来了,因此被称为如来,也就是具眼者。巴利
‘‘Yathā ca dīpaṅkarabuddhaādayo, sabbaññubhāvaṃ munayo idhāgatā; Tathā ayaṃ sakyamunīpi āgato, tathāgato vuccati tena cakkhumā’’ti.
如来为什么叫“如来”呢?就像过去那些世尊刚出生时行走那样。他们又是怎么行走的呢?他们刚出生时,双足平稳地踏在地上,面朝北方,以七步的步态行走。正如经文所说——巴利
Kathaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato? Yathā sampatijātā purimakā bhagavanto gatā. Kathañca te gatā? Te hi sampatijātā samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya uttarābhimukhā sattapadavītihārena gatā. Yathāha –
阿难,菩萨刚出生时,就以双足稳稳地站在大地上,面朝北方,以七步的步态行走;有一把白伞盖在他上方撑着,他环视四面八方,说出如狮子般无畏的话:“我是世间最上者,我是世间最年长者,我是世间最胜者,这是我最后一生,从此不再有后有。”巴利
‘‘Sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gacchati, setamhi chatte anudhāriyamāne sabbā ca disā anuviloketi, āsabhiñca vācaṃ bhāsati – ‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’’’ti (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207).
他这行走是真实的,不是虚妄的,因为它成为众多殊胜成就的前兆。他刚出生时以双足平稳站立,这是他获得四神足的前兆;面朝北方,是他超越整个世间的前兆;走七步,是获得七觉支宝的前兆;金柄拂尘挥舞,是摧伏一切外道的前兆;持白色伞盖,是获得阿罗汉解脱那最胜无垢白伞盖的前兆;环视一切方向,是获得一切知智无障智的前兆;发出狮子吼般的声音,则是转动不可退转的无上法轮的前兆。同样,这位世尊也是这样行走的。而他这行走是真实的,不是虚妄的,因为它成为那些殊胜成就的前兆。因此古德们说:巴利
Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi avitathaṃ anekesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Yañhi so sampatijāto samehi pādehi patiṭṭhāti, idamassa caturiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. Uttaramukhabhāvo panassa sabbalokuttarabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ. Sattapadavītihāro sattabojjhaṅgaratanapaṭilābhassa. ‘‘Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā’’ti (su. ni. 693) ettha vuttacāmarukkhepo pana sabbatitthiyanimmadanassa. Setacchattadhāraṇaṃ arahattavimuttivaravimalasetacchattapaṭilābhassa. Sabbadisānuvilokanaṃ sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassa. Āsabhivācābhāsanaṃ pana appaṭivattiyavaradhammacakkapavattanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Tathā ayaṃ bhagavāpi gato. Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi avitathaṃ tesaṃyeva visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Tenāhu porāṇā –
就像牛王刚出生时,用平稳的足触碰大地;
乔达摩迈出七步,天神们为他撑着一顶白伞盖。
乔达摩走了七步之后,便向四周平等地观察各个方向。
他发出具足八支的音声,就像一头狮子站在山顶上。巴利
‘‘Muhuttajātova gavampatī yathā, samehi pādehi phusī vasundharaṃ; So vikkamī satta padāni gotamo, setañca chattaṃ anudhārayuṃ marū. ‘‘Gantvāna so satta padāni gotamo, disā vilokesi samā samantato; Aṭṭhaṅgupetaṃ giramabbhudīrayi, sīho yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito’’ti. (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.37; itivu. aṭṭha. 38);
如来之所以被称为如来,就是因为他这样去。巴利
Evaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato.
或者,就像过去那些世尊一样,这位世尊也同样如此:通过出离,断除了欲贪……通过初禅,断除了诸盖……通过无常随观,断除了常想……通过阿罗汉道,断尽一切烦恼而“去”;正因为这样“去”,所以称为如来。巴利
Atha vā yathā purimakā bhagavanto, ayampi bhagavā tatheva nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ…pe… paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇe…pe… aniccānupassanāya niccasaññaṃ…pe… arahattamaggena sabbakilese pahāya gato, evampi tathā gatoti tathāgato.
如来是怎样获得“真实相”的呢?地界的坚硬相是真实的、不虚妄的;水界的流动相;火界的暖热相;风界的支撑相;空界的不接触相;识界的了知相。巴利
Kathaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato? Pathavīdhātuyā kakkhaḷattalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ, āpodhātuyā paggharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, tejodhātuyā uṇhattalakkhaṇaṃ, vāyodhātuyā vitthambhanalakkhaṇaṃ, ākāsadhātuyā asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ, viññāṇadhātuyā vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
色以变坏为特征,受以感受为特征,想以认知为特征,诸行以造作为特征,识以了知为特征。巴利
Rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ, saññāya sañjānanalakkhaṇaṃ, saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
寻的特点是投向目标,伺的特点是反复审察,喜的特点是遍满全身,乐的特点是愉悦感受,心一境性的特点是不散乱,触的特点是接触。巴利
Vitakkassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ, vicārassa anumajjanalakkhaṇaṃ, pītiyā pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, sukhassa sātalakkhaṇaṃ, cittekaggatāya avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信根的特征是决意,精进根的特征是策励,念根的特征是现前,定根的特征是不散乱,慧根的特征是了知。巴利
Saddhindriyassa adhimokkhalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyindriyassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ, satindriyassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, samādhindriyassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, paññindriyassa pajānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信力的特征是不被无信动摇,精进力的特征是不被懈怠动摇,念力的特征是不被失念动摇,定力的特征是不被掉举动摇,慧力的特征是不被无明动摇。巴利
Saddhābalassa assaddhiye akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyabalassa kosajje, satibalassa muṭṭhassacce, samādhibalassa uddhacce, paññābalassa avijjāya akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ.
念觉支的特相是安住,择法觉支的特相是简择,精进觉支的特相是策励,喜觉支的特相是遍满,轻安觉支的特相是寂静,定觉支的特相是不散乱,舍觉支的特相是省察。巴利
Satisambojjhaṅgassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pavicayalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ, pītisambojjhaṅgassa pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa upasamalakkhaṇaṃ, samādhisambojjhaṅgassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇaṃ.
正见的特相是照见,正思惟的特相是投向,正语的特相是摄受,正业的特相是等起,正命的特相是清净,正精进的特相是策励,正念的特相是现起,正定的特相是不散乱。巴利
Sammādiṭṭhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāsaṅkappassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāvācāya pariggahalakkhaṇaṃ, sammākammantassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāājīvassa vodānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāvāyāmassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāsatiyā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāsamādhissa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ.
无明的特征是不知道,行的特征是思愿,识的特征是了别,名的特征是倾向,色的特征是变坏,六处的特征是处,触的特征是接触,受的特征是感受,爱的特征是起因,取的特征是执取,有的特征是累积,生的特征是初生,老的特征是衰老,死的特征是命终。巴利
Avijjāya aññāṇalakkhaṇaṃ, saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇaṃ, viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ, nāmassa namanalakkhaṇaṃ, rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ, saḷāyatanassa āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ, phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ, taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇaṃ, upādānassa gahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, bhavassa āyūhanalakkhaṇaṃ, jātiyā nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ, jarāya jīraṇalakkhaṇaṃ, maraṇassa cutilakkhaṇaṃ.
诸界的特相是空,诸处的特相是处,诸念处的特相是现前安住,诸正勤的特相是精勤努力,诸神足的特相是成就,诸根的特相是增上,诸力的特相是不动摇,诸觉支的特相是出离,道的特相是因。巴利
Dhātūnaṃ suññatalakkhaṇaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ, satipaṭṭhānānaṃ upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammappadhānānaṃ padahanalakkhaṇaṃ, iddhipādānaṃ ijjhanalakkhaṇaṃ, indriyānaṃ adhipatilakkhaṇaṃ, balānaṃ akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ, bojjhaṅgānaṃ niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ, maggassa hetulakkhaṇaṃ.
诸谛以真实为它们的特征,止以不散乱为特征,观以随观为特征,止与观以同一味为特征,双运以不超越为特征。巴利
Saccānaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ, samathassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, vipassanāya anupassanālakkhaṇaṃ, samathavipassanānaṃ ekarasalakkhaṇaṃ, yuganaddhānaṃ anativattanalakkhaṇaṃ.
戒清净的特点是防护,心清净的特点是不散乱,见清净的特点是照见,尽智的特点是彻底断除,无生智的特点是寂静安稳,欲的特点是作为根本。巴利
Sīlavisuddhiyā saṃvaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ, cittavisuddhiyā avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, diṭṭhivisuddhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ, khaye ñāṇassa samucchedalakkhaṇaṃ, anuppāde ñāṇassa passaddhilakkhaṇaṃ, chandassa mūlalakkhaṇaṃ.
作意以生起为特相,触以和合为特相,受以汇集为特相,定以首要为特相,念以主宰为特相,慧以更进一步为特相,解脱以坚实为特相,浸入不死的涅槃以究竟为特相,这是真实的、不虚妄的。这个真实相,由智慧的行径而来,没有违失,已经到达、已经证得,所以叫如来。这样,因为至真实相而来,所以叫如来。巴利
Manasikārassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, phassassa samodhānalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanāya samosaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ, samādhissa pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ, satiyā ādhipateyyalakkhaṇaṃ, paññāya tatuttariyalakkhaṇaṃ, vimuttiyā sāralakkhaṇaṃ, amatogadhassa nibbānassa pariyosānalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ, etaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ ñāṇagatiyā āgato avirajjhitvā patto anuppattoti tathāgato. Evaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato.
如来是怎样因为如实彻证了真实法而被称为如来的呢?所谓真实法,就是四圣谛。正如经中所说:巴利
Kathaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato? Tathadhammā nāma cattāri ariyasaccāni. Yathāha –
比丘们,有这四种真实、不虚、不异。哪四种?比丘们,“这是苦”,这是真实、不虚、不异;“这是苦的集起”,这是真实、不虚、不异;“这是苦的息灭”,这是真实、不虚、不异;“这是通向苦息灭的道路”,这是真实、不虚、不异。(广说)(《相应部》5.1090)巴利
‘‘Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāni avitathāni anaññathāni. Katamāni cattāri? ‘Idaṃ dukkha’nti, bhikkhave, tathametaṃ avitathametaṃ anaññathameta’’nti vitthāro (saṃ. ni. 5.1090).
世尊已经完全觉悟了这些真实,因为完全觉悟了真实,所以称为如来。在这里,“去”(gata)这个词确实就是“已经完全觉悟”的意思。巴利
Tāni ca bhagavā abhisambuddhoti tathānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Abhisambuddhattho hi ettha gatasaddo.
另外,老死以生为缘而生起、集起,这个意义是真实的、不虚妄的、不颠倒的……诸行以无明为缘而生起、集起,这个意义是真实的、不虚妄的、不颠倒的。同样,无明对诸行的缘的意义……生对老死的缘的意义,是真实的、不虚妄的、不颠倒的。这一切世尊都已完全正觉,因为他也完全正觉了这些真实,所以称为如来。如此,因为如实完全正觉了真实法,所以是如来。巴利
Api ca jarāmaraṇassa jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho…pe… saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāpaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Tathā avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho…pe… jātiyā jarāmaraṇassa paccayaṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Taṃ sabbaṃ bhagavā abhisambuddho, tassāpi tathānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgato. Evaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato.
如来为什么是“如实见者”呢?世尊对于有天神在内的世间……乃至有天神和人在内的众生,在无量世界中,无量众生通过眼门呈现到面前的色所缘,他以一切方式了知、照见。当他这样了知、照见时,那个色——无论按可意、不可意等来区分,还是按在见、闻、觉、识中所能找到的说法来区分,比如“什么是那个色,即色处?就是依靠四大种而有的色彩、光泽,可见、有对,青色、黄色……”等等(《法集论》616),以多种名称、十三种方式、五十二种理则加以分别,它都确实是那样,没有虚妄。对于声音等在耳门等处呈现到面前的,也是同样的道理。世尊也这样说过:巴利
Kathaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato? Bhagavā yaṃ sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchantaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ sabbākārena jānāti passati. Evaṃ jānatā passatā ca tena taṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādivasena vā diṭṭhasutamutaviññātesu labbhamānakapadavasena vā ‘‘katamaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ? Yaṃ rūpaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītaka’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 616) nayena anekehi nāmehi terasahi vārehi dvipaññāsāya nayehi vibhajjamānaṃ tathameva hoti, vitathaṃ natthi. Esa nayo sotadvārādīsupi āpāthamāgacchantesu saddādīsu. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,对于有天神在内的世间……乃至有天神和人在内的众生,他们所见、所闻、所觉、所知的,所达到的、所寻求的、以心反复思察的一切,我都了知……我都证知。这是如来所了知的,而如来不执取它。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, tamahaṃ jānāmi…pe… tamahaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ. Taṃ tathāgatassa viditaṃ, taṃ tathāgato na upaṭṭhāsī’’ti (a. ni. 4.24).
如来之所以是如来,是因为他这样如实见。在这里,应当知道“如来”这个词,是从“如实见者”这个意思来的。巴利
Evaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato. Tattha tathadassīatthe tathāgatoti padasambhavo veditabbo.
如来为什么是“如实语者”呢?从世尊坐在菩提道场的不败金刚座上,降伏四魔,证得无上正等正觉的那一夜起,到他在双娑罗树之间,以无余涅槃界般涅槃的那一夜为止,在这中间大约四十五年的时间里,从最初觉悟时、中间觉悟时、最后觉悟时,世尊所说的经、应颂……乃至方广,这一切在义理上和文句上都无可指责,不缺少也不多余,一切方面都圆满,能破除贪、嗔、痴的迷醉,其中连毫毛尖那么小的过失都没有。这一切就像用同一枚印章盖印,用同一只量器称量,用同一杆秤称过一样,确实如此,真实不虚,没有变异。正如所说的——巴利
Kathaṃ tathavāditāya tathāgato? Yaṃ rattiṃ bhagavā bodhimaṇḍe aparājitapallaṅke nisinno catunnaṃ mārānaṃ matthakaṃ madditvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, yañca rattiṃ yamakasālānamantare anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi, etthantare pañcacattālīsavassaparimāṇe kāle paṭhamabodhiyampi majjhimabodhiyampi pacchimabodhiyampi yaṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ…pe… vedallaṃ. Sabbaṃ taṃ atthato byañjanato ca anupavajjaṃ anūnamanadhikaṃ sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ rāgamadanimmadanaṃ dosamohamadanimmadanaṃ, natthi tattha vālaggamattampi pakkhalitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ ekamuddikāya lañchitaṃ viya, ekanāḷiyā mitaṃ viya, ekatulāya tulitaṃ viya ca tathameva hoti avitathaṃ anaññathaṃ. Yathāha –
准陀,如来证得无上正等正觉的那一夜,以及以无余涅槃界般涅槃的那一夜,在这两夜之间,他所说、所谈、所开示的一切,全都真实不虚,没有半点不同。因此,他被称为“如来”。巴利
‘‘Yañca, cunda, rattiṃ tathāgato anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhati, yañca rattiṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, yaṃ etasmiṃ antare bhāsati lapati niddisati, sabbaṃ taṃ tatheva hoti no aññathā, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.188).
在这里,“gata”这个词确实是“说”的意思。所以,因为说的是真实之语,就被称为如来。巴利
Gadaattho hi ettha gatasaddo. Evaṃ tathavāditāya tathāgato.
另外,“āgada”就是“āgadana”,意思是言语。他有真实、不颠倒的言语,所以把da音变成ta音,就成了“tathāgata”。应当这样理解这个词在这个意义上的成立方式。巴利
Api ca āgadanaṃ āgado, vacananti attho. Tatho aviparīto āgado assāti dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti evametasmiṃ atthe padasiddhi veditabbā.
如来为什么因为“如实行”而被称为如来呢?因为世尊的语随顺于身,身也随顺于语。所以,他怎么说就怎么做,怎么做就怎么说。对于这样成就的人,他的身也像他的语那样运转——这就是这里的意思。又,像他的身那样,他的语也那样运转,所以称为如来。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,如来是如语而行、如行而语者。这样,如语而行、如行而语,因此称为‘如来’。”这就是如来因为“如实行”而称为如来。巴利
Kathaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato? Bhagavato hi vācāya kāyo anulometi, kāyassāpi vācā. Tasmā yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī ca hoti. Evaṃbhūtassa cassa yathā vācā , kāyopi tathā gato pavattoti attho. Yathā ca kāyo, vācāpi tathā gatā pavattāti tathāgato. Tenevāha – ‘‘yathāvādī, bhikkhave, tathāgato tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Iti yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. ‘Tasmā tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato.
如来怎么是“征服”意义上的呢?他把上面的有顶天和下面的无间地狱作为边界,横向在无量世界中征服一切众生——靠戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见。没有人能衡量他,没有人能测度他。他确实是无与伦比的、不可测量的、无上的,是王中之王、天中之天、帝释中之帝释、梵天中之梵天。因此说:巴利
Kathaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato? Upari bhavaggaṃ heṭṭhā avīciṃ pariyantaṃ katvā tiriyaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu sabbasatte abhibhavati sīlena samādhinā paññāya vimuttiyā vimuttiñāṇadassanena, na tassa tulā vā pamāṇaṃ vā atthi, atha kho atulo appameyyo anuttaro rājātirājā devānaṃ atidevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā. Tenāha –
比丘们,在包括天神的世间……乃至包括人天在内的众生中,如来是征服者,不被任何人征服,是如实洞见者,是自在者,因此称为“如来”。巴利
‘‘Sadevake , bhikkhave, loke…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23).
在这里,应当这样理解词的形成:agado(药)就像无病一样。那么这药是什么呢?就是教法的善巧展现和福德的积聚。因此,这位有大神力的医师,以天界的药降伏了一切外道论者和包含天神的世间,就像用药治蛇一样。这样,在征服一切世间时,他具有如实不颠倒的、由教法善巧展现和福德所构成的药,把字母d变成t,就成为tathāgato(如来),应当这样理解。因此,以征服之义称为如来。巴利
Tatthevaṃ padasiddhi veditabbā – agado viya agado. Ko panesa? Desanāvilāso ceva puññussayo ca. Tena hesa mahānubhāvo bhisakko dibbāgadena sappe viya sabbaparappavādino sadevakañca lokaṃ abhibhavati. Iti sabbalokābhibhavane tatho aviparīto desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññamayo ca agado assāti dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti veditabbo. Evaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato.
另外,如来也可以从“这样地去”来解释,也可以从“去往真实”来解释。“去”的意思是已经了知、已经超越、已经到达、已经修行。其中,以洞察遍知如实了知整个世间,所以“这样地去、已经了知”,就是如来;以舍断遍知如实超越世间的集起,所以“这样地去、已经超越”,就是如来;以亲证如实到达世间的灭尽,所以“这样地去、已经到达”,就是如来;以如实修行趣向世间灭尽之道,所以“这样地去、已经修行”,就是如来。因此,世尊这样说:巴利
Api ca tathāya gatotipi tathāgato, tathaṃ gatotipi tathāgato. Gatoti avagato, atīto patto paṭipannoti attho. Tattha sakalaṃ lokaṃ tīraṇapariññāya tathāya gato avagatoti tathāgato, lokasamudayaṃ pahānapariññāya tathāya gato atītoti tathāgato, lokanirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāya tathāya gato pattoti tathāgato, lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ tathaṃ gato paṭipannoti tathāgato. Tena yaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,世间被如来彻底觉悟了,如来已从世间解脱出来。比丘们,世间的集起被如来彻底觉悟了,如来已断除了世间的集起。比丘们,世间的灭尽被如来彻底觉悟了,如来已亲自证得了世间的灭尽。比丘们,通向世间灭尽的道路被如来彻底觉悟了,如来已修习了通向世间灭尽的道路。比丘们,包括天、魔在内的整个世界……乃至以心所思察的一切,全都被如来彻底觉悟了。因此,他被称为“如来”。巴利
‘‘Loko, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasmā tathāgato visaṃyutto. Lokasamudayo, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasamudayo tathāgatassa pahīno. Lokanirodho, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokanirodho tathāgatassa sacchikato. Lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā tathāgatassa bhāvitā. Yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… anuvicaritaṃ manasā, sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23).
这个意思也应该这样理解。不过,这也只是用来说明如来之所以为如来的一个简要提示而已。要从各个方面完整地讲述如来的如来性,只有如来本人才能做到。又因为一切佛陀在如来功德上都是完全平等的,所以这里用复数来说“诸如来”。巴利
Tassa evampi attho veditabbo. Idampi ca tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvadīpena mukhamattameva. Sabbākārena pana tathāgatova tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvaṃ vaṇṇeyya. Yasmā pana sabbabuddhā tathāgataguṇenāpi samasamā, tasmā sabbesaṃ vasena ‘‘tathāgatā’’ti āha.
被称为阿拉汉,是因为他远离烦恼,是因为他摧毁了敌人和辐条,是因为他值得接受资具等供养,是因为他在造恶时没有隐秘,所以如来是阿拉汉。确实,他凭借道彻底摧毁了一切烦恼和习气,因此远远地、极其遥远地安住于一切烦恼之外;由于这种远离之义,他被称为阿拉汉。巴利
Arahantoti kilesehi ārakattā, arīnaṃ arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvā tathāgato arahaṃ. Ārakā hi so sabbakilesehi suvidūravidūre ṭhito maggena savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattāti ārakattā arahaṃ.
他因此被称为“远离”,因为他与那些事物不相应。
导师不与诸过失相应,因此被称为阿拉汉。
他以道摧毁了这些烦恼之敌,所以因为已摧破诸敌,也被称为阿罗汉。
因为被称为贪等的一切怨敌,都已经被消灭了;
导师以智慧之剑消灭自身烦恼,因此也被称为阿拉汉。巴利
‘‘So tato ārakā nāma, yassa yenāsamaṅgitā; Asamaṅgī ca dosehi, nātho tenārahaṃ mato’’. Te cānena kilesārayo maggena hatāti arīnaṃ hatattāpi arahaṃ. ‘‘Yasmā rāgādisaṅkhātā, sabbepi arayo hatā; Paññāsatthena nāthena, tasmāpi arahaṃ mato’’.
这个无始以来就不断运转的轮回之轮,以无明、有、渴爱为轮毂,以福行等行为辐条,以老死为轮辋,被那由漏集所成的车轴贯穿,又套在三有的车子上;他在菩提座处,以精进为足,站稳在戒律的大地上,用信的手拿起能灭尽业行的智慧之斧,把这个轮子的一切辐条全都砍断,所以称为阿拉汉。巴利
Yañcetaṃ avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhiṃ puññādiabhisaṅkhārānaṃ jarāmaraṇanemiṃ āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā tibhavarathe samāyojitaṃ anādikālappavattaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ, tassānena bodhimaṇḍe vīriyapādehi sīlapathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya saddhāhatthena kammakkhayakaraṃ ñāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā sabbe arā hatāti arahaṃ.
因为轮回之轮的辐条已被智剑摧毁,所以……
这位世间怙主因此被称为阿拉汉。巴利
‘‘Arā saṃsāracakkassa, hatā ñāṇāsinā yato; Lokanāthena tenesa, ‘araha’nti pavuccati’’.
因为他是最上应供者,所以堪受衣等资具,也堪受殊胜的供养。正因如此,当如来出现于世时,任何有大威德的天与人都不去别处供养。比如娑婆主梵天曾用须弥山那么大的宝鬘供养如来,其他天与人,以及频婆娑罗王、憍萨罗王等国王,也各自随自己的能力供养。甚至世尊般涅槃之后,阿育大王为了纪念世尊,布施了九十六俱胝的财富,在整個赡部洲建了八万四千座精舍。其他种种殊胜供养就更不用说了。所以,也由于堪受资具等的意义,他被称为阿拉汉。巴利
Aggadakkhiṇeyyattā ca cīvarādipaccaye arahati pūjāvisesañca, teneva ca uppanne tathāgate ye keci mahesakkhā devamanussā, na te aññattha pūjaṃ karonti. Tathā hi brahmā sahampati sinerumattena ratanadāmena tathāgataṃ pūjesi, yathābalañca aññe devā ca manussā ca bimbisārakosalarājādayo. Parinibbutampi ca bhagavantaṃ uddissa channavutikoṭidhanaṃ vissajjetvā asokamahārājā sakalajambudīpe caturāsītivihārasahassāni patiṭṭhāpesi. Ko pana vādo aññesaṃ pūjāvisesānanti paccayādīnaṃ arahattāpi arahaṃ.
因为这位世间主,确实值得连同诸资具一起的殊胜供养。
在世间,他值得拥有与实义相符的名字,所以战胜者才配得上“阿拉汉”这个称呼。
就像世间有些自以为聪明的愚人,因为害怕坏名声,才偷偷摸摸地干坏事;而这位(如来)任何时候都不会干坏事,所以从“干坏事时毫无隐秘”这一点来说,他也是阿拉汉。
因为对于这样的如如者来说,在恶行上根本不存在什么隐秘。
因为没有任何隐秘,所以他被称为阿拉汉。巴利
‘‘Pūjāvisesaṃ saha paccayehi, yasmā ayaṃ arahati lokanātho; Atthānurūpaṃ arahanti loke, tasmā jino arahati nāmametaṃ’’. Yathā ca loke ye keci paṇḍitamānino bālā asilokabhayena raho pāpaṃ karonti, evamesa na kadāci pāpaṃ karotīti pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvatopi arahaṃ. ‘‘Yasmā natthi raho nāma, pāpakammesu tādino; Rahābhāvena tenesa, arahaṃ iti vissuto’’.
就这样,从一切方面来说——巴利
Evaṃ sabbathāpi –
因为远离了烦恼之敌,又因为摧毁了烦恼之敌,他才被称为牟尼。
已摧破轮回之轮,堪受资具等供养,
他不于隐秘处造恶,以此故名为“阿拉汉”。巴利
‘‘Ārakattā hatattā ca, kilesārīna so muni; Hatasaṃsāracakkāro, paccayādīna cāraho; Na raho karoti pāpāni, arahaṃ tena vuccatī’’ti.
不过,因为一切佛陀在阿拉汉的功德上也是完全平等的,所以针对一切佛陀说“他们是阿拉汉”。正自觉者:因为他自己正确地觉悟了一切法,所以称为正自觉者。因为他就是这样对一切法正确地觉悟:对于应了知的法,他按应了知的方式觉悟;对于应遍知的法,他按应遍知的方式觉悟;对于应断除的法,他按应断除的方式觉悟;对于应证得的法,他按应证得的方式觉悟;对于应修习的法,他按应修习的方式觉悟。因此说道——巴利
Yasmā pana sabbe buddhā arahattaguṇenāpi samasamā, tasmā sabbesampi vasena ‘‘arahanto’’ti āha. Sammāsambuddhāti sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho. Tathā hesa sabbadhamme sammāsambuddho, abhiññeyye dhamme abhiññeyyato, pariññeyye dhamme pariññeyyato, pahātabbe dhamme pahātabbato, sacchikātabbe dhamme sacchikātabbato, bhāvetabbe dhamme bhāvetabbato. Tenevāha –
应当证知的,我已经证知;应当修习的,我已经修习。
应当断除的,我已经断除了;所以,我是佛陀,婆罗门啊。巴利
‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhiññātaṃ, bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṃ; Pahātabbaṃ pahīnaṃ me, tasmā buddhosmi brāhmaṇā’’ti. (su. ni. 563; ma. ni. 2.399);
或者也可以这样理解:眼是苦谛,以它为根本因、能生起眼的先前渴爱是集谛,这两者不再生起是灭谛,了知灭的修行方法是道谛。就这样,即使按每一项分别分析,佛陀也能自己正确地、完全地觉悟一切法。这个道理也适用于耳、鼻、舌、身、意。用同样的方式,还可以把色等六处、眼识等六识身、眼触等六触、眼触所生受等六受、色想等六想、色思等六思、色渴爱等六渴爱身、色寻等六寻、色伺等六伺、色蕴等五蕴、十遍、十随念、依膨胀相等而说的十种想、发等三十二种行相、十二处、十八界、欲有等九有、初禅等四禅、慈心修习等四无量、四无色定,以及逆观老死等和顺观无明等缘起支,都这样配列起来。巴利
Atha vā cakkhu dukkhasaccaṃ, tassa mūlakāraṇabhāvena samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhapajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccanti evaṃ ekekapaduddhārenāpi sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho. Esa nayo sotaghānajivhākāyamanesu. Eteneva ca nayena rūpādīni cha āyatanāni, cakkhuviññāṇādayo cha viññāṇakāyā, cakkhusamphassādayo cha phassā, cakkhusamphassajā vedanādayo cha vedanā, rūpasaññādayo cha saññā, rūpasañcetanādayo cha cetanā, rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā, rūpavitakkādayo cha vitakkā, rūpavicārādayo cha vicārā, rūpakkhandhādayo pañcakkhandhā, dasa kasiṇāni, dasa anussatiyo, uddhumātakasaññādivasena dasa saññā, kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā, dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, kāmabhavādayo nava bhavā, paṭhamādīni cattāri jhānāni, mettābhāvanādayo catasso appamaññāyo, catasso arūpasamāpattiyo, paṭilomato jarāmaraṇādīni, anulomato avijjādīni paṭiccasamuppādaṅgāni ca yojetabbāni.
这里有一种逐词配对的解释方式:老死是苦谛,生是集谛,这两者的出离是灭谛,了知灭的修行方法就是道谛。就这样,通过逐项分析,他以自己的智慧正确地觉悟、随觉、通达了一切法。或者说,凡有任何应当被了知的对象,由于他对这一切都已正确地完全觉悟,因此凭借解脱边际智而成为正自觉者。这些分类将在后文详细说明。另外,因为一切佛陀在正自觉的功德上完全平等,所以从所有佛陀都具备这一功德的角度,统称为正自觉者。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ ekapadayojanā – jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, jāti samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhapajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccanti evaṃ ekekapaduddhārena sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho anubuddho paṭividdho. Yaṃ vā pana kiñci atthi neyyaṃ nāma, sabbassa sammā sambuddhattā vimokkhantikañāṇavasena sammāsambuddho. Tesaṃ pana vibhāgo upari āvi bhavissati. Yasmā pana sabbabuddhā sammāsambuddhaguṇenāpi samasamā, tasmā sabbesampi vasena ‘‘sammāsambuddhā’’ti āha.
关于“凭默然”:一个人确实可以凭借被称为牟尼之道的道智这种“默然”而成为牟尼,但这里说的是单纯的沉默不语,所以经文才说“不是凭沉默”。所谓“愚痴相”,就是空洞无实的样子;“无智”,就是无知。因为这样的人即使沉默不语,也不能称为牟尼。或者说,他既不是默然意义上的牟尼,同时又是个空洞无知的人,这就是这句话的意思。“又如持秤者”:就像一个人拿着秤站在那里,多了就取走一些,少了就添上一些;同样,他像取走过多的部分那样,去除和避开恶行,像添补不足的部分那样,圆满善法。这样去做的人,取最上等的法——也就是戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱智见——而远离种种恶和不善业,这个人就叫牟尼。因此说“他是牟尼”。为什么说他是牟尼呢?因为前面所说的那个原因,所以他是牟尼。“他了知二世间”:是说一个人在这蕴等世间中,像把东西放上秤去称量一样,以“这些是内蕴,这些是外蕴”这样的方式,了知内与外这两类法,他就因为这一原因而被称为牟尼。也就是说,正是由于这个缘故,他被称为牟尼。巴利
Monenāti kāmañhi moneyyapaṭipadāsaṅkhātena maggañāṇamonena muni nāma hoti, idha pana tuṇhībhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘na monenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mūḷharūpoti tuccharūpo. Aviddasūti aviññū. Evarūpo hi tuṇhībhūtopi muni nāma na hoti. Atha vā moneyyamuni nāma na hoti, tucchabhāvo ca pana aññāṇī ca hotīti attho. Yo ca tulaṃva paggayhāti yathā hi tulaṃ gahetvā ṭhito atirekaṃ ce hoti, harati, ūnaṃ ce hoti, pakkhipati; evameva so atirekaṃ haranto viya pāpaṃ harati parivajjeti, ūnake pakkhipanto viya kusalaṃ paripūreti. Evañca pana karonto sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttivimuttiñāṇadassanasaṅkhātaṃ varaṃ uttamameva ādāya pāpāni akusalakammāni parivajjeti sa muni nāmāti attho. Tena so munīti kasmā pana so munīti ce? Yaṃ heṭṭhā vuttakāraṇaṃ, tena so munīti attho. Yo munāti ubho loketi yo puggalo imasmiṃ khandhādiloke tulaṃ āropetvā minanto viya ‘‘ime ajjhattikā khandhā, ime bāhirā’’tiādinā nayena ime ubho atthe munāti. Muni tena pavuccatīti tena pana kāraṇena ‘‘munī’’ti vuccatiyevāti attho.
关于“非有与有”这首偈颂,简要含义是这样:这里说的由不善与善所区分的法,就是“非有与有”之法。他在涵盖“内与外”的整个世间中,以简择智了知了非有之法与有之法。正因为他已经了知这些,所以超越了依贪等区分的七种结缚和依渴爱与邪见区分的两种网,安住不退。他具备这种称为“默然”的简择智,所以叫牟尼。“为天与人所恭敬”:这是对他的赞叹之语。因为这位诸漏已尽的牟尼,值得天与人供养,所以才这样说。巴利
Asatañcāti gāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yvāyaṃ akusalakusalappabhedo, asatañca satañca dhammo, taṃ ‘‘ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā’’ti imasmiṃ sabbaloke pavicayañāṇena asatañca satañca ñatvā dhammaṃ. Tassa ñātattā eva, rāgādibhedato sattavidhaṃ saṅgaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhibhedato duvidhaṃ jālañca aticca atikkamitvā ṭhito, so tena monasaṅkhātena pavicayañāṇena samannāgatattā muni. Devamanussehi pūjitoti idaṃ panassa thutivacanaṃ. So hi khīṇāsavamunittā devamanussānaṃ pūjāraho hoti, tasmā evaṃ vuttoti.
箭是根本词。七支箭是数量上的限定。贪箭:因为会染着,所以是贪;又因为会逼恼人、向内刺痛、难以拔出,所以也是箭,合起来就叫贪箭。嗔箭等等也是同样的道理。已拔出的箭是根本词。已抽掉的箭就是已被抽掉的箭。已举起的箭就是已被向上拔起、抽离的箭。已完全举起的箭是依前缀 sam- 来说的。已连根拔出的箭就是已被扯断的箭。已完全连根拔出的箭同样是依前缀来说的。巴利
Sallanti mūlapadaṃ. Satta sallānīti gaṇanaparicchedo. Rāgasallanti rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo ca pīḷājanakatāya antotudanatāya dunnīharaṇatāya sallañcāti rāgasallaṃ. Dosasallādīsupi eseva nayo. Abbūḷhasalloti mūlapadaṃ. Abbahitasalloti nīhaṭasallo. Uddhatasalloti uddhaṃ haṭasallo uddharitasallo. Samuddhatasalloti upasaggavasena vutto. Uppāṭitasalloti luñcitasallo. Samuppāṭitasalloti upasaggavaseneva.
恭敬而行:在布施等善法的修习中,无论是对人还是对布施之物,都以恭敬的方式去做,所以叫恭敬而行。以持续不断的方式去做,所以叫恒常而行。以稳固不退的方式去做,所以叫坚固而行。就像有一种叫迦迦鸟的小虫,走一点点就停一下,不会不间断地往前走;同样,如果有人某一天布施、供养、听法或修行沙门之法,然后过了很久才再做一次,不能持续不断地进行,这种人就被称为“不恒常而行、不坚固而行”。这里说的不是那样做,所以叫坚固而行。不退缩而行:因为不间断去做所产生的力量一直现前,心不退缩,所以叫不退缩而行。不舍弃意欲:在行善时不舍弃精进的意欲,所以叫不舍弃意欲。不舍弃重担:不放下精进的重担,所以叫不舍弃重担,意思是心不松懈。在那里,欲和勤:在这些善法中,有想要去做的法欲,也有被称为努力的精进。以敢于承担来说,叫勇气;以极其敢于承担来说,叫勇猛。这精进以到达彼岸为义,这勇气以走在前头为义,这勇猛以极为强盛为义。不退转:就是不回头退转。有念与正知:能忆持,叫念;能完全了知,叫正知,意思是从各方面清楚地知道。正知可分为:有利益的正知、适合的正知、行境的正知、不迷惑的正知。热忱:是能烧尽烦恼的精进。勤修:是最上的精进。坚定:是在行善时站稳脚跟。专修:是持续不断地用功。不放逸:是不疏忽,是不离开念。巴利
Sakkaccakārīti dānādīnaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ bhāvanāya puggalassa vā deyyadhammassa vā sakkaccakaraṇavasena sakkaccakārī. Satatabhāvakaraṇena sātaccakārī. Aṭṭhitakaraṇena aṭṭhitakārī. Yathā nāma kakaṇṭako thokaṃ gantvā thokaṃ tiṭṭhati, na nirantaraṃ gacchati; evameva yo puggalo ekadivasaṃ dānaṃ datvā pūjaṃ vā katvā dhammaṃ vā sutvā samaṇadhammaṃ vā katvā puna cirassaṃ karoti, taṃ na nirantaraṃ pavatteti. So ‘‘asātaccakārī, anaṭṭhitakārī’’ti vuccati. Ayaṃ evaṃ na karotīti aṭṭhitakārī. Anolīnavuttikoti nirantarakaraṇasaṅkhātassa vipphārassa bhāvena na līnavuttikoti anolīnavuttiko. Anikkhittacchandoti kusalakaraṇe vīriyacchandassa anikkhittabhāvena anikkhittacchando. Anikkhittadhuroti vīriyadhurassa anoropanena anikkhittadhuro, anosakkitamānasoti attho. Yo tattha chando ca vāyāmo cāti yo tesu kusaladhammesu kattukamyatādhammacchando ca payattasaṅkhāto vāyāmo ca. Ussahanavasena ussāho ca. Adhimattussahanavasena ussoḷhī ca. Vāyāmo ceso pāraṃ gamanaṭṭhena. Ussāho ceso pubbaṅgamanaṭṭhena. Ussoḷhī ceso adhimattaṭṭhena. Appaṭivāni cāti anivattanā ca. Sati ca sampajaññanti saratīti sati. Sampajānātīti sampajaññaṃ, samantato pakārehi jānātīti attho. Sātthakasampajaññaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññanti imassa sampajānassa vasena bhedo veditabbo. Ātappanti kilesatāpanavīriyaṃ. Padhānanti uttamavīriyaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānanti kusalakaraṇe patiṭṭhābhāvo. Anuyogoti anuyuñjanaṃ. Appamādoti nappamajjanaṃ, satiyā avippavāso.
不毁灭这个世间,这是根本句。自己的存在,就是自己的生命存在。他人的存在,就是来世的生命存在。自己的色、受等,就是自己的五蕴;他人的色、受等,就是来世的五蕴。欲界,就是欲有。色界,就是色有。无色界,就是无色有。接着,为了依色与无色两方面来显示这一对,把欲界和色界合为一组,把无色界单独作为一组来说。或者趣,是依住处而说的五趣。或者再生,是依投生方式而说的四生。或者结生,是依三有的连结而说的结生。或者有,是依业有而说。或者轮回,是依蕴等不间断地流转而说。或者轮转,就是三界之内的轮转。不毁灭。巴利
Imaṃ lokaṃ nāsīsatīti mūlapadaṃ. Sakattabhāvanti attano attabhāvaṃ. Parattabhāvanti paraloke attabhāvaṃ. Sakarūpavedanādayo attano pañcakkhandhe, pararūpavedanādayo ca paraloke pañcakkhandhe. Kāmadhātunti kāmabhavaṃ. Rūpadhātunti rūpabhavaṃ. Arūpadhātunti arūpabhavaṃ. Puna rūpārūpavasena dukaṃ dassetuṃ kāmadhātuṃ rūpadhātuṃ ekaṃ katvā, arūpadhātuṃ ekaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Gatiṃ vāti patiṭṭhānavasena pañcagati vuttā. Upapattiṃ vāti nibbattivasena catuyoni vuttā. Paṭisandhiṃ vāti tiṇṇaṃ bhavānaṃ ghaṭanavasena paṭisandhi vuttā. Bhavaṃ vāti kammabhavavasena. Saṃsāraṃ vāti khandhādīnaṃ abbocchinnavasena. Vaṭṭaṃ vāti tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ nāsīsatīti.